JP2019130247A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in game interest in the game machine having a setting change function.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: setting information changing means capable of setting the setting information on the probability in which a winning result is derived to any one of a plurality of pieces setting information when the operation mode at the time of power-on of a game machine is a specific operation mode; and variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern on a symbol variation display from a predetermined variation pattern table on the basis of a lottery result. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means, a variation pattern table corresponding to the operation mode at the time of power-on is used, in a specific time after the game machine is turned on.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In recent years, it has been considered that a game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a setting change function in order to make game play more diverse. In such a gaming machine, for example, setting information such as a hit probability can be set to any of a plurality of settings by a setting-related operation by a hall manager (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-6-91049

  However, for example, simply by increasing or decreasing the hit probability according to the setting information set by the hall manager, the change in the game according to the setting information is scarce, and the gaming interest is reduced. There was a risk of inviting.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest in a gaming machine having a setting change function.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and a design is based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that executes a predetermined hit game when a win result is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol,
A setting information changing means capable of setting the setting information related to the probability that the winning result is derived to any one of a plurality when the operation mode at the time of powering on the gaming machine is a specific operation mode;
Variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern related to the variation display of the symbol from a predetermined variation pattern table based on the result of the lottery,
When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determination means, a variation pattern table corresponding to the operation mode at the time of power-on is used at a specific time after power-on of the gaming machine. To do.

  In the above configuration, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table corresponding to the operation mode at the time of power-on at a specific time after power-on of the gaming machine. As a result, during the variation display of the symbol at the specific time, it is possible to execute an effect different from the specific time, such as performing an effect that suggests an operation mode at the time of turning on the power, and to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest (For example, see the description of paragraphs 1601 to 1651).

  Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest in a gaming machine having a setting change function.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door frame in the up-down direction center, and was seen from the top. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door-frame lower unit at the center of the left-right direction, and was seen from the right. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which moved the 1st movable part of the door frame production | presentation apparatus to the raising end, (b) is the state which moved the production operation part to the raising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view shown. (A) is an enlarged front view in the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the lower front speaker grille, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration part are removed in (a). (A) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of a door frame, (b) is an enlarged front view shown in the state which removed the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration part in (a). It is a top view of a door frame lower unit showing a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the surrounding light area | region in a door frame. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the door frame effect display apparatus and effect operation part in a door frame effect apparatus, (b) is decoration of the effect operation part by the effect image of a door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration effect by the effect image of a door frame effect display apparatus, and the movable effect of an effect operation part. It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 18 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 18 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the routing of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view (a) seen from the front right diagonal of the setting key switch, is the perspective view (b) seen from the front left diagonal of the setting key switch, and is a top view of the setting key switch. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a setting key switch and the cover body of a main control board box. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel or the like is transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming board showing the gaming panel in an opaque state and showing a gaming nail in which a gaming unit circulates by cutting a front unit parallel to the surface of the gaming panel and an obstacle nail. FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of a distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 30. FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of an attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG. 30. (A) is the principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from FIG. 31 etc., (b) is another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory further different from (a). FIG. (A) is the principal part enlarged view which shows the embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center character further different from FIG. 33, (b) is the principal part expansion which shows embodiment of the distribution channel group of the further center character. FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center role further different from FIG.33 and FIG.34. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st production unit of the back unit from the back. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the light-guide plate in a back 1st production unit, and a decoration board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back 2nd stage production unit mainly for every structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back 2nd production unit mainly for every structure and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism in a back 2nd stage production unit. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the some rotation decoration body in a back 2nd stage production unit. (E)-(g) is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the several rotation decoration body in the back 2nd stage production unit continued from FIG. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED in a back 2nd stage unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back third presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back third presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism and decoration board | substrate in a back third stage production unit in the state which moved the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit is revolved 15 degrees while rotating in the clockwise direction from the normal state. It is a front view which expands and shows the lower part of a game board in the state which moved the special rotation decoration body in the back 2nd stage unit to the specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the upper vertical ring decoration body and the lower vertical ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the upper vertical ring decoration body, the lower vertical ring decoration body, the left horizontal ring decoration body, and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing an example of the effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back third effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the shadow effect performed during the light emission effect in a back unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state where the game board faces from the door window of the door frame. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 4A is an enlarged view of a part of a region where an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 5B is a view of the enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board in which lead-type electronic components are replaced with predetermined SMD-type electronic components in a predetermined area, and lead-type electronic components are combined with alternative SMD-type electronic components. It is the schematic (b) which shows the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the board | substrate reduced in size. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of FIG. 65. It is a perspective view of the main control board box of a main control unit. FIG. 5A is a diagram (a) illustrating a surface (mounting surface) of a setting change board 1311 in a method of connecting a metal frame plate of a setting key switch to a ground (GND). FIG. 6B is a diagram (b) illustrating the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the method of connecting to the GND), and the setting change board 1311 in the method of insulating the metal frame plate of the setting key switch from the ground (GND). It is a figure (c) which shows the surface (mounting surface), and is a figure (d) which shows the back (solder side) of setting change board 1311 in the method of insulating the metal frame board of a setting key switch from ground (GND). is there. It is a figure which shows the lower part of the left side view of a game board in the state where the main control board box was attached to the game board. It is the modification 1 (a) which shows the lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board It is the modification 2 (b) which shows the lower part of the left view of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 72. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 78. FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electrically-powered object control processing which are performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for jackpot types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd receiving port opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process at the time of main control side power-on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine at the time of power activation of the pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine during setting change of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine in the confirmation display of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the confirmation display of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the cheating during the setting change of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the fraudulent act in the confirmation display of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of the command at the time of power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process at the time of main control side power-on. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of the game information command at the time of power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the case where a warning alert | report is extended and performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart which shows the case where the initial operation | movement of an effect member is performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the monitoring state of the fraud during the setting change of a setting value, and the confirmation display of a setting value. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after power-on of the pachinko machine, It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, A variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine is 500 times, It is a specific example of the roulette effect as the suggestion effect A2. It is a table which shows the modification of the change of the fluctuation pattern table after power-on of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
An overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after being disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven. In addition, what consists of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is called a front frame.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 is an outer frame that connects the upper ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 with the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically. An upper part 30, an outer frame lower part 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20, an outer frame upper hinge part 50 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper part 30, An outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side of the frame left portion 10 and the upper left end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower portion 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 are connected to the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame. The lower hinge part 320 is supported so as to be rotatable coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with respect to the left side when viewed from the front.

  The door frame 3 includes a game window 201 for closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly visible from the front side, and an upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B for being shot into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 140, and a handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame 3 is attached by the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape opened forward. The main body frame 4 includes a game board mounting portion 301 that holds the game board 5 so as to be detachable from the front, a main body frame upper hinge part 310 provided at the upper left end of the front view, and a main body provided at the lower left end. A frame lower hinge part 320, a ball launcher 330 that is provided on the right side below the game board mounting part 301 and is used to drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, an upper plate 130, and a lower plate The payout device 350 for paying out the game balls B to 140, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the locking unit 360 for locking the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are provided.

  The main body frame 4 has a main body frame upper hinge part 310 and a main body frame lower hinge part 320 attached to the outer frame 2 by an outer frame upper hinge part 50 and an outer frame lower hinge part 60 so as to be openable and closable. The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable via the upper frame hinge portion and the lower door frame hinge portion.

  The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main body frame 4. Although not shown in the drawing, the game board 5 is a general winning opening, a first start opening for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B , A gate unit, a second start opening, a special winning opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying effect images.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 which are separated from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 are connected to each other. The outer frame upper portion 30, the outer frame lower portion 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20, and the outer frame upper hinge attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper portion 30. Part 50, and a lower part of the right side of outer frame left part 10 and an outer frame lower hinge part 60 attached to the upper left end of outer frame lower part 40.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge part 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge part 310 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 can support the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[3. Door frame]
The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine. 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame viewed from above by cutting at the center in the vertical direction.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 stores a game window 201 for closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be shot from the front side, and a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a. A tray 130 and a handle 111 operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper tray 130 into the game area 5a are provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all, and some are subjected to decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so that electromagnetic noise may enter.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the various decorative portions, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are made of metal door frames in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 to be described later via wiring not shown. Electrically connected to the reinforcing unit (Some decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown). Some are attached and electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit). Thereby, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground.

  In addition, electromagnetic noise that has entered the decorative parts of the various decorative parts that are decorated on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to a metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown), and a door frame metal grounding described later. It is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the wire, and is transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit (not shown) whose front view extends vertically and a portion from the lower end to a height of about ¼ of the total height on the front surface of the door frame base unit. The door frame lower unit 100 provided, the door frame upper unit 200 provided on the front side of the door frame base unit above the door frame lower unit 100, the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 of the main body frame 4, and The main body frame lower hinge portion 320 includes a door frame upper hinge portion and a door frame lower hinge portion (not shown) that are rotatably supported by the body frame lower hinge portion 320.

  The door frame base unit includes a door frame base (not shown) having a gaming window 201 that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base. A door frame main relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the rear view in the lower part, a door frame sub relay board (not shown) attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board, and a door frame sub relay board A rear relay board (not shown) attached to the left in the rear view, a door frame relay board cover (not shown) for covering the door frame main relay board and a part of the door frame sub relay board from the rear side, and the rear handle relay A post-handle relay relay board cover (not shown) for covering the board from the rear side and a cable cover (not shown) for covering a wiring cable (not shown) are provided.

  The door frame base unit includes a metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base and a metal door frame (not shown) attached to the door frame reinforcement unit. A hinge assembly and a door frame lower hinge member; and a metal opening / closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit.

  The door frame reinforcing unit is attached to the rear side of the door frame base to reinforce the door frame base and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly and the door frame lower hinge member are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 127 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 360 of the main body frame 4.

  The door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to give rigidity, and is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). Connected. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a handle 111 that can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, a bulge portion 120 that bulges forward, and a bulge portion 120. An upper plate 130 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a lower plate 140 for storing the game ball B provided below the upper plate 130, A door frame effect device 150 that is provided on the upper surface of the bulge portion and presents a predetermined effect to the player, and a game ball B that is provided on the upper surface of the bulge portion 120 and is placed in the upper plate 130 is placed in the lower plate The upper dish ball removal button 124 to be released to the ball, the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and the door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126. Provided in front of display unit 185 and bulge 120 It includes a lower front speaker 191, a being.

  The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 includes a gaming window 201 whose inner periphery is reverse U-shaped so that the inside of the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 can be viewed from the front, and a transparent closed glass that closes the gaming window 201. 205, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided along the inner periphery of the gaming window 201, a door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame. A door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covering the upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220; and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230. ing.

  The door frame 3 includes a ball feeding unit (not shown) for sending the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 one by one to the ball launcher 330 of the main body frame 4. The ball feeding unit includes a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 18) controlled by the firing control unit 372 of the payout control board 633.

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut from the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 12A is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable part of the door frame effect device is moved to the ascending end, and FIG. 12B is an effect operating part moved from the state of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows a state. FIG. 13A is an enlarged front view in the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 13B is an enlarged front view showing the state in which the lower front speaker grille, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration portion are removed in FIG. .

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is also disposed below the game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and a handle unit 110 that can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, and above and to the left of the handle unit 110. And a bulging portion 120 that bulges forward with respect to a surface that closes the front surface of the main body frame 4.

  Further, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device arrangement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and an upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B, and a center in the left-right direction below the upper plate 130. A lower frame 140 for storing the game ball B provided on the left side, and a door frame effect device that is provided on the device arrangement unit 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and can present a predetermined effect to the player 150, a door frame sub-display unit 185 provided in the upper right corner in a front view, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided in front of the bulging unit 120.

[3-1a. Handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 includes a handle 111 that can be grasped and rotated by a player, a handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and a handle 111 that rotatably supports the handle 111. The handle base 113 is provided. Further, the handle unit 110 is provided in the handle base 113, and a handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 18) for detecting the rotation angle of the handle 111, and that the player is touching the handle 111. A handle touch sensor 115 to be detected, a handle return spring (not shown) that urges the handle 111 counterclockwise, and a single button 116 that can be pressed by the player are provided.

  The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves to the right as it goes forward. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 111 of the handle unit 110, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable. The handle unit 110 is configured such that the handle base 113 can be expanded and contracted in the direction in which the rotation shaft of the handle 111 extends, and can be held at a desired expansion and contraction position. Thereby, since the position of the handle 111 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, the handle 111 can be operated at a position where the player can easily operate.

  The handle 111 is supported on the handle base 113 so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (here, four) protrusions that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction and protrude from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 has translucency and can be decorated with various colors by a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged on the rear side.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 114 of the handle unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. A driving force of a launch solenoid 331 in a ball launcher 330, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 that changes due to a rotation operation of the handle 111, and the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 and the like. When the player touches the handle 111 or the like, the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like changes. Therefore, whether or not the player is touching the handle 111 by detecting the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like by the handle touch sensor. Detect. In the present embodiment, when the handle 111 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 115 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is accepted, and the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111 is received. Thus, the driving of the firing solenoid 331 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

  That is, even if the player does not touch the handle 111 and tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 111 by some method, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 331 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 111 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  When the player presses the single button 116 of the handle unit 110 while the handle 111 is being rotated, the firing control unit 372 of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the firing solenoid 331. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 111, launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily. Then, by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 116, the game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength before the single button 116 is operated.

[3-1b. Bulge]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 is formed in a T-shape with a short shaft extending in the front view and the shape in plan view with the rear end side in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. It is formed in an isosceles trapezoidal shape so that the width becomes narrower toward the front with a full width (see FIG. 10 and the like). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward slightly longer than half the full width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to be positioned downward as it goes forward.

  In the left-right direction, the bulging portion 120 has a central portion that is obtained by dividing the entire width of the door frame 3 into three parts that bulge forward over the entire height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3, and the remaining portions (both left and right sides) ) Bulges forward from the top to about 部位 part of the total height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3. Thereby, the shape of the bulging portion 120 in a front view is a T-shape. The bulging portion 120 has a speaker mounting opening 120a that is squarely opened at the lower center of the front surface. The lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to the speaker attachment opening 120a.

  In addition, the bulging portion 120 has a sound emitting slit 120b and a heat radiating slit extending vertically on both left and right sides of a portion extending vertically in the T-shape when viewed from the front (the portion where the speaker mounting opening 120a is opened). 120c. The sound emission slit 120b is for releasing sound from a lower front speaker 191 to be described later. Further, the heat radiating slit 120c is for releasing heat from the first elevating drive motor 175b, the second elevating drive motor 182 and the lower front speaker 191 etc. in the door frame effect device 150 described later.

  The bulging portion 120 includes a bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 provided at the upper edge of the front surface, a bulging portion lower decoration portion 122 provided at the lower edge of the front surface, and a rear end at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A device arrangement portion 123 provided so as to protrude forward from the side, an upper plate ball removal button 124 provided on the upper surface for releasing the game ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140, and an upper plate ball A ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided behind the unplug button 124 are provided.

  The bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the bulge part lower decoration part 122 are milky white with translucency, and are formed in a semi-columnar shape. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 extends along the upper edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and is provided so as to decorate the upper edge of the front side of the upper plate 130 to be described. The bulging part upper decoration part 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 121a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. The plurality of LEDs 121a are full-color LEDs.

  The upper decoration part 121 of the bulge part is located in the upper part where the distance between the two rear ends separated in the left-right direction is separated in the left-right direction in the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 of the door frame upper unit 200 described later. This is the same as the interval between the lower ends of the decorative portion 212. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is formed so as to coincide with the upper inner decoration portion 212 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration with the upper inner decoration portion 212. Yes. The bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the upper inner decoration part 212 constitute a first peripheral light area LA1 that decorates the periphery of the game window 201 with light emission.

  The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 decorates the upper side of the upper peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 and raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper plate 130. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121 a is irradiated into the upper plate 130 (in the storage region 131), and a game stored in the storage region 131. The sphere B can be illuminated and decorated.

  The bulging portion lower decoration portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120. The bulging part lower decoration part 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 122 a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulging portion lower decoration portion 122. The plurality of LEDs 122a are full-color LEDs.

  The device arrangement part 123 is formed in a shape in which the shape in plan view is a combination of a rectangle that is long on the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as the base. In the device arrangement portion 123, the width in the left-right direction on the rear end side is about ½ of the total width of the door frame 3. The device disposition portion 123 is open on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and is formed in a container shape extending from above to the inside of the bulging portion 120.

  The upper dish ball removal button 124 is provided on the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper dish 130. When the upper dish ball removal button 124 is pressed downward, the game ball B stored in the upper dish 130 can be discharged from the outlet 136 to the lower dish 140. While the upper plate ball removal button 124 is pressed, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is released to the lower plate 140, and when the pressure is released, it moves upward and returns to the original state. Release to the lower pan 140 is stopped.

  The top ball removal button 124 has a square outer shape. The upper tray ball removal button 124 has a light emitting decoration portion 124a that emits light by an LED disposed below. The light emitting decoration portion 124 a is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 124. By causing the light emitting decoration portion 124a to emit light, it is possible to lightly decorate the upper dish ball removal button 124.

  The ball lending button 125 is disposed behind the upper dish ball removal button 124 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is arranged on the right side of the ball lending button 125 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The return button 126 has an outer shape of a regular triangle.

  The ball lending button 125 is used to push a predetermined number of game balls B up by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing it. It is supplied into the tray 130 and the game ball B is lent out to the player. When the return button 126 is pressed, the cash or the prepaid card that has been rented out is deducted and returned to the ball lending machine. Note that the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display unit 185.

[3-1c. Top plate]
The upper frame 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and has a storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored. The storage area 131 is connected to the front area 131a on the front side of the device arrangement portion 123 (a part surrounded by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 15) and the side areas 131b on both the left and right sides of the apparatus arrangement portion 123. (Part surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 15).

  The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower from the rear end side toward the front front region 131a side. The right side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes wider toward the middle from the front region 131a side on the front end side, and then the width becomes narrower toward the rear end side. It extends. The upper plate 130 (storage region 131) is formed so as to surround the front side and the left and right outer sides of the device placement unit 123.

  The upper plate 130 includes a bottom wall 132 that forms a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 that rises upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall that rises upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132. 134, a supply port 135 opening forward at the rear end of the left side region 131b, a delivery port 136 opening forward at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and a delivery port 136 , And an alignment portion 137 that aligns the game balls B toward the delivery port 136.

  The bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 is inclined so as to become lower from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136. The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 rise substantially vertically. The surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are formed in a mirror shape. In the upper plate 130, a storage region 131 is formed by the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134. The depth of the upper plate 130 (height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest part (near the supply port 135).

  The supply port 135 is for supplying the game ball B paid out from the payout device 350 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131. The delivery port 136 is for sending the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launcher 330 or the lower plate 140. The alignment portion 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 is lowered toward the delivery port 136 in the vicinity of the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device arrangement portion 123 that combines the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in plan view. ing.

  Moreover, the upper plate 130 includes a stored light emitting decoration portion 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138 a that can irradiate light into the storage region 131. The plurality of LEDs 138 a of the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 and have a height that is substantially parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132. Is provided. These LEDs 138a are full color LEDs. By causing the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 to emit light, the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 or the storage area 131 can be decorated with light emission.

  The upper plate 130 is provided with a bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 raises the front end side of the storage region 131, so that more The game ball B can be stored. Further, the upper plate 130 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121 a of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is irradiated into the storage region 131, and the light from the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is also emitted. The game ball B in the storage area 131 is illuminated and decorated.

  The upper plate 130 has a front area 131a on the front side of the device arrangement portion 123 where the door frame effect device 150 is arranged, and side areas 131b on the left and right outer sides, and the door frame effect device 150 is provided by the front area 131a. Since the game ball B can be stored further forward than the game ball B, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen by the player. In the upper plate 130, the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend in the front-rear direction, so that the game balls B stored in the side region 131b are also added to the front region 131a. It can be easily seen from the player side.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to see the game ball B in the upper plate 130, so that the player can be conscious of the storage amount of the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is advanced by the progress of the game. Even if the amount of storage decreases due to consumption of the player, it is easy for the player to recognize the decrease in the storage amount and the game ball B can be replenished into the upper plate 130. The game ball B can be prevented from disappearing from the upper plate 130, the interruption of the game can be prevented suddenly, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game can be prevented, and the interest of the player in the game can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so that the player can see the line of sight from the game area 5a. By simply dropping it onto the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and it is not necessary for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130. It becomes possible to make it easy for the player to concentrate on the game, and to make the game enjoyable and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the upper plate 130, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out of the storage area 131 from the outlet 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the dish 130 is consumed, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (front area 131a), and it is easy for the player to recognize the consumption speed, consumption amount, and the like of the game ball B. And the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  In addition, the upper plate 130 is provided with a stored light emitting decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131, and light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 (LED 138 a) is reflected upward by the game ball B. The game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be shining and decorated with light from the light emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light decoration of the game ball B. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the amount of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effect as described above. it can.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134 and the like are formed in a mirror shape, so that the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are Since it passes on the peripheral wall of 130, the player can be given an illusion that the game ball B is also stored beyond the peripheral wall, and it appears that many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. be able to.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 so that the game balls B are aligned, so that the game ball B can be prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the delivery port 136. The game balls B stored in the tray 130 can be smoothly sent from the outlet 136 to the ball launcher 330 and the lower tray 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the game ball B being clogged, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 disposed in the right side region 131b is visible from the front, so that the game ball B can be seen from the delivery port 136 that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. The state of being sent out can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[3-1d. Lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 and on the left side of the center portion bulging forward in the bulging portion 120, and is formed in a shallow dish shape opened upward. A space is provided between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left portion of the bulging portion 120) so that the player's hand can be inserted. The lower plate 140 has a front surface formed in substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in plan view.

  The lower dish 140 is formed at the lowest part of the bottom wall. The lower dish ball hole 141 (see FIG. 9) that can be opened and closed and the lower dish ball hole 141 are opened and closed to open the lower dish 140 inside the lower dish 140. A lower tray ball removal button 142 for discharging the game ball B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 18) for detecting that the lower plate 140 is filled with the game ball B. doing.

  The lower ball 140 is supplied with the game ball B in the upper plate 130 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 124. The lower ball 140 is supplied with the game ball B paid out from the payout device 350 in a state where the game ball B is full in the upper plate 130. When the inside of the lower plate 140 is filled with the game balls B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects that the lower plate 140 is full. When the full plate of the lower plate 140 is detected, the game ball B by the payout device 350 is detected. Is temporarily suspended. Thereafter, when the full tank in the lower plate 140 is eliminated (the full tank detection sensor 143 is not detected), the temporary stop of the dispensing is canceled.

  The lower dish ball removal button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower dish 140 and has an outer shape of a square. When the lower dish ball removal button 142 is pressed backward, the lower dish ball removal hole 141 is opened and the lower dish ball removal button 142 is held in a pressed state. When the lower dish ball removal button 142 is further pushed backward in this state, the lower dish ball removal hole 141 is closed and the lower dish ball removal button 142 moves forward to return to the original state.

  The lower dish ball removal button 142 has a light emitting decorative portion 142a that emits light by an LED (not shown). The light emission decoration part 142a is arrange | positioned so that the right-and-left both sides and upper side of the lower dish ball extraction button 142 may be enclosed. By causing the light emitting decoration part 142a to emit light, the lower dish ball removal button 142 can be decorated with light emission. For example, in a “big hit” game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out, the player can be directed to the lower plate 140 by decorating the lower plate ball removal button 142 with the light emitting decoration unit 142a. Then, by operating the lower tray ball removal button 142, the game ball B in the lower tray 140 can be discharged to a lower dollar box or the like, and the lower tray 140 becomes full and the payout of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. Can be avoided.

[3-1e. Overall configuration of door frame directing device]
The door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement unit 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The door frame effect device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device arrangement portion 123 that is open upward, a door frame effect display device 152 that is provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151, A lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152; a first movable portion 155 provided with an upper surface in front of the lower speaker unit 153 so that it can be raised and lowered above the device cover 151; An effect operating unit 160 that can be moved up and down on one movable unit 155, a first elevating mechanism 170 that elevates and lowers the first movable unit 155, and a second elevating mechanism that elevates and lowers the effect operating unit 160. And a mechanism 180.

[3-1e-1. Device cover]
The device cover 151 is formed in a shape in which the shape in plan view is the same as that of the device placement unit 123, and is a combination of a rectangular shape that is long to the left and right, and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as the base. The device cover 151 has an opening 151a that is largely open in an isosceles trapezoidal shape in an isosceles trapezoidal part, and an inclination that is bent and inclined so that the rear end side is near the center in the front-rear direction in a quadrilateral part. The surface portion 151b and a plurality of grill holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape in the vicinity of the front end of the quadrangular portion are provided. The entire device cover 151 is inclined so that the front end side is lowered. The first movable portion 155 is inserted through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151.

  In the device cover 151, the upper end of the inclined surface portion 151 b coincides with the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200. Further, the device cover 151 is inclined such that the front side of the inclined surface portion 151b is lowered toward the front. Thereby, even if the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can roll forward and be released into the upper plate 130.

[3-1e-2. Door frame effect display device]
In the door frame effect display device 152, the display screen for displaying the effect image is formed in a rectangular shape that is long to the left and right, and the length in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than ½ of the full width of the door frame 3. The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower side is positioned forward with respect to the upper side. That is, the door frame effect display device 152 is directed near the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side located at a height near the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, and a lower side located at a lower level than the bottom surface of the front region 131 a in the upper plate 130. The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side located near the rear end of the door frame lower unit 100 (device cover 151), and a lower side located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device with a screen ratio of 16: 9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 includes a pair of lower speakers 153a that are spaced apart from each other left and right, a lower speaker base 153b to which the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and a lower speaker base 153b that is attached to the lower speaker 153a. A lower speaker decoration portion 153c for decorating the outer periphery and the space between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output a high-frequency sound.

  The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear side is located above the front side, and a rear surface that extends downward from the rear side of the front surface perpendicularly to the front side. It is formed in a container shape that is open to the left and right. In addition, the lower speaker base 153b has a circular attachment hole formed in the front face so as to be separated from the left and right. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined at an angle smaller than the horizontal angle of the door frame effect display device 152 (see FIG. 11 and the like).

  The lower speaker decoration portion 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and a plurality of annular portions disposed on the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of lower speakers 153a disposed between the pair of lower speakers 153a. And an arcuate portion. The lower speaker decoration portion 153c has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by causing an LED (not shown) mounted on the lower speaker decoration board to emit light.

  The lower speaker unit 153 is attached to the inside of the lower speaker base 153b so that the pair of lower speakers 153a faces forward from the attachment holes of the lower speaker base 153b. As a result, the pair of lower speakers 153 a are directed near the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The lower speaker unit 153 has an upper end located at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction of the door frame effect display device 152 and a lower end located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. Yes.

  The lower speaker unit 153 has a front end positioned forward from the rear end of the opening 151a of the device cover 151 (slightly rearward from the effect operation unit 160), and a rear end of the lower speaker unit 153 is a front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. Located in the vicinity. The lower speaker unit 153 can be viewed through the transparent device cover 151. Further, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be radiated well to the outside (outside the pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable part main body 156.

  In addition, the lower speaker unit 153 decorates the lower speaker decoration portion 153c with a light emitting decoration of the lower speaker decoration board 153c by using an LED of a lower speaker decoration board (not shown), so that the speaker grilles of the lower speaker 153a and the lower speaker 153a (device cover 151 and first movable body main body) 156 and the player can show the player the luminous decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines.

[3-1e-4. First moving part]
The first movable portion 155 includes a container-shaped transparent first movable portion main body 156 that is open at the rear and lower sides, a first movable portion base 157 that is attached to the lower side of the first movable portion main body 156, A first movable portion cover 158 attached to the upper surface of one movable portion main body 156 and a first movable portion decorative board 159 attached to the inner side surface of the first movable portion main body 156 are provided (FIG. 11). And FIG. 12). The first movable portion 155 is disposed in the opening 151 a of the device cover 151. The first movable portion 155 is supported by the first lifting mechanism 170 so as to be lifted and lowered by the first lifting mechanism 170.

  The first movable portion main body 156 has a shape in plan view similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, and a combination of a square that is long on the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as the base. It is formed into a shape. The first movable portion main body 156 is open at the rear and lower sides with an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid and a side wall extending downward from the side of the upper wall excluding the rear side. It is formed in a container shape. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable portion main body 156 is inclined so that the front side is lowered, and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is raised.

  The first movable portion main body 156 includes an opening 156a that penetrates in a rectangular shape that is long to the left and right in the vicinity of the front end of the upper wall, and a plurality of grilles that penetrate in a hexagonal shape in a portion excluding the opening 156a on the upper wall It has a hole 156b and a plurality of through holes 156c arranged in a circumferential direction on the side wall and penetrating in a square shape. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156c is formed to have a size such that the LED 159a mounted on the first movable portion decorative board 159 faces outward.

  The first movable part base 157 is formed in a flat plate shape that is long on the left and right. The first movable part base 157 is formed so that the width in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction at the opening 156 a of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 so that the front end is substantially in the same position as the front end of the opening 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable part base 157 is attached to the first movable part main body 156 in a horizontal state. The first movable portion base 157 has a pair of lifting sliders 172 of the first lifting mechanism 170 attached to the lower surface, and a second lifting base 181 of the second lifting mechanism 180 attached to the upper surface.

  The first movable portion cover 158 has the same outer shape as the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 and has the same size. The first movable portion cover 158 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening frame portion 158a corresponding to the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156, and a plurality of louver portions 158b extending in the left-right direction and spaced apart in the front-rear direction. ,have. The first movable part cover 158 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 has a lower end protruding below the lower end of the louver portion 158b, and is inserted into the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. An effect operation unit 160 is inserted into the frame of the opening frame 158a.

  The louver portion 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 is formed in a triangular shape such that the portions excluding the left and right end portions extend with a certain width, and the left and right end portions spread obliquely forward. . The plurality (here, five) of louver portions 158b are provided in the front-rear direction with a space slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored between the louver parts 158b. Incidentally, there is one game ball B between the first louver parts 158b from the front, two game balls B between the second louver parts 158b, and the third louver parts 158b. Three game balls B can be stored in between (see FIG. 15).

  The first movable portion decorative substrate 159 has a plurality of LEDs 159a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs 159 a are arranged at positions corresponding to the through holes 156 c of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable portion decorative substrate 159 is attached to the inside of the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156, so that the plurality of mounted LEDs 159a face outward from the through hole 156c in the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable part decorative substrate 159 is a full color LED.

  When the LED 159a emits light when the first movable portion 155 is lowered (normal state), the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 is formed between the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156. Through the gap, the upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be illuminated. Further, when the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 causes the LED 159a to emit light with the first movable portion 155 raised, the first movable portion main body 156 can be illuminated and decorated, Light can be emitted forward (player side).

[3-1e-5. Production control unit]
The effect operation unit 160 is a so-called push button that is provided so as to be movable up and down with respect to the first movable unit 155 and that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 160 is supported by the second lifting mechanism 180 so as to be lifted and lowered by the second lifting mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The production operation unit 160 has a translucent pressing operation unit 161 having “PUSH” characters formed on the upper surface, and an operation in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An operation unit movable base 163 having a pressing operation unit 161 and an operation unit decoration substrate 162 attached to the upper surface, the operation unit movable base 163 supported to be movable up and down, and a lower surface of the second lifting mechanism 180. The operation unit base 164 attached to the first movable unit 155 via the (second lifting base 181), the operation unit spring urging the operation unit movable base 163 upward, and the biasing force of the operation unit spring And a pressing detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 18) that detects the pressing operation portion 161 that has moved downward against the above.

  The pressing operation unit 161 is a rectangle that is long on the left and right, and the letters “PUSH” are formed in a relief shape on the top surface. The pressing operation portion 161 is formed so that the outer peripheral shape is slightly smaller than the inside of the opening frame portion 158 a in the first movable portion cover 158.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation unit decoration substrate 162 are full-color LEDs. The operation unit decoration board 162 includes a first LED that emits light upward and a second LED that emits light outward along the upper surface of the operation part decoration board 162. The operation unit decoration substrate 162 can cause the pressing operation unit 161 (characters “PUSH”) to emit light by causing the first LED to emit light. Further, by emitting light from the second LED, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 can be decorated with light emission, and when the effect operation unit 160 is at the lower end, the opening frame unit 158a of the first movable unit cover 158 is provided. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The operation unit movable base 163 is formed in a box shape that is long on the left and right sides with the lower part opened. The operation unit movable base 163 is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 161. A pressing operation unit 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation unit decoration substrate 162. The operation unit base 164 is inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 from below.

  The operation unit base 164 has a size that can be inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 and has a box-shaped part that is long on the left and right, and the same position as the outer periphery of the operation unit movable base 163. It is comprised by the flange-shaped site | part which protrudes outward. The operation unit base 164 supports the operation unit movable base 163 so as to be movable up and down within a predetermined range. A second lifting mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 164.

  The operation spring has an upper end in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operation unit movable base 163 and a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation unit base 164. The press detection sensor 165 is attached to the inside of the operation unit base 164, and detects a detection piece (not shown) of the operation unit movable base 163, thereby performing a pressing operation of the press operation unit 161 via the operation unit movable base 163. Detect.

[3-1e-6. First lifting mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 11, the first elevating mechanism 170 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and is for elevating the first movable portion 155. The first elevating mechanism 170 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction, and extends vertically. A slider 172, a connecting portion 173 that connects the pair of elevating sliders 172, and one end rotatably attached to the elevating slider 172, and the other end rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120 A pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating drive mechanism 175 for rotating the pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating detection sensor 176 for detecting the elevating position of the elevating slider 172 (first movable portion 155), It has.

  The pair of elevating rails 171 are separated from each other at an interval longer than the length in the left-right direction of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). The pair of elevating rails 171 are attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to extend vertically. Each of the pair of lift sliders 172 has an upper end attached to the lower surface of the first movable part base 157 of the first movable part 155 and a lower end attached to the connecting part 173.

  The pair of lift arms 174 are attached to the corresponding lift slider 172 so that the front end sides of the lift arms 174 can rotate about the axis extending in the left-right direction and can slide in the longitudinal direction of the lift arms 174. . The pair of lifting arms 174 has a rear end attached to the bulging portion 120 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction. Each of the pair of lifting arms 174 has a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction.

  The first lift drive mechanism 175 is provided for each of the pair of lift arms 174. That is, a pair of first elevating drive mechanisms 175 are provided. The first lifting mechanism 170 rotates the pair of lifting arms 174 in the direction in which the front end sides of the pair of lifting arms 174 move upward by the first lifting drive mechanism 175, respectively, so that the distal ends of the pair of lifting arms 174 The first movable unit 155 (the production operation unit 160) can be moved up and down through a pair of lift sliders 172 to which are attached.

  The first elevating drive mechanism 175 will be described in detail. The first elevating drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and revolves around the axis extending in the left-right direction. A pin 175a and a first lifting drive motor 175b for revolving the first lifting pin 175a are provided. More specifically, the first raising / lowering drive mechanism 175 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and extends in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction, and extends in the left-right direction to the drive base 175 c. A spur-gear-like elevating gear 175d, which is rotatably attached to the periphery of the shaft and has a first elevating pin 175a attached at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft, meshes with the elevating gear 175d. And a drive gear 175e attached to the rotary shaft of one lifting drive motor 175b.

  In the present embodiment, two first elevating drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and the drive gear 175e attached to the rotation shaft of each first elevating drive motor 175b is attached to the elevating gear 175d. They are meshing with each other. That is, one lifting gear 175d is rotated by two first lifting drive motors 175b.

  When the first elevating drive mechanism 175 rotates the drive gears 175e attached to the respective rotation shafts of the two first elevating drive motors 175b in the same direction, the elevating gears engaged with the respective drive gears 175e. As 175d rotates, the first elevating pin 175a revolves around the axis of the elevating gear 175d. As the first elevating pin 175a revolves, the first elevating pin 175a slides in the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, so that the elevating arm 174 is on the rear end side. It rotates (rotates) around the center. Thereby, since the front end side of the raising / lowering arm 174 moves to an up-down direction, the 1st movable part 155 can be raised / lowered via the raising / lowering slider 172 to which the front end side of the raising / lowering arm 174 is attached.

  The first raising / lowering detection sensor 176 enters a detection state when the pair of raising / lowering sliders 172 are positioned at the lower moving ends (lowering ends). That is, the first lifting detection sensor 176 detects that the first movable portion 155 is located at the lower end via the lifting slider 172.

[3-1e-7. Second lifting mechanism]
The second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable portion base 157 in the first movable portion 155, and also supports the operation portion base 164 of the effect operation portion 160 so as to be movable up and down, A second elevating drive motor 182 attached to the second elevating base 181, a second elevating pin 183 attached to the rotating shaft of the second elevating drive motor 182 and revolving at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft; The second elevating pin 183 is slidably inserted, and the elevating transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction and having the upper part attached to the operation unit base 164, and the second elevating base 181 (production operation unit 160) And a second lift detection sensor 180a that detects the lifting and lowering.

  The second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 has a direction in which the axis of the operation unit base 164 extends in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 (an inclined axis that is positioned forward as it goes upward). ) So that it can be raised and lowered.

  When the second elevating mechanism 180 revolves the second elevating pin 183 by the second elevating drive motor 182, the second elevating pin 183 slides in the slit 184 a of the elevating transmission piece 184 and moves the inner surface of the slit 184 a up and down. The lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 moves in the up-and-down direction. Since the operation part base 164 of the effect operation part 160 is attached to the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184, the effect operation part 160 can be raised and lowered via the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184.

  In the second lifting mechanism 180, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned in the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184 a extending in the front-rear direction when the lifting transmission piece 184 (the effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the lower end. Yes. That is, the second raising / lowering pin 183 is located at the bottom dead center. In order to raise the lifting transmission piece 184 from this state, the second lifting drive motor 182 causes the second lifting pin 183 to revolve so as to have a forward movement vector. Accordingly, the second elevating pin 183 slides forward in the slit 184a, the second elevating pin 183 presses the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, and the elevating transmission piece 184 moves upward. Become.

  When the line that connects the center of the second lifting pin 183 and the center of revolution passes the center axis of the slit 184a by further revolving the second lifting pin 183, the second lifting pin 183 moves up the inner surface of the slit 184a. Slid backward in the slit 184a. When the second elevating pin 183 reaches the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184a, the driving of the second elevating drive motor 182 is stopped and the revolution of the second elevating pin 183 is stopped. In this state, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, and the elevating transmission piece 184 is located at the ascending end.

  When a force is applied to move the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 downward by pressing the presentation operation unit 160 in a state where the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 (effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the rising end, Since the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, no force in the front-rear direction acts on the second elevating pin 183. Accordingly, since the second elevating pin 183 does not revolve, the elevating transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

  In addition, when the effect operation unit 160 is pressed with the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 positioned at the ascending end, the player operating in front of the effect operation unit 160 operates, so the effect operation unit 160 On the other hand, in addition to the downward movement vector, the backward movement vector acts. On the other hand, in the state of the rising end, since the second lifting pin 183 is located at the rear end of the slit 184a, even if a backward movement vector acts on the second lifting pin 183 via the slit 184a, The second elevating pin 183 contacts the rear end of the slit 184a to prevent the second elevating pin 183 from revolving, and the elevating transmission piece 184 does not move downward. Can be maintained.

  The second lift detection sensor 180a is in a detection state when the second lift base 181 is positioned at the downward movement end (downward end). That is, the second lifting detection sensor 180a detects that the effect operation unit 160 is located at the lower end via the second lifting base 181.

[3-1f. Door frame sub display section]
The door frame sub-display unit 185 is arranged on the right side of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150 and behind the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126. The door frame sub-display unit 185 includes three 7-segment LEDs arranged on the left and right. The door frame sub-display unit 185 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower end side is positioned forward with respect to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub-display portion 185 is disposed at the same height as the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 from which the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 protrude.

  The door frame sub-display unit 185 covers a frame-shaped sub-display unit decoration frame 186 that decorates the outer periphery of three square 7-segment LEDs, and covers the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display unit decoration frame 186. And a transparent sub-display portion cover 187 that is inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151.

[3-1 g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 has a lower front speaker 191 mounted behind the speaker mounting port 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of grill holes through which the speaker mounting port 120a passes. A lower front speaker grille 192 that is closed, a horizontal grid-shaped grill decoration frame 193 that is disposed in front of the lower front speaker grille 192 and is attached to the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and each grid in the grill decoration frame 193 A bar-shaped lattice decoration portion 194 disposed on the rear side of each portion, and a lattice decoration LED 195 that is provided at both ends of each lattice decoration portion 194 and illuminates and decorates the lattice decoration portion 194.

  The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs a low-frequency sound. The lower front speaker grille 192 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120. The lower front speaker grill 192 is a punching metal.

  The grill decoration frame 193 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grill decoration frame 193 is a plurality of frames arranged by connecting a rectangular frame portion along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120 and two sides extending vertically from the top and the bottom of the frame portion. And a lattice portion. In the lattice portion extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 193, the portions (general portions) excluding the left and right ends extend with a certain width, and the both ends in the left and right directions are inclined downward toward the ends. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape extending with a certain width after spreading.

  The lattice decoration part 194 has translucency, and is formed in a column shape that is long on the left and right. The left and right ends of the lattice decoration part 194 are located on the rear side of the trapezoidal part of the lattice part in the grill decoration frame 193, and the remaining parts are located below the general part of the lattice part. Thereby, the lattice decoration part 194 can visually recognize the site | part except the both ends from the front. The plurality of lattice decoration portions 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grille 192. The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full color LED.

  The lower front speaker unit 190 can output a low frequency (low frequency) sound among the sounds to be output by the lower front speaker 191. Since this lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front surface of the bulging portion 120 bulging forward, it gives sound pressure to the player seated on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be made. In addition, the lower front speaker unit 190 can appropriately decorate the lattice decoration portion 194 by causing the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 195 to emit light appropriately, and can also be installed in the grill decoration frame 193 via the lattice decoration portion 194 (lower front speaker). The front side of the grill 192 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
Next, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit will be briefly described. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown), cooperates with the locking unit 360, opens and closes the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. 4 is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 127 includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, a metal key hole 128 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a key hole 128 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. And a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that rotates together with a regular metal key that is inserted into the frame.

  The cylinder main body of the cylinder lock 127 has a rear end attached to the front piece portion through the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and from the rear end toward the front side at a position facing the central axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a metal transmission cylinder (not shown) of the metal locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear. Since the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the key hole 128) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4 are in contact with each other in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the cylinder lock 127. And the locking unit 360 are electrically connected.

  Note that when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 is made of a regular metal The key is inserted into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotated in a predetermined direction (a direction corresponding to the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction). An attendant such as a game hall clerk, when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, causes electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge by charging itself through the regular metal key. Thus, it is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various substrates (for example, a substrate having a power supply line and a substrate ground line) are not disposed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127 in order to prevent intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Next, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10 and FIG. FIG. 14A is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and FIG. 14B is an enlarged front view showing the state where the grill decorative frame and the lattice decorative portion are removed in FIG. The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 has a game window 201 that allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. And a door frame upper unit base 202 formed in an inverted U shape with an inner periphery that becomes a gaming window 201 open downward and an outer periphery that is long and rectangular in a front view, and a door frame upper unit base 202. And a transparent closing glass 205 that closes an inverted U-shaped inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202.

  The door frame upper unit 200 includes a door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 provided in a band shape along the inverted U-shaped inner periphery of the gaming window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a door frame upper unit. The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 on the front surface of the base 202, the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and the door frame covering the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. An upper outer edge decoration unit 230 and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 are provided.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 has a flat plate shape and is formed in a gate shape opened downward. The door frame upper unit base 202 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer periphery is long vertically when viewed from the front, and has an inverted U shape whose inner periphery is opened downward. The size of the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed larger than the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged on the rear side.

[3-2b. Closed glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). . The closing glass 205 is arranged so that the game area 5a prevents the game ball B from dropping out of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. It is for closing the front side. The closing glass 205 is a transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Door frame upper interior decoration unit]
The door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 extends along the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a constant width and protrudes forward along the wall-shaped upper inner base 211 and the upper inner base 211. A semi-cylindrical upper inner decorative portion 212 that extends and is provided at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper inner portion that is provided behind the upper inner decorative portion 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface. And a decorative substrate 213.

  The upper inner base 211 is formed in an inverted U shape when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper inner base 211 has a pair of portions extending in a straight line shape in an inverted U shape extending vertically in a vertical direction, and a portion extending in a semicircular arc shape in an inverted U shape is directed upward. Curved to protrude forward. The upper inner base 211 is formed to be opaque. The distance in the left-right direction at the lower end of the upper inner base 211 coincides with the distance between the rear ends separated from the left and right of the bulged portion upper decorative portion 121 in the bulged portion 120 of the door frame lower unit 100.

  The upper inner decoration portion 212 is milky white with translucency and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper inner decoration board 213 is attached to the upper inner base 211, and a plurality of LEDs 213 a mounted on the front surface are arranged along the upper inner decoration portion 212. The plurality of LEDs 213a on the upper inner decorative substrate 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 213a on the upper inner decorative substrate 213, the upper inner decorative portion 212 can be illuminated.

  The door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 coincides with the rear end of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Thus, the upper inner decoration part 212 and the bulging part upper decoration part 121 form one continuous decoration.

  The upper interior decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is surrounded by a first peripheral light area LA1 (indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 16) that illuminates and decorates the game window 201 around the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. Part). In addition, since the upper inner decoration portion 212 is formed in milky white, the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a can be reduced and emitted outward, so that the gaming window surrounded by the upper inner decoration portion 212 It is possible to prevent the inside of 201 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the gaming area 5a can be viewed in a good state from the front through the gaming window 201.

[3-2d. Door frame upper exterior decoration unit]
The door frame upper exterior decoration unit 220 has a rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, protrudes forward, and has a plurality of protruding bases 221 arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. The upper outer top decorative portion 222 provided at the front end of the protruding base 221, the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 disposed between the protruding bases 221, and the rear of the upper outer top decorative portion 222, respectively. The upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 disposed behind the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 are provided.

  The protruding base 221 has an isosceles triangle shape when viewed from the side. The protruding base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to the vicinity of the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202 and is formed to extend outward from the upper inner base 211. The protruding base 221 has a front end protruding forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the portion in contact with the upper inner base 211.

  The plurality of upper outer top decoration portions 222 are formed in a columnar shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The upper outer top decorative portion 222 is formed such that the outer diameter of the cylinder is about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the upper inner decorative portion 212. Each of the upper outer top decorative portions 222 is formed to have a length corresponding to the length in the left-right direction of the protruding base 221 provided. These upper outer top decoration parts 222 have translucency.

  The upper outer valley decoration portion 223 includes a portion (vertical surface portion) extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221, and a lower surface and an upper surface of the protruding base 221 from the upper and lower sides of the portion. And a portion (slope portion) extending obliquely to the vicinity of the front end of the protruding base 221. The upper outer valley decoration portion 223 has a mirror-like plating layer on the surface (front surface). Further, the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 is formed with a square opening at a portion extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 disposed rearward faces forward. ing.

  The upper outer top LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high-luminance full color LED.

  The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can cause the upper outer top decoration portion 222 to emit light by appropriately causing the upper outer top LED 224 to emit light. Further, the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can cause the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 to emit light by appropriately causing the upper outer valley LED 225 to emit light, and the upper outer top decoration portion 222 that is separated in the vertical direction. Brighten up between each other.

  The upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 emit light decoration around the gaming window 201 outside the first peripheral light region LA1 (FIG. 16). In FIG. 2, a part surrounded by a two-dot chain line is formed. Further, the upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 have their front ends positioned behind the front end of the upper inner decorative portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the gaming window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decoration portion 212, so Even if the valley decoration portion 223 is decorated with light emission, it is possible to prevent the inside of the gaming window 201 from being difficult to see due to glare, and the gaming area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the gaming window 201.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged along the outer peripheral edges (both left and right sides and upper side) of the door frame upper unit base 202, and the outer periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202. A door frame upper cover 232 which is attached to the edge and covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220; and an opaque decoration portion 233 provided on the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame upper cover 232 connects the pair of side walls extending forward from the portions near the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the upper sides of the pair of side walls, and near the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202. It is composed of an upper wall that extends forward from the site, and a front wall that connects the front side of the pair of side walls and the front side of the upper wall, and is formed in a box shape with the rear and lower sides open. Has been. The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely transparent.

  The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the upper inner decoration portion 212 such that the front end of the side wall is located slightly forward of the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212. Specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to a height near the upper end of the inverted U-shaped linear portion of the gaming window 201, from which the door frame upper unit base 202 It is curved and extended in an arc shape so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward to substantially the same height as the state. Further, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved so that the portions that are curved in an arc shape upward are closer to each other as they go upward.

  The door frame upper cover 232 has a pair of speaker mounting openings 232a to which the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 and the like are mounted at the left and right corners of the upper portion of the front wall.

  The opaque decorative portion 233 is provided on the outer side surfaces of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. In the opaque decorative portion 233, a slit 233a extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the same height as the protruding base 221 in the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233a of the opaque decorative portion 233.

  The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 so as to be visible from the front by a door frame upper cover 232. Further, the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 causes the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 to emit light appropriately, so that the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232 (each of the side wall and the upper wall). The front end of the light emitting device can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, since the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has the opaque decoration portions 233 on both the left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 is transmitted to this pachinko. Irradiation to other players sitting in front of other pachinko machines arranged adjacent to the machine 1 can be prevented.

  A plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 (outer edge of the front end of the door frame upper cover 232) of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are arranged in a third peripheral light area LA3 (light emitting decoration outside the second peripheral light area LA2 around the gaming window 201). A portion surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 16 is configured. Further, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are disposed on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer edge LED 231 to the gaming window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decoration portion 212. Even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are caused to emit light, the inside of the gaming window 201 remains inside. It is prevented from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good state.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 closes the speaker mounting port 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker 241 respectively attached to the vicinity of both left and right corners of the front upper portion of the door frame upper unit base 202. An upper speaker grill (not shown), a horizontal grid-shaped grill decorative frame 243 disposed in front of the upper speaker grill and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and substantially the same as each grid portion in the grill decorative frame 243 A bar-shaped lattice decoration portion 244 disposed behind the upper speaker grill at intervals, and a lattice decoration LED 245 provided at the outer end in the left-right direction of each lattice decoration portion 244 for illuminating and decorating the lattice decoration portion (see FIG. 14).

  Each of the upper speakers 241 is attached obliquely at the center in the left-right direction of the door frame upper unit 200 so as to face slightly downward. The upper speaker 241 is attached to the rear of the adjacent upper outer top decorative portion 222 in the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. The upper speaker 241 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds in the entire range from low to high. The upper speaker grille is attached to the inside (rear surface of the front wall) of the door frame upper cover 232. The upper speaker grill is a punching metal.

  The grill decoration frame 243 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grill decoration frame 243 is arranged such that a frame portion having a shape along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 is connected to two sides extending in the vertical direction of the frame portion so as to be separated vertically. And a plurality of lattice portions. The grid portion extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 243 has a portion (general portion) excluding the end on the outside in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 extending with a certain width, and the end on the outside in the left-right direction. Is formed in a trapezoidal shape extending at a certain width after obliquely spreading downward toward the end.

  The lattice decoration part 244 has translucency and is formed in a column shape that is long on the left and right. The lattice decoration portion 244 can be viewed from the front through the upper speaker grille. The lattice decoration LED 245 is a full color LED.

  The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can appropriately decorate the lattice decoration portion 244 by causing the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245 to emit light appropriately, and can also be provided in the grill decoration frame 243 via the lattice decoration portion 244 (in the upper speaker grille). The rear side) can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the upper speaker unit 240, the upper outer top decoration portion 222 disposed in the upper speaker grille (grill decoration frame 243) is located in front of the upper speaker 241 when viewed from the front. That is, the lattice decoration portion 244 and the upper outer top decoration portion 222 that can emit light are arranged between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grille. Thereby, when the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the lattice decoration part 244 are light-decorated, it is possible to show the player the effect that the inside of the speaker grille is light-decorated, which has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines. .

[3-3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the overall configuration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. 15 is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a surrounding light region in the door frame. The door frame 3 allows most of the front surface including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 while the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed. be able to. Moreover, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) can be closed by the closing glass 205 of the game window 201.

  In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16 and the like, a bulging part upper decoration part 121 and an upper inner decoration part 212 are connected in an annular shape, and an upper plate 130, a door frame effect device 150, and A game window 201 and the like are arranged. In other words, the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, and the like are surrounded by the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121, the upper inner decoration portion 212, and (first ambient light area LA <b> 1). Furthermore, the outer side of the upper inner decoration part 212 is surrounded by the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the upper outer valley decoration part 223 (second peripheral light area LA2) and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third peripheral light area LA3). Yes. In other words, the gaming window 201 is triple surrounded by the three peripheral light areas of the first peripheral light area LA1, the second peripheral light area LA2, and the third peripheral light area LA3.

  The door frame 3 is formed so that the storage area 131 of the upper plate 130 surrounds the front side and the left and right sides of the door frame effect device 150, and the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 is It distribute | circulates along a front-end edge, and is sent to the exterior (the lower pan 140 or the ball | bowl launcher 330) from the delivery port 136. FIG.

  In the normal state, the door frame 3 is such that the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 of the door frame effect device 150 are located at the lower moving end (lower end), respectively. In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable unit main body 156.

  The door frame 3 is provided with a bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 over the entire length. The upper end of the wall for storing the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is raised by the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. The upper end on the front side (front region 131a side) of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is higher than the front end on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (first movable portion 155) in the normal state. Thereby, when the inside of the upper plate 130 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B overflow to the door frame effect device 150 side, and the upper plate 130 is filled with the game balls B to the player. Can be easily recognized, and the game ball B can be prevented from spilling forward from the upper plate 130.

  In the door frame 3, an upper dish ball removal button 124, a ball lending button 125, and a return button 126 are gathered at the right corner on the right side of the upper dish 130 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The surface on which the upper plate ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided is provided at a position higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 and forward. It is inclined to become lower. Accordingly, when the game ball B is placed on the surface on which the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided, the game ball B is formed by the surface and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. Can roll to the upper plate 130 side and be discharged into the upper plate 130.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is formed in a mirror surface, the surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 constituting the upper plate 130 (that is, the inner surface of the upper plate 130) are formed in a mirror shape. Since the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are transferred to the inner surface of the upper plate 130, the reflected game balls B can be seen, so that the player feels as if many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. And the volume of the upper plate 130 can appear to be large.

  As for the door frame 3, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 in the upper plate 130 first rolls forward in the left side region 131b and then enters the front region 131a to enter the front region 131a. Roll right inside. Then, after entering the right side area 131b from the right end of the front area 131a and rolling backward in the right side area 131b, the player moves the flow of the game ball B that is sent out from the outlet 136 to the outside. (See FIG. 15). At this time, since the game ball B circulates in the front area 131a closer to the player in front of the door frame effect device 150, the game ball B in the front area 131a can be seen well, and the inside of the upper plate 130 The amount of storage of the game ball B at can be easily confirmed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 3, since the delivery port 136 is provided in the rear end of the right side area 131b where the game ball B rolls backward in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 can be visually recognized from the player side. it can. Thereby, it is possible to show the player how the game ball B is sent to the ball launcher 330 from the outlet 136 (upper plate 130), which could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines.

  The door frame 3 can visually recognize the pair of lower speakers 153a through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, and visually recognizes the door frame effect display device 152 behind the lower speakers 153a. be able to. In the door frame 3, the upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 is close to the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, that is, the lower end of the game window 201. As a result, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are brought close to each other, so that the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 constitute one screen. Can be displayed.

  In the door frame effect display device 152 arranged behind the effect operation unit 160, the door frame 3 has its lower side positioned below the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160 and the upper side is the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160. The upper part of the door frame effect display device 152 is made higher than the effect operation unit 160. Thereby, compared with the case where the whole door frame effect display device 152 is made lower than the effect operation unit 160, the door frame effect display device from the player side even if the door frame effect display device 152 is brought closer to the effect operation unit 160. 152 can be easily seen. Further, since the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the door frame effect display device 152 can be reduced, the amount of bulging forward of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed, so that the player is pressed by the bulging portion 120. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling, and it is possible to entertain the game in a comfortable state for the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a door arranged obliquely behind the effect operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (a range between two dashed lines in FIG. 11) is in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, when the door frame effect display device 152 is viewed from the player side, the effect operation unit 160 can be seen near the outer edge on the lower side of the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying an effect image that decorates the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, the effect operation unit 160 can be decorated with the effect image, and the effect operation unit can be changed by changing the effect image. The decoration of 160 can be changed variously, and it can make a player hard to get tired.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 has the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 visible in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160, the effect operation unit can be displayed without displaying the image of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152. Since an image such as an arrow or a hand directed to 160 can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 160, the player's line of sight can be immediately directed to the effect operation unit 160. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to delay the operation timing of the production operation unit 160, and it is possible to entertain a player participation type production in which the player operates the production operation unit 160 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower front speaker grill 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and an upper speaker grill of the upper speaker unit 240, so that the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 are forward (in the player side) in a normal state. ) Is difficult to see.

[3-4. Measures against electromagnetic noise on door frame]
Next, noise countermeasures for the door frame 3 will be briefly described. As described above, the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit (not shown) that is a quadrangular and frame-like outer shape in front view. As described above, the door frame base unit is formed in a rectangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically and has a gaming window 201 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A metal frame-like door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) attached to the door, a metal opening / closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit, and the like. As described above, the door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to give rigidity, and the main body frame via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). 4 is electrically connected to a frame ground substrate 559 included in the frame 4. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side. The frame ground substrate 559 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the game hall. Is electrically connected to the ground.

  As described above, some of the various decorative portions provided on the door frame 3 are not subjected to decorative plating at all, while others are provided with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit via the door frame reinforcing unit and a wiring (not shown) or a metal conduction plate (not shown). Yes. For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative part on which decorative plating has been applied, static electricity charged to the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic wave noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative part. From the door frame reinforcing unit, the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground substrate 559, and the island facility ground wire (not shown) are guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

  In the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4 come into contact with each other and are electrically connected. For example, when an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 while keeping the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, An attendant such as a game hall clerk or a person who possesses a metal setting key to be described later (a limited person who can check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value) When the lock unit 360 in the main body frame 4 is touched, static electricity charged to a staff member of a game hall clerk or a person holding a metal setting key to be described later is discharged electrostatically as electromagnetic noise and a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like Metal made later A person having the setting key is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit through the locking unit 360, and the game is transmitted from the door frame reinforcing unit through a door frame metal ground wire (not shown), a frame ground board 559, and an island equipment ground wire (not shown). It is guided to the earth of the hall island facility and removed.

[3-5. Lighting effect on door frame]
Next, the light emission effect by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 includes an upper plate 130, a door frame effect device 150, a game window 201, and the like. It is surrounded by a region LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decoration part 212 are arranged in a line in the extending direction. Thereby, the circumference | surroundings of the game window 201 grade | etc., Can be light-decorated by light-emitting the some LED121a and LED213a suitably. At this time, if the plurality of LEDs 121a and the LEDs 213a are caused to emit light in order, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the game window 201.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 includes the upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 (second ambient light area LA2) disposed outside the upper inner decorative portion 212, the upper outer top LED 224 is provided. The upper outer valley decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 are decorated with light emission by the upper outer valley LED 225, so that the outer side of the first peripheral light area LA1 can be decorated with light emission, and the outside of the game window 201 is doubled. It is possible to show the player the light emission effect to be decorated with light.

  Since a plurality of upper outer top decoration portions 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, it is possible to show the player a light effect such as a level meter by sequentially emitting light from one side in the vertical direction. . For example, when a chance comes, the expected value for the game can be shown to the player as a level meter, or can be shown to the player as a sound meter that matches the output music.

  Moreover, since the upper outer valley decoration part 223 is formed in a mirror surface shape, the upper outer valley decoration part 222 is made to shine more strongly than the upper inner decoration part 212 by causing the upper outer valley LED 225 to emit light. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Since the door frame 3 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged on the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202, the upper outer edge LEDs 231 emit light so that they can be seen in the past pachinko machines 1. The player can show the player the light emission effect that the outer edge of the door frame 3 (the third peripheral light area LA3) emits.

  And in the door frame 3, since it has the triple surrounding light area of 1st surrounding light area LA1, 2nd surrounding light area LA2, and 3rd surrounding light area LA3 in the outer side of the game window 201, respectively. Various light emission effects such as turning around the game window 201, light emission effects going from the outside to the game window 201, light emission effects going from the game window 201 to the outside, etc. Can show the player a light-emitting effect.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lattice decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the lattice decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 are appropriately caused to emit light so that the lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 194) of the grill decoration frame 193, the grill The player can have a light emitting effect that makes it possible to decorate the lattice portion (lattice decorative portion 244) of the decorative frame 243 and make the grill decorative frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grill decorative frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out. Can show.

  Further, in the door frame 3, a lower speaker decoration portion 153 c of the lower speaker unit 153, a lattice decoration portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, a plurality of upper outer top LEDs 224, and a grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 in the upper outer valley LED 225 ( The upper outer apex LED 224 and the upper outer trough LED 225 located behind the upper speaker grill) are caused to emit light, whereby the upper speaker 241 and the pair of the lower speaker 153a and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156 are The space between the upper speaker grille can be decorated with light emission, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines where the space between the speaker and the speaker grille is decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is provided with the plurality of LEDs 138 a of the stored light emitting decoration portion 138, so that the plurality of LEDs 138 a emit light to store in the upper plate 130 or the upper plate 130. It is possible to decorate the game ball B that is being illuminated. For example, since the plurality of LEDs 138a are caused to emit light in a state where the game ball B is not stored in the upper plate 130, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed in a mirror shape, the entire inside of the upper plate 130 is dazzling. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that is decorated with light emission, and for the player who is selecting a pachinko machine to play, the upper plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 shines brightly, so the interest in the pachinko machine 1 Can be strongly attracted.

  Since the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided above the bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B, a plurality of game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. The LED 138a is caused to emit light, and the light is applied to the upper half side of the game ball B and reflected upward, so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 shines brightly. You can show them.

  In addition, when the bulging part upper decoration part 121 is light-decorated, a part of the light is also irradiated into the upper plate 130, so that the bulging part upper decoration part 121 also causes the upper plate 130 or the upper plate 130 to It is possible to show the player the light-emitting effect that the stored game balls B emit and decorate.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a light emitting decoration portion 124a surrounding the upper dish ball removal button 124 and a light emission decoration portion 142a surrounding the lower dish ball removal button 142. By causing the light emitting decoration portion 124a of the dish ball removal button 124 and the light emission decoration portion 142a of the lower dish ball removal button 142 to emit light, the upper dish ball removal button 124 and the lower dish ball removal button 142 can be illuminated. Accordingly, when a large number of game balls B are paid out, such as during a “hit” game, the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140 are made to play the game balls B by causing the upper plate ball removal button 124 and the lower plate ball removal button 142 to emit light. So that the player can operate the upper dish ball removal button 124 and the lower dish ball removal button 142 so as to avoid being full.

  Thus, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can show the player various lighting effects, and by appropriately combining them, the player can present more various effects to the player. As well as making it difficult for players to get bored.

[3-6. Production of door frame production device]
Next, the production of the door frame 3 by the door frame production device 150 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation unit in the door frame effect device, and FIG. 17B is an illustration of the effect operation unit based on the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of decoration, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration effect by the effect image of a door frame effect display device, and the movable effect of an effect operation part.

  In the normal state of the door frame effect device 150, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 are located at the lower moving end (lower end), respectively. In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable unit main body 156. Even in this normal state, the pressing operation unit 161 in the effect operation unit 160 can be pressed.

  When the first LED of the operation unit decoration board 162 is caused to emit light in a normal state, it is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 emits and decorates. Further, when the second LED of the operation unit decoration board 162 is caused to emit light in a normal state, a light emission effect in which the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable unit cover 158 surrounding the outer side of the pressing operation unit 161 is decorated with light emission is played. You can show them. With these light-emitting effects, the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 161, and the player's participation type effect that operates the pressing operation unit 161 by urging the player to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161. Can make it easier to participate.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration substrate 159 are caused to emit light in a normal state, the rear peripheral wall 133 and the first movable part main body 156 of the upper plate 130 via the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 It is possible to decorate the space. That is, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the vicinity of the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is decorated with light emission.

  In this normal state, when a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a, the sound is radiated to the player side through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156. It is possible to make the player listen to an acoustic effect in which sound can be heard from the direction of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). Accordingly, the player's interest can be attracted to the pressing operation unit 161 by the sound from the lower speaker 153a, and the player is prompted to press the pressing operation unit 161 to operate the pressing operation unit 161. It is possible to facilitate participation in a player participation type production.

  Further, in a normal state, the door frame effect device 150 can visually recognize the door frame effect display device 152 from the player side through the device cover 151 and is displayed on the door frame effect display device 152. A player can be entertained by the effect image (see FIG. 17A and the like).

  The door frame effect device 150 revolves the first elevating pins 175a by the four first elevating drive motors 175b of the first elevating mechanism 170 in a normal state, and thereby via the pair of elevating arms 174 and the elevating slider 172. It is possible to show the player a movable effect that the first movable unit 155 moves to the upward moving end (upward end) together with the effect operating unit 160. As a result, the first movable portion 155 pops upward together with the effect operation portion 160, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be strongly urged to press the pressing operation portion 161. At the same time, as the first movable portion 155 is raised, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game.

  In a state where the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 12A, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 becomes visible from the player side. In this state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 are caused to emit light, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light emission. Therefore, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light emission, an effect is produced in which the first movable part 155 rises from the light. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative board 159 are caused to emit light while the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the light is applied to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130. Since it is irradiated, a plurality of LEDs 159a can also show the player a light-emitting effect that makes the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 shine, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down by the four first lifting drive motors 175b, the first movable portion 155 is vibrated by repeating the forward / reverse rotation in small increments. Can be made. Thereby, when the player touches the first movable portion 155 or the effect operation portion 160 while the first movable portion 155 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. In addition, if the first movable unit 155 is vibrated at the timing when the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed, the operational feeling of the press operation can be increased or decreased, thereby changing the player. Can be entertained.

  Further, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end side, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 move upward, and thus the plurality of grill holes 156b. And the volume of the space between the pair of lower speakers 153a increases. As a result, the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grill hole 156b changes, so that the natural vibration of the part changes and the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a changes. The player can listen to the sound effect in which the tone color of the sound radiated to the player side through the grill hole 156b changes.

  Further, when a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the first movable portion 155 from the descending end to the ascending end, the upper portion of the first movable portion 155 is moved to the door frame effect display device 152. It looks like it covers the bottom of the display screen. Accordingly, when the first movable part 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable part 155, so that the first to the player. The rise of the movable part 155 can be noticed, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  At this time, for example, an effect image in which the first movable part 155 is lifted by a predetermined character, an effect image in which the predetermined character is lifted by the rising of the first movable part 155, etc. on the door frame effect display device 152, etc. By displaying, it is possible to show the player the collaboration effect by the movable effect of the first movable part 155 and the effect image, and the player can be greatly enjoyed.

  Further, when the second elevating pin 183 is revolved by the second elevating drive motor 182 of the second elevating mechanism 180 in the normal state, the door operation effect device 150 is moved upward through the elevating transmission piece 184. It is possible to show the player a movable effect of moving to the moving end (rising end). Thereby, since the upper surface of the press operation part 161 of the production | presentation operation part 160 will be in the state protruded largely upwards rather than the upper surface of the 1st movable part 155, it attracts a player's interest strongly to the press operation part 161. The player can strongly urge the player to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161, and the pressing operation unit 161 is lifted to make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game.

  In the state where the production operation unit 160 is moved to the ascending end, as shown in FIG. 12B, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 on the lower side of the pressing operation unit 161 is exposed to the outside. In this state, when the second LED of the operation unit decoration board 162 is caused to emit light, it is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 emits and decorates. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while decorating the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 of the effect operation unit 160, the effect operation unit 160 rises from the light. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 160 can be moved up and down by the second elevating drive motor 182, the production operation unit 160 can be vibrated by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation in small increments. . Thus, when the player touches the effect operation unit 160 while the effect operation unit 160 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Further, if the effect operation unit 160 is vibrated at the timing when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed, the operation feeling of the press operation can be increased or decreased to change the player. Can entertain.

  Further, when a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the production operation unit 160 from the descending end to the ascending end, the upper part of the production operation unit 160 displays the display screen of the door frame production display device 152. Looks like it covers the bottom. Thus, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the effect operation unit 160, and thus the effect operation unit 160 is provided to the player. Can be noticed, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  At this time, for example, an effect image (see FIG. 17B) that decorates the periphery of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, an effect that the effect operation unit 160 is lifted by a predetermined character. By displaying an image, an effect image in which a predetermined character is lifted by the ascent of the effect operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17C), and the like, a collaboration effect by the movable effect and the effect image of the effect operation unit 160 is displayed. Can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly enjoyed.

  The production operation unit 160 can be moved to the rising end while the first movable portion 155 is in the lowered end, and can be raised while the first movable portion 155 is in the raised end state (FIG. 12B). State). For example, after moving the first movable part 155 from the descending end to the ascending end, the effect operating unit 160 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end, so that the player can create a movable effect in which the effect operating unit 160 rises in two stages. Can show. As a result, the production operation unit 160 rises in two stages. Therefore, when the production operation unit 160 is operated by the player, a “hit” game is started (a special lottery result is “hit”). It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game, and to allow the player to operate the effect operation unit 160 and entertain the player participation type effect.

  As described above, the door frame effect device 150 can present the player with various effects such as the light emission effect, the movable effect, the image effect, the player participation type effect, and the sound effect, as described above. By appropriately combining them, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and entertain the player.

[3-7. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame effect device 150 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5a where the game is performed. Since the front region 131a on the front side of the device placement unit 123 and the left and right side regions 131b are provided with the upper plate 130 having the storage region 131 of the game ball B surrounding the device placement unit 123, the front The game balls B are stored in front of the door frame effect device 150 by the region 131a, and the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen by the player. Further, since the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend in the front-rear direction, in addition to the front region 131a, the game balls B stored in the side region 131b are also viewed from the player side. It can make it easy to visually recognize.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to see the game ball B in the upper plate 130, so that the player can be conscious of the storage amount of the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is advanced by the progress of the game. Even if the amount of storage decreases due to consumption of the player, it is easy for the player to recognize the decrease in the storage amount and the game ball B can be replenished into the upper plate 130. The game ball B can be prevented from disappearing from the upper plate 130, the interruption of the game can be prevented suddenly, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game can be prevented, and the interest of the player in the game can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so that the player can look at the door frame effect from the game area 5a. By simply dropping it onto the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a. It becomes possible to make it easy for the player to concentrate on the game, and to make the game enjoyable and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the opposite right side, the front region 131a is fed from the supply port 135. Since it is provided in the middle of the outlet 136, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out of the storage area 131 from the outlet 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is consumed by playing a game, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (front area 131a), and the consumption speed, consumption amount, etc. of the game ball B to the player Can be easily recognized, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  Further, since the supply port 135 is disposed on the left side of the left and right side regions 131b of the device placement unit 123 and the delivery port 136 is disposed on the right side, the space between the supply port 135 and the delivery port 136 is determined in the left-right direction. Therefore, the storage area 131 also increases in the left-right direction, so that the storage amount of the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be increased. Accordingly, since a large number of game balls B can be stored in the upper plate 130, it is possible to allow the player to play without worrying about the storage amount of the game balls B, and to concentrate the player on the game. The game can be more enjoyed and the player can immediately recognize whether or not the game ball B is present in the front area 131a simply by dropping the line of sight from the game area 5a to the lower door frame effect device 150. It is not necessary for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130, making it easy for the player to concentrate on the game and making the game enjoyable and less interesting. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, a stored light emitting decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage region 131 of the upper plate 130 above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper plate 130 is provided. Since the light from the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 is irradiated to a portion above the half of the game ball B stored in 131, the light from the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 is emitted by the game ball B. Can be reflected upward. Therefore, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be shining and decorated with light from the stored light emitting decoration unit 138, and the player can enjoy the light decoration of the game ball B. In addition, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the amount of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effect as described above. Can play.

  Further, since the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the rear peripheral wall 133 facing the front of the upper plate 130 emits light by causing the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decorative portion 138 to emit light. It is possible to show the player a luminous decoration that cannot be seen with conventional pachinko machines, to surprise the player, and to direct the player's interest to the upper plate 130 (storage area 131), It is possible to cause the player to confirm the amount of storage of the game ball B and to reliably exhibit the above-described effects. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed in a mirror shape, the light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 or the light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is By reflecting on the inner surface, the sparkling feeling in the storage area 131 by the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 can be further increased, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 so that the game balls B are aligned, the game ball B can be prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 and stored in the upper plate 130. The game ball B can be smoothly sent out from the outlet 136 to the ball launcher 330 and the lower plate 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the game ball B being clogged, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the side region 131b of the upper plate 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is sent out from the delivery port 136 that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. The situation can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the front area 131a in the storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored is provided on the front side of the apparatus arrangement section 123, the game ball B is placed on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the apparatus arrangement section 123. Even if the ball rolls forward and falls, it falls into the front region 131a, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling forward from the bulging portion 120.

  Further, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, and the like of the upper plate 130 are formed in a mirror shape, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are transferred to the upper plate 130. Therefore, the player can have an illusion that the game ball B is stored on the other side of the peripheral wall, and the player seems to have a lot of game balls B stored on the upper plate 130. Can do.

  Further, since the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131 is provided, the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 or the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is By reflecting on the inner surface of the dish 130, the glittering feeling in the storage area 131 by the stored light emitting decoration part 138 can be further increased, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement unit 123 of the bulging portion 120, the player can be entertained by the effect by the door frame effect device 150, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game is suppressed. Can be made.

  In the above embodiment, as the storage area 131 in which the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is stored, the front area 131a in front of the device arrangement portion 123 (door frame effect device 150) and the left and right sides of the device arrangement portion 123. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front region in front of the device placement unit 123 and the one side region on the left side of the device placement unit 123 are not limited to this. It is good also as what was comprised with the back area | region of the back of the apparatus arrangement | positioning part 123. FIG. Alternatively, a front area 131 a in front of the device placement section 123, two side areas 131 b on the left and right sides of the device placement section 123, and a back area behind the device placement section 123 (the device placement section 123 is It is good also as what is provided in the island shape in the top plate 130). Note that the back region of the storage region 131 may have a tunnel shape in which the game ball B is not visible from the player side. Further, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150.

  In the above embodiment, the upper plate 130 has a mirror-like inner surface. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 may be non-mirror-like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage light emission decoration portion 138 is provided on the front peripheral wall 134. Anyway.

  In the above embodiment, in the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effect device 150, a certain number of game balls B are formed on the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 by the plurality of louver portions 158b of the first movable portion cover 158. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is inclined so that the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is lowered toward the upper plate 130. The game ball B placed on the upper plate 130 may be rolled to prevent the game ball B from being stored on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (does not continue to be placed).

[4. Body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by driving the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side (the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3). The game ball B used in the game is discharged to the back of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall).

[4-1. Overall structure of main frame]
As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 300 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 300 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge part 310 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge part 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge part of the door frame 3, and a main body frame base unit 300. A main body frame lower hinge portion 320 that is attached to the lower end of the left side of the front frame and is rotatably attached to the lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the lower hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. I have.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 300 when viewed from the front and reinforces the main body frame base unit 300. A ball launcher 330 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a reverse L attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300. A character-shaped payout base unit 340, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 340 for paying out the game ball B to the player side (the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140), and a main body frame base A power supply board 630 provided with a power switch 630a that is attached to the lower side of the unit 300 as viewed from the rear and that can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 and a plurality of slits 641 that cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to a main body frame base 501 to be described later and extend vertically are penetrated. A back cover 640, and a metal locking unit 360 that is attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 300 in front view and locks the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the game board 5 inserted into the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 described later moves forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 to be regulated are attached to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of a main body frame base 501 (to be described later) of the main body frame base unit 300 and the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The unauthorized insertion of the tool into the inside (game board 5) is prevented.

  The main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 is recessed backward from the upper end in a range of about 3/4 of the total height in a front view, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. A mounting portion 301 is provided. The ball launcher 330 is mounted at a position below the game board mounting portion 301 on the front surface of the main body frame base unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 has a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port through which the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 is inserted. 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4 a is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4 a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 has a main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. It is attached. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4 b is released so that the opening of the main body frame 4 can be detected. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4 b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  The door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are configured to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and to the outer frame 2 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening / closing operation by the locking unit 360. It does not detect the opening of the main body frame 4, but detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 independently of the opening / closing operation by the locking unit 360. ing. Further, the door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 is inserted so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise entering the cylinder lock 127. The door frame opening switch 4a is disposed at a position below the cylinder insertion opening, and on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached, below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. A body frame opening switch 4b is arranged on the rear surface. Thus, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission lines from the door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The main body frame base unit 300 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted into the main body frame base 501 from the front side. Ruko is formed.

  The payout base unit 340 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front and extends upward in the shape of a groove that opens upward, and a first rail cover that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 554, a second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and a ball stopper attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 A material 557, an external terminal plate 558 disposed above the tank rail 553 and attached to the payout base 551, and a payout base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal plate 558 (front of the pachinko machine 1) are not shown. A frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the substrate accommodating portion. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame ground substrate 559 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island facilities of the game hall.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 350 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 350 downward, and an upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and a right side after the front view of the power supply unit 620c. An attached dispensing control unit 620d and an interface unit 620e attached on the left side of the power supply unit 620c after front view are provided.

  The base unit 620b includes a front base (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a rear base (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front base and attached with the power supply unit 620c on the rear surface.

  The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. I have.

  The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the right side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control accommodated in the payout control board box 632. A substrate 633. The payout control board box 632 includes a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632 and is configured as a caulking case.

  Further, the payout control board 633 includes an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation unit having a plurality of functions, in addition to an error LED display (not shown) that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, a lead type is adopted as the RWM clear button 633z, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from an opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where the payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632. Can be pressed.

  The RWM clear button 633z is provided in the RAM built in the payout control MPU that is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and in the main control MPU that is a microprocessor provided in the main control board that controls game contents (game progress). A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the built-in RAM, a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, and an error LED display And a function as an error cancel switch for canceling the error. In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting change function (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value) related to the game specifications is separate from the main control board that controls the game contents (game progress). It is mounted on a dispensing control board 633 which is a board. Further, the separate substrate may not be the payout control substrate 633, the substrate not accommodated in the substrate case, the substrate accommodated in the substrate case, and the substrate accommodated in the substrate case configured as a caulking case. Can be considered. However, since the setting change function (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value) is an important function as a gaming machine, higher security is desirable, and the board case is more suitable than the board that is not stored in the board case. The board that is housed has higher security, and the board with higher security is the board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case. Since the payout control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that the security is high. The main control board 1310 for controlling the game content (game progress) is attached to a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 as will be described later, while the payout control board 633 is a main body. Being attached to the frame 4 also contributes to improving security.

  The interface unit 620e covers a substrate base (not shown) attached to the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base, and a rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base.

  The interface board 635 is connected to one end of a connection cable from the main body frame 4 side. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board for controlling game contents (game progress), a peripheral control board for controlling the progress of production, and the like. It is connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the interface board 635 so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

  The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted and attached to the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300 from the front. The back cover 640 is attached so that the right side in the front view is rotatable around a vertically extending axis at the right end of the rear face of the main body frame base 501, and the left side in the front view is the back cover attachment portion of the payout base 551. 551i and a back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600 are pivotally supported so as to be opened and closed. A locking screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, and the lock screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment portion 601a. The cover 640 is fixed. The back cover 640 can rotate about 180 degrees from a closed state covering the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state opening the rear side of the game board 5.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending in the vertical and horizontal directions is bent forward, and its rear surface is substantially the same as the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed to be located on the surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. The slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to a later-described main control board box attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

  By the way, the game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall off with the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, if it will be in the state where the metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B adheres in the tank rail 553 in which the game ball B rolls in the downstream direction, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is hindered. Thus, it becomes difficult to supply the game ball B smoothly toward the downstream side, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 350 of the payout unit 560 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B Is configured to be removed from the tank rail 553. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the tank rail 553 by naturally falling from the tank rail 553 to the outside through the notch 553aa, and the tank rail. The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the tank rail 553 due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling in the 553 falls from the tank rail 553 to the outside through the notch portion 553aa, and thus metal. Powder can be removed from the tank rail 553, and metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 by inserting a cotton swab into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk It is possible to remove the metal powder from the tank rail 553 by performing the operation of removing.

  In addition, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite the island facilities in the game hall, and the game balls B discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and re-used by the ball lifting device. Since it is supplied to the ball tank 552, the temperature in the island equipment of the game hall is extremely higher than the indoor temperature of the game hall. Therefore, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 includes various substrates provided in the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. In order to release the heat generated from the light emitting means such as the outside to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically are formed. Further, since the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B dropped through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 enters the back side of the game board 5. Although it is difficult to completely prevent this, the metal powder can be prevented from entering the back side of the game board 5.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, a plurality of types of wirings for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part. Accordingly, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island equipment in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids, and other electrical drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 is bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented.

  Of the various substrates provided in the game board 5, the substrate near the back cover 640 (excluding a relay substrate such as a panel relay substrate 1410 described later) is molded from a non-conductive resin that constitutes a substrate box. Even if the front end of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the cover body, it does not affect the substrate covered by the cover body. . A relay board such as a panel relay board 1410 to be described later is a board that relays between one board and another board, and is therefore an aggregate of various connectors, and has a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the various connectors. It is formed not on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board on which various connectors that face the back cover 640 are mounted, but on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board on the opposite side to the surface facing the back cover 640. Through holes (hereinafter simply referred to as “through holes”) having lands in which the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the relay substrate can be soldered by inserting pin terminals of various connectors. Except for.)), The wiring pattern is covered with a resist of a predetermined color (for example, green, yellow, red, blue, black, etc.) and is not covered and exposed. . That is, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and contacts the relay board, the relay board is not affected at all.

  As described above, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 has a protective cover that can protect the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5. A plurality of heat generated from light emitting means such as various boards, various motors and various solenoids provided in the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5, various motors and various solenoids, and various LEDs and various lamps The heat radiation function that can be released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the slit 641 and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B dropped through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is the back side of the game board 5 Metal powder intrusion suppression function that can suppress the intrusion to the side, and various boards, various motors and various solenoids provided in the game board 5 with unconnected wiring suspended from the inside of the island equipment of the game hall Electrical driving source such as de, has a protective wall function that can prevent touching the light emitting means such as various LED and various lamps.

  The locking unit 360 includes a metal unit base (not shown) that is attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of metal door frame cages (not shown) that protrude forward from the unit base and can be locked with the door frame 3. A plurality of non-illustrated metal frame ridges projecting rearward from the unit base and engageable with the outer frame 2, and a non-illustrated metal transmission for moving the door frame ridge or the outer frame ridge vertically A cylinder, a metal lock spring (not shown) that urges the door frame cage downward and an outer frame cage upward, and a metal (not shown) that moves the outer frame cage downward And an unlocking lever for the outer frame.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 300 in front view is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 300 in front view. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is formed in a U shape with the right side of the front view open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to give rigidity, and via a body frame metal ground wire (not shown), The frame ground substrate 559 described above is electrically connected. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). A description will be given later of the fact that the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity.

[4-2. Measures against electromagnetic noise on the body frame]
Next, noise countermeasures of the main body frame 4 will be briefly described. As described above, the main frame 4 has a frame-shaped main frame base unit 300 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main frame base unit 300. The reverse L-shaped payout base unit 340 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side, and the game ball B received by the payout base unit 340 to the player side (upper plate 130 or lower plate 140) A payout unit 560 for paying out, a power supply board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of powering on the pachinko machine 1, a board unit 620 having a payout control board 633, and the like are provided.

  As described above, the main body frame base unit 300 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material, and includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in front view. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to give rigidity, and via a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown) The frame ground substrate 559 provided in the main body frame 4 is electrically connected. That is, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is a frame ground on the main body frame side. In addition, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 via a ball tank ground wire (not shown), which is a metal plate (not shown) arranged on the entire bottom thereof. Further, a ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above via an interface ground wire (not shown). Further, a ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above via a power supply ground line (not shown). This frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an unillustrated island facility ground wire.

  As described above, as countermeasures against noise in the main body frame 4, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620, respectively. The ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, the various ground wires (not shown) from the power board 630 in the board unit 620, the frame earth board 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown) It is guided to earth and removed.

[4-3. Frame ground substrate]
Next, the frame ground substrate 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame ground substrate 559 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall, and includes a plurality of ground terminals. The first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) is electrically connected as an interface ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via an interface ground wire (not shown). The second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal in the island facility of the game hall through an unillustrated island facility ground wire as the island facility ground. The terminal (ball tank ground terminal) is a ball tank ground, and one end of a ball tank ground wire (not shown) is attached to a metal plate (not shown) disposed on the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 by a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the tank ground wire is electrically connected. The base terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) is a main body frame metal ground, and a main body frame metal grounding wire (not shown) is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 by a not shown metal screw. One end is attached and the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) serves as a power source ground for the power supply in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is electrically connected to a ground connection terminal provided on the substrate 630 via a power supply ground wire (not shown), and the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) is an illustration of the door frame 3 as a door frame metal ground. One end of the door frame metal ground wire (not shown) is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit of the door frame base unit by a metal screw (not shown). Rutotomoni, the other end of the door frame metal ground wire is intended to be electrically connected.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, a third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as a sphere tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor (not shown), and the other end of the first resistor serves as a power source ground. A fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal), a second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground, and a first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as an interface ground, respectively. A fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as a frame metal ground and a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as a door frame metal ground are electrically connected to one end of a second resistor (not shown). In addition, the other end of the second resistor is a fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) as a power ground, and a second ground terminal (island ground terminal) as an island equipment ground. ), And it is electrically connected to the first ground terminal (interface earth terminal) as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, 510 ohm (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are adopted as the first resistor and the second resistor.

  The electromagnetic wave noise that flows to the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as the interface ground is grounded on the island facility in the game hall via the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire. The electromagnetic wave noise that is guided and removed to the third earth terminal (ball tank earth terminal) as the ball tank earth is transmitted via the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire. The electromagnetic wave noise that is guided and removed to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and flows to the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as the main body frame metal ground is the second ground terminal (island island) as the island facility ground. The equipment ground terminal) and the island equipment ground wire are led to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed, and the fifth as a power supply ground The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal (power ground terminal) is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) and the island facility ground wire as the island facility ground, and removed. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground is connected to the game hall via the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire. It is led to the earth of the island facility and removed.

  Incidentally, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 340 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are ground in the island facility of the game hall or rub against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 and are charged and discharged electrostatically, thereby releasing electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the discharge unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated. A third ground terminal (sphere tank ground) as a sphere tank ground is provided on the frame ground substrate 559 to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 300 of the body frame 4 in the vicinity of the unit 560. Terminal) and a fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as a main body frame metal ground, through the first resistor and the second resistor, respectively, gradually attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise to attenuate the high voltage instantaneously. The second earth terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground via the island equipment ground wire. And so that it can lead to ground Le island equipment. In other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 that is likely to accumulate static electricity from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called a frame ground. By guiding to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. Thus, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity.

  In addition, as described above, various decorative portions provided in the door frame 3 may be provided with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. The decorative portion to which the decorative plating is applied is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 and the door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown) or a metal conduction plate (not shown). Has been. For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion on which decorative plating is applied, static electricity charged to the player is discharged electrostatically and is transmitted as electromagnetic wave noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative portion. Also, a staff member such as a game hall clerk or a person who possesses a metal setting key described later (a limited person who can check the current set value in addition to changing the set value) ) Touches the locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4, as described above, the static electricity charged to the staff of the game hall clerk or the person holding the metal setting key to be described later is discharged as electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge. A staff member such as a hall clerk or a person who possesses a metal setting key, which will be described later, is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit via the locking unit 360.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3, the frame ground substrate 559 has a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as a door frame metal ground. Through the second resistor, electromagnetic wave noise is gradually passed and attenuated to suppress high-voltage instantaneous discharge, and from the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground via the island equipment ground wire It can be led to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall. In other words, a decorative part plated with decoration, a player, an attendant such as a shop hall clerk, or a person who possesses a metal setting key to be described later (in addition to changing the set value, the current setting that has been set) Electromagnetic noise from a limited number of persons who can confirm the value, etc., is guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the door frame reinforcement unit as a frame ground called a frame ground. , A staff member such as a decorative part plated with decoration, a player, a shop hall clerk, etc., or a person who has a metal setting key (to be described later, in addition to changing the setting value) Electromagnetic noise from a limited number of persons who can confirm the above or the like can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island facility in the game hall.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is a front view of a game board in which a game panel or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 19 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 18 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 18 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the gaming board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 22 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view in which the game board is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view in which the game board is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 111 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start port 2004, and a prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. As described above, the game 111 is for performing a game to entertain the driving operation of the handle 111 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 30 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 110 and 64, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 28 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to a command from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive board 1720 for driving the decorative board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 for housing the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 that is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front opening unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the start that becomes the lower right corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. From an attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right of the front unit 2100 in front view and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Is a frame having a gate portion 2003 that is attached slightly above the center of the game area 5a. And includes the center role object 2500, the.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in itself, and a second that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A start opening sensor 2402 and a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 are provided. The center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism acting illegally.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 64). See).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. The rear third stage production unit 3300 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back second stage production unit 3200 and the front opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed in front of the back second stage production unit 3200 The back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 and releases it downward, and the game received in the general winning port 2001, the second start port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right sphere discharge unit 3040 for receiving the sphere B and releasing it downward.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 28A is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28B is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. Yes.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is substantially entirely formed transparent, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating front and rear and a short long hole, and at an upper edge and a lower edge, respectively. A plurality of engaging step portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The balls B are wide enough to be arranged, and the upper and right sides are narrow enough that a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) that is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step is about the same size as the game area 5a. A through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Although not shown in the figure, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion and is disposed outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins that are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, respectively. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. A pair of engaging pieces that respectively engage with the two engaging step portions on the lower side of the. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left side by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward after engaging the engaging step of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally forward. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state in which the panel plate 1110 is accommodated in the holding step portion by elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion that is present with the engaging claw. At this time, the projecting pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 that controls game contents and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 that can set game performance, a main control board 1310, and a setting change board 1311. And a non-conductive resin main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200.

  When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from the rear, the rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the left-right direction is the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, In the area surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, the area is formed so as to occupy about 4/5 of the area from the left side to the right side, and the remaining 1/5 of the area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner area where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

  As described above, the outer frame 2 is rotated coaxially between the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward with the left side as viewed from the front, the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in front view is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the front direction opposite to this is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4, whereas the main frame 4 is pivotally supported ( A setting change board 1311 is disposed on the closed side.

  Further, the back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Is. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the back cover 640 is attached to the right side edge of the rear face of the main body frame base 501 with the right side in the front view so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis, and the left side in the front view is paid out. Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side when viewed from the front is the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, The left side of the front view which is the opposite side is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

  In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resists except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist for the setting change board 1311, white having a color different from that of the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting substrate 1311 are white. The resist is solid, except for various land patterns.

  Here, the point that a color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320. The store manager of the game hall, the staff of the game hall, etc., is that the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, etc.) and is a board with high importance in crime prevention. Awareness about is very high. For this reason, it is not necessary to call out that the board is the main control board 1310 in distinction from other boards. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the gaming performance, it is housed in the main control board box 1320, but has a security importance. The awareness of the fact that it is a high substrate is very low. For this reason, it is necessary to alert the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311 separately from other boards.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, green, which is generally used as a resist for the substrate, is adopted as the resist for the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color adopted as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 is more conspicuous than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 in addition to the main control board 1310 is also highly important for crime prevention. It can contribute to raising the recognition about the point which is a board | substrate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311. However, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished. If possible, yellow, red, blue, and transparent may be used.

  In the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, It may be printed in white as silk printing so as to cover almost the entire surface (mounting surface) and / or back surface (solder surface), or as silk printing in any color of black, blue, yellow and red You may print.

  Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 includes a non-conductive resin cover body and a non-conductive resin base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are made of a polycarbonate resin so as to be transparent, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed, Or whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the opening / closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. Note that the cover body is formed with a plurality of heat radiating vents capable of releasing the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second start port sensor 2402, a big winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning port sensor. 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out opening sensor 3032.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) (Electrical wiring) may be electrically connected, and the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a is absorbed (reduced) by the harness (electrical wiring) from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Can be difficult to reach). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), a signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that connector connection, which is inter-board connection, includes connection using a normal connector that does not include a floating mechanism and connection using a special connector that includes a floating mechanism. A normal connector not equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. When the socket is fitted with the plug, In this structure, there is no amount of movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed in (for example, the vertical direction). On the other hand, a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug, and the socket is fitted with the plug. When mating, an error (fitting shaft misalignment) that occurs when the socket is pushed in by moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is pushed in (for example, the vertical direction) can be absorbed. It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector that does not include a floating mechanism is employed as a connector connection that is an inter-board connection. However, a special connector that includes a floating mechanism may be employed.

  The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side being about one fifth of the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side thereof is the main control board 1310. Are arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310 and the lower side thereof is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310. Is arranged at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key at a center point where the center lines of the square-shaped setting change board 1311 intersect in the vertical and horizontal directions is arranged. The main control board 1310 is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and near the connector MSCN. A setting indicator 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED indicator with a decimal point (so-called dot) is disposed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and in the vicinity of the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h is arranged which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) from the center toward the right side.

  In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port extends in the vertical direction. In the position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, a metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and a metal setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot, and the outer frame 2 is attached. On the other hand, even if the main frame 4 is closed, other pachinko machine members (or members of the game hall island facility) lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall and the setting keys do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to be damaged.

  When the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned on, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the setting key ON signal is sent to the setting change board 1311. To the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Setting key switch]
Here, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch as seen from the front right diagonal, and is a perspective view (b) of the setting key switch as seen from the front left diagonal, and is a top view of the setting key switch.

  The setting key switch 1311a is of a type in which a setting key cylinder made of resin that is rotated by inserting a setting key is accommodated inside the resin outer cylinder (hereinafter referred to as “resin type”). A setting key switch 1311a "), and a type in which a metal setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key into a metal cylindrical outer cylinder is housed. (Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “metal type setting key switch 1311a”). The resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal type setting key switch 1311a have the same structure and are partially different in material.

[Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is set with respect to the non-conductive resin-made cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and the inner side of the outer cylinder 1311aa. A non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab that is rotated by inserting a key, and a circuit that is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa and that turns the contact ON or OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab are formed. A non-conductive resin-made rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa and bent so as to cover the surface and side surface of the base body 1311ac. A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada projecting rearward of the base body 1311ac are provided on both side surfaces (the front side surface and the rear side surface in the figure). And a, the metal frame plate 1311ad formed.

  The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. An insertion port 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. As shown in FIG. 25C, the metal setting key is used when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion / removal reference position 1311aa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (that is, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a). Insertion into the insertion port 1311aba at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the cylinder 1311ab (at a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port 1311aba is along the vertical direction) And can be extracted from the insertion port 1311aba. The base body 1311ac includes a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad, and two lead terminals made of brass separated from each other by a predetermined distance from the side surface rotated 90 degrees. Right side surface and left side surface).

  In the figure, a COM1 terminal which is an upper lead terminal on the left side and a COM2 terminal which is a lower lead terminal on the left side are common terminals, and either one or both ends can be used. The A terminal which is the upper lead terminal on the right side and the B terminal which is the lower lead terminal on the right side are the bases when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion / removal reference position 1311aa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa. The circuit formed in the body 1311ac electrically connects the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal to be conductive, and electrically disconnects the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal by disconnecting (this) On the other hand, when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated by 60 degrees from the insertion / removal reference position 1311aa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the transmission of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. By the circuit formed in the base body 1311ac, the COM1 terminal and the COM The terminal and the A terminal are electrically disconnected and disconnected, and the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected and conducted (the ON key signal of the setting key switch 1311a is thereby transmitted). )

  A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada projecting from the metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to set the setting key switch 1311a. The change board 1311 can be fixed. The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. On the back side of the base body 1311ac, when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is oriented so that the insertion / removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in FIG. A columnar protrusion (not shown) to be specified is formed to protrude. With this cylindrical protrusion, when the manufacturer operator mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, for example, the setting key switch 1311a is turned upside down (incorrect). It can be prevented from being soldered.

  When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic noise enters through the metal setting key, a resin type setting key switch As described above, since the outer cylinder 1311aa, the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the base body 1311ac are formed of non-conductive resin 1311a, the A terminal, the B terminal, the COM1 terminal, and the COM2 terminal are connected. There is no influence.

[Metal type key switch]
Next, a metal type setting key switch 1311a includes a metal cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key into the inner side of the outer cylinder 1311aa. 1311ab is the same as the resin-type setting key switch 1311a in that the material is the same as that of the resin-type setting key switch 1311a described above. In addition, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. The surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac are covered. That is, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab and electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is in an electrically connected state, there is a problem that electromagnetic noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad. A detailed description of electromagnetic noise of the metal type setting key switch will be described later.

[Relationship between setting key switch and cover of main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box.

  As described above, the insertion port 1311aba for inserting the metal setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. In a state where the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the front face of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front face of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front face of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box. As shown in FIG. 26, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab at a position corresponding to the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. For example, a tube-shaped rib portion 1301za (tube-shaped rib portion 1301za) having a predetermined distance dimension toward the setting change substrate 1311 along the inner periphery of the through hole 1301z having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. The thickness of the cover body 1 Have the 01 same thickness and thickness.) Are formed. The inner periphery of the through hole 1301z and the inner periphery of the tube-shaped rib portion 1301za communicate with each other so as to be the same inner peripheral surface without a step.

  Since the through hole 1301z is also a portion where a finger or fist of a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a hits, the rib 1301za can increase the strength around the through hole 1301z. As a result, the periphery of the through hole 1301z is pushed by the force of the person to bend the periphery of the through hole 1301z to increase the clearance between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, or the periphery of the through hole 1301z is damaged and penetrated. Since it is possible to prevent an increase in the outer diameter of the hole 1301z and increase the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, for example, a person who illegally accesses the setting key switch 1311a deliberately points Even if the fist is pushed around the through hole 1301z, it is possible to contribute to preventing insertion of a long and narrow illegal tool such as a wire between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

  The diameter of the through hole 1301z is set to be inside the rectangular shape which is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac having a rectangular parallelepiped of the setting key switch 1311a. A distance d between the end of the rib portion 1301za and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is separated by d (about 2 mm in this embodiment), and the metal frame plate of the setting key switch 1311a. 1311ad is configured not to be directly touched by a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

  As a result, the “clearance between the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1310za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab). Even if a long thin irregular tool such as a wire is inserted into the gap, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac having the rectangular parallelepiped of the setting key switch 1311a. Since it is formed so as to fit inside the rectangular shape, the tip of the elongated irregular tool hits the surface of the base body 1311ac so that it cannot be bent and enter the setting change board 1311. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 from being altered.

  Further, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are each formed of non-conductive resin, so that a person who is charged with static electricity sets it. Even if a finger approaches or touches the front surface of the key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), the electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge is set via the setting key switch 1311a. Intrusion into 1311 can be prevented. In addition, the distance d between the end portion of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z of the resin cover body 1301 having non-conductivity and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. (In this embodiment, since the distance is approximately 2 mm), a person who is charged with static electricity may bring a finger close to or touch the through hole 1301z of the resin cover body 1301 having non-conductivity or the periphery thereof. However, since it becomes difficult for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a via the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za, the setting change board via the setting key switch 1311a. Intrusion into 1311 can be prevented.

  In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are made of metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. It has become a state. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. The surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac are covered. That is, if a person who is charged with static electricity touches or touches the through-hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its periphery, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is caused by the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key. Since the cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, electromagnetic wave noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad. For this reason, if a person who is charged with static electricity touches or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its periphery, electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge may cause metal frame plate 1311ad. May intrude into the setting change board 1311 via the setting key switch 1311a. A detailed description of electromagnetic noise of the metal type setting key switch will be described later.

  In addition, when an operator performs an operation of mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, the worker temporarily places the game board 5 on or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the temporarily placed game board 5 is stopped during work and the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and falls down. Further, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or the periphery thereof. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and falls down during the work.

  Although the setting indicator 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, the cover body 1301 is molded transparently as described above. Therefore, the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover body 1301.

  In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the setting key switch 1311a is set as a route between the wiring pattern that transmits the setting key ON signal and the wiring pattern that transmits the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal. The change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed apart. Also on the main control board 1310, wiring patterns for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, wiring patterns for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and OFF of the setting key switch 1311a). Wiring patterns that carry the same signal are also close to each other In addition to being formed (separated from each other), the routing from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not brought close to each other (separated from each other). Formed).

[Procedure for operating the setting key switch]
Here, a procedure until the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is operated will be briefly described. In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640 as described above. Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, since the back cover opening side of the back cover 640 is the shaft support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, the body frame 4 is made larger than the outer frame 2 (about If it is not opened (close to 90 degrees), the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 so that the state where the back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a in order to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 by a gap enough to insert an arm. Even if it is attempted to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. That is, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 first sets the space for the outer frame 2 in order to secure a space where the back cover 640 can open the state where the back side of the game board 5 is covered. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 large (approximately 90 degrees).

  As described above, since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 is compared with the case where the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4. When a fraudster who attempts to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire, the open side of the body frame 4 is between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed from the side, the path from the opening side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes longer, so that it is necessary to feed the unauthorized tool deeply. As a result, the operation time during which an unauthorized tool is sent to the setting key switch 1311a also becomes longer, so that it is possible to make it easier for a staff member such as a game hall clerk to find such an illegal act.

  Further, since the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640, the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered with the back cover 640. It has become. As a result, a fraudulent person who attempts to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is located between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 using an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed from the open side of 4, the unauthorized tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before reaching the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from being inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

  The setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting a metal setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. Therefore, in order to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the main body frame 4 larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately 90 degrees). By accompanying such a plurality of operations, it is possible to increase the deterrence against unauthorized acts by unauthorized tools by increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

  As described above, the back cover 640 is mounted so that the left side of the front view is pivotally supported by the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600 so as to be opened and closed. The back cover 640 is fixed by screwing the lock screw 642 to the back cover attaching portion 601a, and the lock screw 642 is also arranged on the open side of the back cover 640, whereby the main body frame 4 is fixed. It is arrange | positioned at the axial support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 used as the opposite side to the open side. For this reason, an unauthorized person who attempts to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts an unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if it is sent in, the path from the opening side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes longer, so that it is necessary to send an unauthorized tool deeply. Also in this respect, since the operation time for sending an unauthorized tool to the locking screw 642 becomes longer, it is possible to make it easier for a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall to find such an unauthorized action, and a setting change board. By increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts by unauthorized tools.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is housed in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is located behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Installed on the side. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are separated from each other by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on different boards and making the objects to which the boards are attached different. Can do. In the case where the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one board, it is only necessary to make unauthorized modifications to one board, which is not preferable for crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the configuration to which the board is attached is different, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM are arranged. Security against the clear button 633z is improved.

  The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs game preparation control and game control (the game control is performed following the game preparation control). The game preparation control is based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in the first step (in step S14 in the main control side power-on process described later) in which the setting value can be changed. Subsequent to this determination and the processing of step S16A) and this first step, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value). The second step (the determination in step S216 in the setting change process to be described later, the process in step S218) can be selected and switched based on the above. Subsequent to the game preparation control, the game control includes a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process described later, a main control side timer interrupt process described later, and the like.

  Although such a crime prevention capability can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, and the setting key is adopted by adopting a configuration in which the objects to which the boards are attached are different. Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not particularly necessary to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged, but where the RWM clear button 633z that also functions as a setting switching button is located. It may be difficult to understand whether the staff is arranged or not, because the staff of the game hall, the staff of the game hall, and the like may be unfamiliar.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is marked with location information that can tell the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, a seal that can tell the location of the RWM clear button 633z is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet. On this rectangular sheet, for example, a red translucent character (height: 7 mm) is printed as “RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the dispensing control board”. ing. As a result, the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switch button) can be communicated to the staff of the game hall store manager, the game hall store staff, etc., so the game hall store manager, the game hall store staff, etc. When the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the RWM clear button 633z can be easily found so that the eyes are not turned. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Note that this seal does not interfere with the visibility of the main control board 1310 even if it is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Further, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of the seal.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When the cover body of the substrate box 1320 is molded, a concave character or a convex character may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the character may be integrally molded). . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The character (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the payout control board” may be printed in white as silk print on the surface (mounting face) of the board 1311, or the payout control board 633 A character (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” may be printed in white as silk printing on the front surface (mounting surface). The silk printing color may be the same color or different colors. In addition, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of characters to be silk-printed. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Mask the character part on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311 and remove the letter (height: 7 mm). The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the dispensing control board. A character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633 to form a letter (height: 7 mm) as a “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” using a resist. The resist colors may be the same color, but different colors are preferable because the substrates can be distinguished. Further, a blank symbol in which a symbol such as an arrow is masked may be used instead of the blank character. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The same seal (the seal is a transparent rectangular sheet) on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. For example, a red translucent character (high 7mm) may be affixed with "RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the dispensing control board"), or red translucent on the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633 A transparent rectangular sheet called “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” may be pasted with simple characters (height: 7 mm). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  In the embodiment described above, a seal is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Where the button 633z is arranged, the announcement sound may be played from various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a staff member such as a game hall manager or a game hall clerk operates the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item for the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, the announcement sound “RWM clear button is on the payout control board. RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button” that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located. An announcement image (which may be taken with a photograph) indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, etc., grasps the location of the RWM clear button 633z by such announcement voice or announcement image, then shuts off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and changes the setting value. It can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting, an announcement sound may be played from various speakers where the RWM clear button 633z that also functions as a setting switching button is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located under the control of the control board 1510 "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button. Set by operating the RWM clear button Please change the value "announcement sound repeatedly flows from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 advances various processes based on the received predetermined command after stopping the announcement voice. Will be. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. Note that, after such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that tells the operation method of the setting key after the set value is determined may be played from various speakers. In addition, when the announcement sound is being played, an image “setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting, an announcement sound may be played from various speakers where the RWM clear button 633z that also functions as a setting switching button is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located under the control of the control board 1510 "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button. Set by operating the RWM clear button Please change the value "announcement sound repeatedly flows from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for a sticker attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. In addition, although such announcement sound repeatedly flows from various speakers, it is assumed that the content of the announcement sound is missed, and the sticker affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement sound starts to flow. By visually observing, it is possible to know the location of the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to “The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also functions as a setting switch button. Change the setting value by operating the RWM clear button.” You may make it guide the content which tells the place where the sticker which shows the location of a button is affixed. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice. Even if the person who changes the setting value has become accustomed to the setting value setting change due to the work, if the RWM clear button is operated immediately after starting the work, , The announcement voice can be stopped promptly, and if it is unavoidable that the work must be done after the game hall is started, the work should be started so as not to inconvenience the player. When the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement voice can be stopped promptly. Note that, after such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that tells the operation method of the setting key after the set value is determined may be played from various speakers. In addition, when the announcement sound is being played, an image “setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, and the objects to which the boards are attached are also different, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are different. However, if the crime prevention can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button (in this case, the setting switching button is switched from the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633). Functions can be removed). For example, the setting change board 1311 has a distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side that is substantially the same as a distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the distance dimension in the left and right direction thereof A center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311; , Has a matching shape. That is, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is disposed on the center line along the left side of the setting change board 1311 on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is A position that becomes the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line along the right side of the control board 1310. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder which is inserted below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and is rotated by inserting a setting key near the lower side of the setting change board 1311 is disposed. A setting switching button having a pressing operation unit is disposed above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is disposed near the lower side of the same substrate as the setting change substrate 1311, whereas the setting switching buttons are disposed near the upper side and are spaced apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are arranged separately from each other on the same board, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are collected on one board. Can be made difficult to perform unauthorized modification, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one board and arranged separately. Even if it is a thing, crime prevention can be improved.

[Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for confirming and displaying setting values]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, the case where the setting value setting is changed will be briefly described first, and the case where the current setting value confirmation display is performed will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the set key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value that has been set. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

  When changing the set value, the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power is restored after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or power recovery after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. Accordingly, the “predetermined setting value change permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated needs to be satisfied. . That is, the person who actually changes the setting value checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), The work to open the main body frame 4 is performed, and then a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turned ON by turning it 60 degrees clockwise. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and then the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  A person who changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then attaches the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The opening operation is performed, and then a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. Thus, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) Displayed value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

  When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is sent from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. Then, when the set value 6 that is the maximum value is reached, the control returns to the set value 1 that is the initial value, increases by 1 again, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

  When a person who changes the setting value determines the setting value, the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) is changed from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and turn it off. The setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the setting value from the state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. The state is switched, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from being lit to being turned off.

  A person who changes the setting value performs an operation of removing the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Complete the setting change work.

  In the case of confirming and displaying the set value currently set, the outer frame 2 can be used at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. Thus, the “predetermined set value display permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated needs to be satisfied. That is, the person who confirms and displays the setting value that is actually set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the pachinko machine 1 is turned off) and then goes outside. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2, and then a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise. By turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. .

  The person who confirms and displays the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the pachinko machine 1 is powered off), and then The main body frame 4 is opened, and then a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is set to ON by turning ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. Thus, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) Displayed value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set value is pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the pressing operation is not performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  When the person who performs confirmation display of the currently set value, after confirming the currently set value, the initial position is the original position from the rotational position of the set key cylinder in which the set key switch 1311a is turned on. In order to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the turning operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which it is not displayed.

  The person who confirms and displays the currently set value pulls out the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. To complete the confirmation display of the currently set value.

  In addition, as described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is that when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs), 2 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on. The setting key ON operation is performed and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is required to be operated, whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition is as described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the time of power recovery after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or power recovery after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure) When the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the constant key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned ON. It is necessary that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are determined when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a so that the setting key cylinder 1311ab moves clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on. The predetermined setting value change permission condition includes “when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when a power failure occurs ( It is a requirement that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the time of power recovery after power recovery after a momentary power failure (momentary interruption). The predetermined set value display permission condition is “when the RWM clear button 633z is pressed when power is restored after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or power recovery after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The difference is that the operation unit is not operated.

  There are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mount type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment basically adopts a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation in which a setting key is inserted into or removed from the insertion slot. For this reason, when the force accompanying this operation acts on the substrate on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the substrate is bent. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is disposed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch, and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  As a result, in the lead type type, if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the metal setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and the board. Compared to the SMD type, the setting key switch leads are projected toward the outer shape and soldered to the board surface (mounting surface). The load applied to the part where each lead of the key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board increases, and this load works strongly from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. It will bend greatly. On the other hand, in the case of the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the metal setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch faces outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch. The lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board. Compared to the lead type, the load applied to the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board is reduced, and this load is reduced from the back surface (solder surface) to the surface (mounting surface). The substrate itself is difficult to bend even when working toward the surface.

  In addition, when the board itself bends greatly due to the external force acting on the board, there is a concern that the solder pattern where the SMD type electronic component is soldered may cause the land pattern peeling load to peel off greatly. When using the above-mentioned one, it is desirable to mount it on a substrate on which no SMD type electronic component is mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the solder portion where each lead portion of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the soldering portion of the setting key switch In view of the strength of the solder portion, it is desirable to use a lead type switch as the setting key switch.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, basically, the setting key switch 1311a is a lead type. In this embodiment, since the SMD type electronic component is not mounted on the setting change board 1311 but the lead type electronic component is mounted, a lead type of the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when the metal setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot and the board itself is greatly bent as described above, soldering is performed on the back surface (solder side) of the setting change board 1311. There is no possibility that the other electronic components of the lead type are peeled off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. As described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). Therefore, the signals from the setting key switch 1311a are electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  A rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left side, upper side, right side, and lower side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. The size of the main control board box 1320 is connected to the upper side and the right side of the main control board box 1320. A square-shaped setting change board 1311 is arranged in the corner area. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape having a distance dimension of one side of about one fifth of the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and is a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. It is smaller than the main control board 1310 having a shape. In this embodiment, the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square-shaped setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and a metal setting key is temporarily inserted into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the board itself is bent by being pushed in, or when the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when the metal setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, the board itself is bent. By forming 1311 on a small substrate, the amount of deflection can be reduced compared to the main control substrate 1310. As a result, the cover or base body of the main control board box 1320, which is in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) or back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, is prevented from being bent at a position corresponding to the setting change board 1311. Since there is no need to provide ribs that can be set, screw setting holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is a lead type and is disposed on the setting change board 1311 that is separate from the main control board 1310, so that the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent due to the operation (operation) in which the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  On the other hand, instead of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311 a is arranged on any one of the boards such as the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the power supply board 630. When the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the board, the setting key switch 1311a is replaced with the SMD type instead of the lead type, and is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board and temporarily inserted. Even when the setting key is pulled out from the mouth, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot, the board itself is difficult to bend as described above, so other SMD type electronic devices that are soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board. There is no risk that the component will peel off from the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  Here, the set value will be briefly described. The “set value” is a probability for determining whether or not a big hit or not, and a probability for determining whether or not a lottery or not. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to the time, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous for the player (that is, what the player acquires) The probability (advantage) that can increase the number of game balls that can be played) is preset. In the present embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, from setting value 1 to setting value 6. A probability (advantage degree) that is advantageous for the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, Big hit symbol determination table that defines the percentage of decision value for decision, small hit judgment table that defines the proportion of small hit judgment value that indicates winning for small hit, and the percentage of decision value for decision of small hit symbol A small hitting symbol determination table, a normal transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from the probability change to the normal time is specified), and used at various distribution rates associated with set values Select various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid) Or. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, the various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various allocation rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. In some cases, the values differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. In addition, as the setting values described above, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 were used. However, the setting values may be in a smaller range or in a larger range. It may be a thing. For example, four set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4 may be used, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting indicator 1310g displays the setting value, and the main control MPU 1310a checks the contents of the RAM built in itself when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is turned off, the content stored in its own RAM is abnormal (or trusted) Display an error message to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[Base monitor]
Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 among the game balls launched in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out port sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab by turning 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position, and this setting key can be turned ON. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON) The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder turning OFF). This OFF signal is sent to the setting change board 131. Is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting the information for transmitting the setting key ON and OFF as serial information is provided as a setting key. The switch 1311a may be provided. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key ON and OFF are received from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as “setting key modification (1)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position, and this setting key can be turned ON. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON) The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder turning OFF). This OFF signal is sent to the setting change board 131 Is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but a pulse output circuit capable of outputting information indicating the setting key ON and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside is provided as a setting key switch. You may provide in 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms in the case of information indicating the setting key ON, and is set to 5 ms in the case of information indicating OFF. . When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON and OFF from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which information is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as “setting key modification (2)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position, and this setting key can be turned ON. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON) The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder turning OFF). This OFF signal is sent to the setting change board 131 To the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal range from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. A comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2 V to 3 V out of zero V to 5 V) between the boards, and a comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310 a. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a may determine ON / OFF of the setting key ON signal and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as “setting key modification (3)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set ON. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the main control board. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the configuration of the setting key switch is “Modification example of setting key (4)”). May be described).

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 configured by the cover body and the base body. It may be accommodated in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. However, the setting change board 1311 is modified by infiltrating a wire or the like from a “gap” formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the determination key button and the corresponding opening. In order to prevent this, the wire intrusion prevention portion is formed on the cover body with respect to the opening. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from that of the main control board box 1320 described above. A setting change board cover opening / closing switch that can detect opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirect) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. You may comprise. Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition (of the setting change board box). The mode may be described as “setting key modification (5)”).

  Further, among the above-described modification examples (1) to (5) of the setting key, a mode appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (the mode of the selection combination of the modification example is referred to as “setting key modification example (6)). ").

  In addition, in the setting value described above, in addition to the probability for lottery determination as to whether it is a big hit or the probability for lottery determination as to whether it is a small hit, in order to make a lottery determination when shifting from the probability change to the normal time , The allocation ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and is advantageous to the player (that is, increasing the number of game balls that the player can acquire) The probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability (degree of advantage) that would be advantageous to the player was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the probability (advantage degree) that the other pachinko machines are advantageous to the player is high. Some have a single preset value set in advance. That is, as in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists in advance as a plurality of setting values and has a gaming specification that requires a setting change, and is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification with a probability (advantage) having a single preset value in advance and requiring no setting change at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in design according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are changed. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations are provided according to the game specifications. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are required not to depend on the game specifications, that is, to be able to be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, the probability (advantage degree) that the probability (advantage degree) that the player has an advantage for the player is that the setting value is advantageous to the player in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not required at all. The setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 are dealt with by design change by software that assigns the following contents. Can do.

  For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area (excluding a specific area of the entire RAM area) of the RAM built in itself (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value) (variation can be given to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (object) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of a light emitter such as a lamp or LED, the set value 1 is “all operations (movable body (portable object). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that designates “operation of the object (lighting object)” is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that designates “operation of the movable object (object)” is assigned as the setting value 2 and is set. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that designates “lighting of the luminous body” is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation region, other An actual machine check operation pattern 4 for designating an interference check with a structure or another movable body (an accessory) and an operation order such as an operation order with another movable body (an accessory)) is assigned. 1 port unit of light emitter (main control MP An actual machine check operation pattern 5 that designates “lighting of a light emitting body in a predetermined output port unit 1310a (that is, for each output port)” is assigned, and an actual machine check that designates “no operation” as a setting value 6 is assigned. The operation pattern 6 is assigned (the change setting mode of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared may be described as “variation example (1) by common hardware configuration)”. Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (instant) and the lighting of a light emitting body such as a lamp or LED by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interruption process described later in the actual machine check operation after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 75) from the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control with the contents (actual machine check operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Operation of a movable body (an accessory) to be controlled by the substrate 1510 and lighting of the light emitter can be performed. With the change setting mode of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared, variations can be made in the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed in a player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 designating “10 seconds” as the setting value 1 is assigned, the time setting pattern 2 designating “15 seconds” as the setting value 2 is assigned, and “20 seconds as the setting value 3”. Is assigned a time setting pattern 3 that designates “25 seconds” as a setting value 4, and a time setting pattern 5 that designates “30 seconds” as a setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that designates “35 seconds” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the time when the player enters the waiting state after the end of the change of the symbol is described as “Modification by common hardware configuration (2 ) "). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied according to the mode for setting the time change after the symbol change is over.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed while waiting for a player) performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates “comical effect” as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates “comical effect, operation effect of movable body (function)” as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates “serious effect” as the setting value 3 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern that designates “serial effect, operation effect of movable body (function)” as the setting value 4 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 is assigned as a setting value 5 that designates “period drama style effect”, and a demonstration effect setting that designates “period drama style effect, movable object (function)” as a setting value 6 Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the contents of the demonstration effect may be described as “variation example by common hardware configuration (3)”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the mode of changing the contents of the demonstration effect, it is possible to give variations to the contents of the demonstration effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume by rotating the volume adjustment switch. In this case, a volume setting pattern 1 that designates “volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a volume setting pattern 2 that designates “volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3. Is assigned a volume setting pattern 4 that designates “volume 4” as a setting value 4, and a volume setting pattern 5 that designates “volume 5” as a setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that designates “volume 6” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the default volume change setting mode may be described as “variation example (4) by common hardware configuration)”. Note that the sound volume is set to increase from the setting value 1 toward the setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to a default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of “volume 1” assigned to setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch decreases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to the setting value 6 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch increases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is decreased), and the movement to the maximum volume side end is completed. When the maximum volume is adjusted, the maximum volume may be set, or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. With this default volume change setting mode, it is possible to provide variations in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of error notification sound volumes in error notifications such as various problems, gotoes, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, not dependent), and the pachinko machine that generates the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume to the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice, there may be a case where the player who plays the game with other pachinko machines feels annoying. Therefore, what can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, an error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and an error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. , An error notification volume setting pattern 3 designating “error notification volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, an error notification volume setting pattern 4 designating “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and “ An error notification volume setting pattern 5 that designates “error notification volume 5” is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 that designates “error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)” is assigned as a setting value 6 (volume of error notification sound) ) May be described as “variation example with common hardware configuration (5)”. It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute, and the volume that can recognize the error notification sound when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that generates the error notification sound) is set to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume, It is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume that allows the error notification sound to be sufficiently recognized even if it is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control to generate an error notification sound at an error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the error notification sound volume in error notification can be varied.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance can be increased or decreased from the default luminance with respect to the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that designates “luminance 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that designates “luminance 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “ A default luminance setting pattern 3 that designates “luminance 3” is assigned, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that designates “luminance 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default luminance setting pattern that designates “luminance 5” as the setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that designates “luminance 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the default brightness may be described as “variation example by common hardware configuration (6)”). is there). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing a main control timer interruption process, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, thereby performing lighting of the light emitter, blinking, gradation points, and the like. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is an object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the illuminant can be adjusted to turn on, blink, and tone points. By changing and setting the content of the default brightness, it is possible to provide variations in the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in error notifications such as various problems, gotoes, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that designates “error notification brightness 1” as a setting value 1 is assigned to a lamp that is to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and “error notification brightness 2” is set as a setting value 2. An error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 3 to specify “error notification luminance 3” as a setting value 3 is assigned, and an error notification to specify “error notification luminance 4” as a setting value 4 The error notification brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification brightness 5” as the setting value 5 is assigned, and “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” is specified as the setting value 6. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification is “common hardware It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that although the lamp is not turned off, the lamp brightness is low and the lamp brightness is such that an error notification can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine. The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the illuminant by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interruption process described later to change the luminance of the illuminant in the error notification, thereby adjusting the lighting of the illuminant, blinking, gradation points, etc. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the illuminant can be adjusted to turn on, blink, and gradation point of the illuminant. Due to the setting for changing the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification, the luminance of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED in the error notification can be varied.

  In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration described above satisfy preset setting value display permission conditions in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. It is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (setting value display). May be described as “variation example (8) by common hardware configuration”).

  Further, any one of the modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be selected as appropriate and adopted in the modification example (6) of the setting key described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key ON operation is performed by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab by turning 60 degrees clockwise. If the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later to By clearing all areas of the control built-in RAM, excluding specific areas, and then setting interrupt enable etc. While the technique is advanced, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later. And then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the ball count process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of game balls output to the base monitor 1310h and collected by the out port 1008 in the port output process of the main control side power-on process described later is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value that is set and displayed by the setting indicator 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that has been set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting after power is restored, the number of game balls collected through the out port 1008 can be displayed. There is no need to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18, FIG. 21, and FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  In the function display unit 1400, the detailed illustration is omitted, but the two shins are displayed to display a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

  Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are particularly electrically connected to each other. A plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “wirings”) will be described in detail.

  The wiring FCBL that is electrically connected via the connection connector 1400a provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is connected to the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIGS. When drawn to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of 1100 or attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 as it is. It is drawn down.

  When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is formed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower side, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL for electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. They are routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 along the right side of the main control board box 1320 on the rear side of the board holder 1200 that is collected and attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. In this way, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 91 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Will be placed.

  A decoration substrate 1131 on which a plurality of decoration LEDs are mounted is disposed behind the function display unit 1400. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the decorative board 1131, is bent to the upper rear side of the game panel 1100, the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010 When bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close (or in contact) with the above-described wiring FCBL, it is directed downward to the rear surface of the back box 3010. And bent together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. The Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the above-described path of the wiring FCBL, and is bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and on the upper side of the driving board unit 1700, along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700. After being routed and routed to above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a long wiring length, and particularly from the upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and the upper side of the back side of the back box 3010 is bent downwardly on the rear side of the back box 3010, and vertically extends along the right side of the rear side of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are collected and routed to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. Thus, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 107 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 in the same manner as the wiring FCBL described above. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full sphere path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward; A lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby generating electromagnetic noise. discharge. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. I have. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The forced reset by the circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on process described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Will be completely erased (cleared). That is, if the internal reset circuit is forcibly reset, the RAM is cleared when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

  In the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are provided. The main control board 1310 protrudes from the soldering surface (surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, since the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and the periphery thereof are likely to accumulate static electricity, when electromagnetic noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the function display unit is disposed in front of the payout unit 560. 1400 and the main control board 1310 may enter the wiring FCBL that electrically connects, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 are electrically connected. The wiring UPCBL may enter. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL. Conversely, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to be in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320 and about the upper side of the main control board box 1320). A portion having a length of a quarter, bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320), and the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310 At the stage of passing over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged close to the main control board box 1320 After being bent toward the side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, when electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is When routed through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control board 1310a). When passing through the area (in front of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), electromagnetic noise enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. Under the influence of electromagnetic noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to reset by its built-in reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  In addition, instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, when the wiring accommodating groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the wiring FCBL is , Not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but is accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a. When passing through a region in front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320), electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may intrude into the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is used as the main control board as a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged with the function display unit connector MFCN below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By disposing the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is connected to the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separating the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by disposing the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. The electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated on the main control board 1310 or in a space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other in the main control board 1310. ing. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance from the wiring FCBL.

  Further, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 as described above. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 without being routed (or accommodated along the wiring receiving groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). And then bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 and routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as “second wiring separation distance dimension”). ) Can be secured greatly. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrudes from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the second wiring separation distance. Can be prevented. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. However, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element that can reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise for each wiring FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic wave noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic wave noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, and the like, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electric power is supplied to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When using capacitors, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 64) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the upper surface, and lower fixing pieces 1602 that protrude outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 29A is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 29B is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board showing the game panel in an opaque state, and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel so that the game area in which game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail are shown. 31 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 30, and FIG. 32 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged near the right end in the gaming area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction above the general winning award port 2001 on the right side. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a position higher than the first start port 2002 below the right general winning port 2001. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second start opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first start opening 2002.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning port 2001, A side unit 2200 which is attached to the left side of the mouth unit 2100 so as to follow the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 and has two general winning ports 2001, and a start mouth unit which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a as seen from the front side. An attacker unit 2400 that is attached to the right side of the front view 2100 and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, and above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Thus, a frame-shaped center attached to the center of the game area 5a slightly above the front view and having a gate portion 2003 is provided. The Tar won game 2500, is equipped with a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the gaming area 5a near the lower end at the center in the left-right direction and immediately above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a width that can accept only one game ball B and is always open upward, and receives only one game ball B at the lower left of the first start port 2002. And a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a possible width. The start port unit 2100 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 27 and the like).

  The start unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 30 and the like) that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 as a panel. A guide path 2102 (see FIG. 29) that guides to the rear of the plate 1110 and discharges downward (on the substrate holder 1200) is provided.

  The start opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward. It is located immediately below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  In the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first start port 2002 is located immediately below the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the central discharge portion of the stage 2503 The game ball B released from 2503a is configured to be received at the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be received at all times, and a first shelf 2201 that is inclined so that the right end is lower at the upper left of the two general winning ports 2001. , And a second shelf 2202 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered at the upper part of the two general winning ports 2001. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, two general winning ports 2001 are provided at a height position between the first starting port 2002 and the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100. The two general winning ports 2001 are provided facing each other so as to be arranged side by side. The left general winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left, and the right general winning opening 2001 opens toward the right.

  In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is located near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game ball B has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the right. The first shelf 2201 is inclined so that an extension line on the upper surface passes between the first start port 2002 and the stage 2503. The second shelf 2202 is inclined such that the extension line on the upper surface passes through the portion where the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100 is opened.

  The entire side unit 2200 is transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 27 and the like). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf portion 2201, and the second shelf portion 2202 are projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. . The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 are detected by a general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 64).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The entire attacker unit 2400 is formed to be transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 27 and the like). The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 among the four general winning ports 2001 (see FIG. 32 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape in a front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the upper right corner, and the second start opening 2004 can be opened upward in the lower left of the general winning opening 2001. Can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second start opening 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and the big winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large And a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 64 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start port door 2411 that can open and close the second start port 2004, and opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate part 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 32 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 includes an attacker left passage 2421 and an attacker right passage 2422 through which a game ball B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001, and an attacker left passage. A second starting port guide shelf 2423 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left from the position immediately below 2421, and a second starting port guide shelf 2423 that has a second starting port 2004 open in the middle; A large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to become lower leftward from a position spaced from the left end of the start opening guiding shelf 2423 to the left, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened in the middle. I have.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a communication port 2425 that communicates with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423, and a lower position than the prize winning port 2005 from the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423. From the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker extending to the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 so as to become lower leftward, and between the second start opening guiding shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guide shelf 2424. An intermediate passage 2427 that extends downward from the big prize opening 2005 and communicates with the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker.

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general winning opening 2001, partitions the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and provides a communication port 2425 between the lower end and the second start opening guide shelf 2423. A partition portion 2428 to be formed, and an inclined portion 2429 which is inclined so as to be positioned leftward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428 upward.

  A second start port door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second start port 2004 opened in the second start port guide shelf 2423 extends in the front-rear direction and has a plate-like shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. It is formed, and the left end side is provided to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second starting port door 2411 is configured such that the right end side is positioned above the horizontal and slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second starting port 2004. The second start port 2004 can be closed by disabling acceptance of B. In a state where the second start port 2004 is closed, the second start port door 2411 guides the game ball B that has circulated through the second start port guide shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left side. be able to.

  The second starting port door 2411 is in a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed in a counterclockwise direction so that the right end side moves upward with the left end side as the center, The second starting port 2004 can be opened (opened) by allowing the game ball B to be received in the second starting port 2004. When the second starter door 2411 rises to the right end side and opens the second starter 2004, the second starter door 2411 rises from the second starter guide shelf 2423. Thus, the path of the game ball B rolling on the second start port guide shelf 2423 can be inhibited, and the game ball B can be received into the second start port 2004. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Open.

  The grand prize opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the big prize opening 2005 opened in the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. The award winning opening 2005 opened upward can be opened and closed by moving forward and backward. The grand prize opening door 2413 can close the grand prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and in the state where the big prize opening 2005 is closed, the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is distributed from the upstream side (right side). The played game ball B can be guided to the left. Also, the special winning opening door 2413 is moved back by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special winning opening 2005, and circulates through the second start opening guiding shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 of the center object 2500. The game ball B can be received in the special winning opening 2005. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward inside the special winning opening 2005, and upward on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. A second receiving port 2008 that is always open is disposed. Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a first receiving sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008. 2405 and the first receiving port 2007 are opened and closed (the game ball B received in the grand prize winning port 2005 and distributed inside is distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008). And a sorting solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the sorting piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 It is equipped with. The distribution piece 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front-rear direction so that the right end of the distribution piece 2415 extends in the front-rear direction, and opens upward by moving forward and backward. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving port 2007, guides the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 to the right, and is always opened upward. It can be accepted in 2008. Further, the sorting piece 2415 retreats by the driving of the sorting solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is highly probable for the first receiving port 2007. Can be accepted. The sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can sort the game balls B received in the special winning opening 2005 so as to be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below the gate portion 2003 (below the gate portion 2003) on the downstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 in the center accessory 2500 described later. The second starting port 2004 is positioned at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and is also a big winning port. 2005 is located below the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Moreover, in the state attached to the panel board 1110, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N between the lower end and the upper end (general winning port 2001) of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500.

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning port 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the game ball B is released from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted into the general winning port 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (distribution passage group 2520) of the center accessory 2500 may be received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, an attacker left passage 2421, a general winning port 2001, and an attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and the game balls flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 B will enter either of them.

  When the game ball B supplied through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and above the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the general winning port 2001, it is detected by the general winning port sensor 2401. In the rear side of the game panel 1100, the game panel 1100 is discharged downward (on the board holder 1200). If the game ball B enters the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being received in the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, and According to the inclination, it flows to the second start port 2004 side (left side). In a state where the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411, the second start port 2004 flows to the left on the second start port door 2411 and is discharged to the left from the left end of the second start port guide shelf 2423. . When the game ball B passes through the second start port guide shelf 2423, if the second start port 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted into the second start port 2004 with a very high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second start opening 2004, it is discharged to the left big winning opening 2005 side through the second start opening guide shelf 2423.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, the game ball B released from the second starting port guide shelf 2423 to the left side is the prize winning port 2005 side, Or it will flow down to either of the intermediate passage 2427 side. When the prize winning opening 2005 is closed by the prize winning entrance door 2413 when it flows down to the prize winning entrance 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the prize winning entrance door 2413 and from the left end of the prize winning entrance guide shelf 2424. Released to the left. When the big prize opening door 2413 closing the big prize opening 2005 is retreated and the big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B flowing down from the second start opening guide shelf 2423 to the big prize opening 2005 side, Accepted at Grand Prize Winner 2005. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second start-port guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B that has been released to the left from the big prize guide guide shelf 2424 pass through the out port 1008 to the rear side of the game panel 1100. Is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200).

  On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the general winning opening 2001, and is placed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001. When entering the attacker right passage 2422, it comes into contact with the stepped portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005 and rebounds to the left. In the present embodiment, since the second start port guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second start port guide shelf 2423 coincides with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, it enters the attacker right passage 2422. Then, the game ball B bounced off at the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 falls (circulates) onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability.

  When the game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2422 and contacts the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces upward from the communication port 2425, the partition portion 2428 that forms the upper end side of the communication port 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429. Since the inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is located on the right side with respect to the lower end, the game ball B that is in contact with the inclined portion 2429 is reflected toward the lower right side passage 2426 of the attacker, The attacker enters the lower right passage 2426. Further, when the game ball B abutting against the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces downward from the communication port 2425, the game ball B enters the attacker lower right passage 2426.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker lower right passage 2426 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received at the second start port 2004 and the big winning port 2005.

  Also, the attacker unit 2400 includes a sub-function display unit 2450 above the second start port 2004. The sub-function display unit 2450 has a plurality of (here, six) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit is activated by the lighting / flashing of the LED, the emission color, and the like. Displays the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 To do.

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 includes a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 64). This magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraud using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially transparently, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5 a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which a game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be discharged to the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110) is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides. In the stage 2503, a portion (central discharge portion 2503a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side discharge portion 2503b) on both the left and right sides are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and the game ball | bowl B can be discharge | released into the game area | region 5a from those parts.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (central discharge portion 2503 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction and on the right side of the outer peripheral surface on the right side. The gate portion 2003 has a size that allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough and is provided with a gate sensor 2506 that detects the passage of the game ball. The gate portion 2003 is provided with a space through which only one game ball B can pass between the gate portion 2003 and the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 forms a part of the upper outer peripheral surface, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the right from a position on the left side than the center in the left-right direction. , And a distribution passage group 2520 including a plurality of passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. The flow passage group 2520 extends vertically from the vicinity of the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to above the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521. A second distribution passage 2522. The first distribution passage 2521 extends in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge (right rail 1005) of the game area 5a from the inlet side at the upper end, the lower end is bent in a crank shape to the left, and the outlet is downward. It is open toward. The exit at the lower end of the first distribution passage 2521 is located slightly to the right with respect to the top of the gate portion 2003.

  The second flow passage 2522 has an upper end inlet that is open to the left with respect to the inlet of the first flow passage 2521 and is bent in a crank shape to the right near the upper end. Adjacent to the circulation passage 2521, it extends downward in a circular arc shape, bends in a crank shape to the left in the vicinity of the lower end, then bends in a crank shape to the right, and the outlet is adjacent to the outlet of the first circulation passage 2521. It is open toward. As a result, the second circulation passage 2522 can attenuate the circulation speed of the game ball B more than the first circulation passage 2521. The first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of protrusions 2523 at intervals in the distribution direction of the game balls B, and the game balls B abut on the protrusions 2523. Therefore, the distribution speed can be suppressed.

  The center accessory 2500 is located on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) of the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. An upstream space 2511 in which the game ball B can be circulated is formed. Further, in the assembled state in the game board 5, the upper end entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 of the distribution passage group 2520 is located directly below the stop portion 1006, and the first distribution passage 2521 is connected to the right rail 1005 (game). It extends along the periphery of the region 5a. Further, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (periphery of the game area 5a).

[5-8e. The flow of game balls through the distribution channel group of the center role]
Next, the flow of the game ball B through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32 and the like. In the assembled state in the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate part 2003, and between the gate part 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. Has been planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are such that the game balls B that have circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 are positioned on the right side of the gate portion 2003 (the gate portion 2003 and the right rail 1005). ), And is adjusted to circulate with high probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are such that the game balls B that have circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. It has been adjusted. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 has a high probability that the game ball B that has circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 is next to the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to circulate on the left side of 2003.

  On the other hand, in the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the gate unit 2003 has a high probability of the attacker unit 2400. It is adjusted to enter the attacker right passage 2422. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 are highly likely to be a game ball B that circulates on the gate portion 2003 or the left side of the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to enter the left attacker left passage 2421 of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted to be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 with the next highest probability of the attacker left passage 2421.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center accessory 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 The game ball B flows through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). ), The game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first distribution passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first circulation passage 2521 has a high probability to the right of the gate portion 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the downstream end of the first circulation passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. Pass through. Then, the game ball B that has passed the right side of the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2422 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 circulates through either the second start port guide shelf 2423 or the attacker right lower passage 2426.

  As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass through the gate part 2003 so much, so that the lottery of the result of the normal lottery performed by passing through the gate part 2003 of the game ball B is not performed much, There is a low possibility that the normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 circulates through the second start-out guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second start-up port 2004 is often closed. Since the mouth 2004 is not so much received, there are few opportunities to receive benefits such as lottery of the second special lottery result and payout of the game ball B by accepting the game ball B at the second start opening 2004. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the privilege given to the player is relatively small.

  In addition, although the case where it hit on the right was demonstrated above, the game ball B thrown in by the strength which jumps over the entrance of the 2nd distribution passage 2522 opened near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510, It will enter into the 1st distribution passage 2521, and will become the result similar to the above.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003. A lottery of the normal lottery result is performed by passing through the gate part 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N installed. The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and from the attacker left passage 2421 The second start port guide shelf 2423 is distributed.

  At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal lottery result is drawn, if the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 has a predetermined pattern. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the second distribution passage 2522, the privilege given to the player is relatively high (large).

  For this reason, since the player is more likely to receive a privilege in the second distribution passage 2522, the player has a driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511, and the game The driving strength of the gaming ball B will be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522. A change can be given to the driving operation, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and allows the player to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In the case where the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is a “big hit” that generates an advantageous gaming state, etc. The big prize opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game balls B with a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and when the game balls B are accepted into the big prize opening 2005, many game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous game state (“big hit game state”), if the player is required to adjust the strength of the game ball B, the player may feel impatient and frustrated. There is a risk of reducing interest in However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit right and circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422 circulate, and then communicate with the step portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005. The game ball B can be distributed to the big prize opening guidance shelf 2424 side (large prize opening 2005 side) by bouncing back toward the opening 2425 and falling to the second start opening guidance shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425. Therefore, the game ball B can be received into the big prize opening 2005 by an easy driving operation without adjusting the driving operation delicately, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharpened according to the game state, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

[5-8f. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center character]
Subsequently, the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 according to an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG. 33 (a) is an enlarged view of the main part showing an embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from FIG. 31 and the like, and (b) is a further illustration of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from (a). It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment. FIG. 34 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory that is further different from FIG. 33, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 35 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory which is further different from those in FIGS. 33 and 34. 33 and 34, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 33 (a), compared to FIG. 31, the upper end inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 is separated from the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 to the left. It is what. This distribution passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 33 (b), the angle of the hitting portion 1006 is such that the hitting ball 1006 in the front component member 1000 is likely to rebound to the entrance side of the second circulation passage 2522. And the portion between the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 and the inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second circulation passage 2522 side (left side) is lowered. It has been made. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second circulation passage 2522 side, so the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B into which the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 becomes wider. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 34A, in the distribution passage group 2520 of FIGS. 31 and 33, the respective inlets of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are opened upward. Then, the upstream side of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 is extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective inlets are directed leftward in a state of being vertically aligned. It is made to open.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5 a) constitutes a part of the first circulation passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is a part of the second circulation passage 2522. Part. In this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is the first circulation from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It becomes the length to each entrance of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space portion 2511 shown in FIG. 31 and FIG.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving strength that comes into contact with the narrower portion on the left side than the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with the driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens toward the left, compared to the embodiment of FIG. 31 and FIG. The adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B is narrowed. In addition, a game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 on the left side of the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 divides the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), there is a possibility of deviating from the upstream space portion 2511 depending on the momentum and angle of the bounced game ball B to the left. That is, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2511, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2511 and does not enter any of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center object 2500 may be distributed. For this reason, since the difficulty level for the game ball B driving operation is increased, the player's willingness to drive the game ball B can be increased, and the player can insert game media. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the embodiment of FIG. 34 (a), a branch portion 2524 that communicates with the second circulation passage 2522 in one way is provided in the middle of the first circulation passage 2521. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above a portion that is bent downward from the right end of a portion (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) that extends to the left and right in the second circulation passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is struck with the strength to enter the first distribution passage 2521, the game sphere B is second in the branch portion 2524 depending on the struck strength (if the stake strength is weak). Since branching to the circulation passage 2522 side, the difficulty of circulation of the game ball B with respect to the second circulation passage 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG.

  In order to allow the game ball B to enter the second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B to be weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first distribution passage 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion bent downward in the second circulation passage 2522, the game ball B that has entered the second circulation passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not jump upward (branch portion 2524 side), and does not enter the first distribution passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first circulation passage 2521 to the second circulation passage 2522 by one-way.

  Further, in this embodiment, when entering the inlet of the first distribution passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first distribution passage 2521, the first distribution passage 2521 side in the portion of the branch portion 2524 Or, since it branches to either side of the second distribution passage 2522, the player can be throbbing or throbbing depending on whether the game ball B branches to which side in the branching portion 2524, the first circulation It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 even though the player has hit the game ball B aiming at the second distribution passage 2522. Since the branch portion 2524 of the first distribution passage 2521 may branch to the second distribution passage 2522 side, whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side determines whether or not the player It can be thrilled and entertained by the player, and when the branching portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side, a player's driving operation mistake is covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 is opened. The game ball B will be distributed, and it can be made to the feeling obtained with respect to a player, and the fall of the interest with respect to a player's game can be suppressed.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 35, the second distribution passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the inlet of the second flow passage 2522 opens upward at a position on the left side of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Accordingly, all of the game balls B that have been driven into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 circulate through the first circulation passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 and flows through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the distribution of the game ball B can be made conspicuous from the player, if the game ball B distributes through the bypass portion 2525 to the player, it can be thought that there is something good after that. Allow the player to perform a game ball B driving operation aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and to entertain the game ball B to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after the main unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 64). See).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. The rear third stage production unit 3300 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back second stage production unit 3200 and the front opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed in front of the back second stage production unit 3200 The back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 and releases it downward, and the game received in the general winning port 2001, the second start port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right sphere discharge unit 3040 for receiving the sphere B and releasing it downward.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 38 and 39).

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

  Further, the back box 3010 has an insertion port 3011 that is cut out so as to be recessed backward from the front end in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The insertion port 3011 is configured to communicate a space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the back first effect unit 3100 described later and the outside of the back box 3010 in a state assembled to the game board 5. When the game board 5 is transported, the insertion hole 3011 is inserted into the rotating decorative body 3210 from the side surface side of the back box 3010, so that vibration of the back second rendering unit 3200 is caused by vibration caused by transportation or the like. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be prevented from moving. Alternatively, when a problem occurs in the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 of the back second stage production unit 3200, it is possible to eliminate the problem by inserting a finger, a tool, or the like through the insertion port 3011.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40A is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 41 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the back first effect unit. The back first production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached at the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened forward.

  The back first rendering unit 3100 is a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 that are disposed above the light guide plate 3110 and irradiate light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. The back first upper decorative substrate 3120 on which the LEDs 3121 are mounted, and the back first left on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 that are arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. A diffusing lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130, the plurality of LEDs 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130, and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and diffuses the light from the LED 3131 to irradiate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. And.

  The back first stage production unit 3100 has a transparent flat plate-like upper base 3151 attached to the upper front edge of the light guide plate 3110, and is attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 so as to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and the rear side. A transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, a transparent flat plate-like left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and attached to the rear side of the left base 3153 A transparent left rear cover 3154 that sandwiches the light guide plate 3110 and has the back first left decorative substrate 3130 and the diffusion lens 3140 attached thereto, and a transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110 And a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 It is equipped with a.

  The back first stage production unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decorative body 3161 on which the relief-like decoration is formed and the left base 3153. The back first left decorative body 3162 on which the relief-shaped decoration is formed, the back first right decorative body 3163 attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and formed with the relief-shaped decoration, The light plate 3110 is attached at the center in the left-right direction of the front lower edge, and is attached to the rear first lower decorative body 3164 on which a relief-like decoration is formed, and on the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 and forward. And a back first lower decorative board 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of irradiating light are mounted.

  The light guide plate 3110 of the back first rendering unit 3100 has a substantially quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a cutout portion 3111 cut upward in a semicircular arc shape at the center in the left-right direction at the lower edge. Although not shown, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light by light irradiated from the upper surface and a second pattern that emits light by light irradiated from the left surface. The first design and the second design are different from each other. Although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the light emission mode differs depending on the LED 3121 that emits light among the plurality of LEDs 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120.

  On the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 and the back first left decorative substrate 3130, the LED 3121 and the LED 3131 mounted thereon are full-color LEDs. The back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three in the vertical direction. By dividing the back first left decorative substrate 3130 into three parts, the diffusion lens 3140 is also divided into three parts in the vertical direction so as to correspond. The first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted by causing the LED 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 to emit light, and the second pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted by causing the LED 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130 to emit light. The design can emit light.

  The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 include a plating layer having a metallic luster. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 are formed in a band plate shape along the upper side, the left side, and the right side of the light guide plate 3110. Yes.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a pair of portions that are concentric with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110 and extend in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and the upper and lower sides are opened. It is formed in a substantially annular shape. The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a plurality of three-sided decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front surface. Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 has protrusions extending radially so as to pass through the respective three-sided decorative parts. These radially extending protrusions extend outward from the three-piece decoration and extend short toward the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is obtained by providing a transparent member with a vapor-deposited layer having a predetermined metallic luster and translucency. In the state in which the back first lower decorative body 3164 does not emit the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170, the decoration on the front side can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state by the vapor deposition layer of metallic luster. .

  On the back first lower decorative board 3170, LEDs 3171 are mounted at positions behind the three-sided decorative part in the back first lower decorative body 3164. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative board 3170 are caused to emit light, the entire back first lower decorative body 3164 can be light-decorated and the three-sided decoration part can be brightly decorated. The plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are full-color LEDs.

  In the state where the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel plate 1110 to the substantially front surface above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the first pattern And the second pattern can be displayed in a luminous manner. Further, the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. 27 and the like, the back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163. However, they are located at the upper edge, the left edge, and the right edge, respectively, in the game area 5a.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 is located immediately above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting port 2002. . The back first lower decoration body 3164 can decorate the outside of the rotation decoration body 3210 located at the lowest specific position among the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotating decorative body 3210 at a specific position.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 42 to 49 and the like. FIG. 42 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the rear second stage production unit mainly exploded for each configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the rear second stage production unit mainly exploded for each configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 46 is a front view showing a drive mechanism in the back second effect unit. 47 (a) to 47 (d) are explanatory views showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit, and FIGS. 48 (e) to 48 (g) are in the back second effect unit continuing from FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a some rotation decoration body. FIG. 49 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the back second effect unit.

  The back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 between the back first effect unit 3100 and the back third effect unit 3300. The back second effect unit 3200 is arranged on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of (in this case, 12) rotating ornament bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 each have a shaft portion 3210a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have translucency. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of a back second outer decorative body 3228 and a back second inner decorative body 3229 which will be described later.

  The plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are composed of a plurality (here, four) special rotation decoration bodies 3211 and the remaining (eight here) ordinary rotation decoration bodies 3212. The special rotating ornaments 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (two in this case) of ordinary rotating ornaments 3212 in between. In the present embodiment, the special rotating decorative body 3211 is decorated with a three-piece decoration. The special rotating decorative body 3211 is formed in a gold color with the heel part being red and the other part having a metallic luster, and the whole has translucency. Ordinary rotating decorative body 3212 is decorated with petals. The normal rotating decorative body 3212 has a petal portion formed in a pink color having a metallic luster, and other border portions are formed in white, and the whole has translucency.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a quadrangular outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center and an annular fixed gear portion 3220b having a larger diameter than the through hole 3220a, and a unit base It is rotatably attached to the front surface of 3220 and penetrates back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference that is larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, and the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decoration body 3210 can rotate. And an annular drive ring 3221 having an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the plurality of axial holes 3221a and the plurality of axial holes 3221a.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220. The back second drive motor 3222 has a rotating shaft that protrudes forward through the unit base 3220. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3223 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3222 and the drive gear 3223 are meshed with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221 and can rotate to the unit base 3220. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3224 attached to the rotating base body 3210, and a rotating body gear 3225 that is fixed to the rear ends of the shaft portions 3210 a of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220 b of the unit base 3220. It is equipped with.

  The back second stage production unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a through-hole 3226a having a square outer shape and a slightly smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. The outer base 3226 has a circular shape that is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 in the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and is attached to the unit base 3220. The outer shape is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221. The inner base 3227 having a polygonal through hole 3227a at the center and the outer base 3226 are attached to the front surface of the outer base 3226. The outer shape of the inner base 3227 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the outer base 3226. Back second outer side having through-hole 3228a having a smaller diameter The decorative body 3228 is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 in the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the outer shape of the outer shape of the inner base 3227 is larger than the outer diameter of the inner base 3227. A back second inner decorative body 3229, and an annular back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 inserted into the through hole 3229 a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 and attached to the unit base 3220. It is equipped with.

  Furthermore, the back second stage production unit 3200 includes a rotation position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating and is located at the lowermost specific position, and a special that revolves while rotating. And a special rotation position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotation decoration body 3211 is located at the lowest specific position.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, and the rear second outer decorative body 3228 and the rear second inner decorative body 3229. And a back second decorative substrate 3240 on which a plurality of LEDs 3241 are mounted. The LED 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 is appropriately caused to emit light, whereby the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be light-decorated.

  The unit base 3220 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The drive ring 3221 has the same number of shaft holes 3221a as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions protruding toward the center side are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The number of the protrusions in the trapezoidal shape is the same as the rotational decoration body 3210 (here, 12). In this embodiment, twelve trapezoidal protruding portions are provided by 30 degrees in the clockwise direction from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

  The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c protruding from the inner periphery of the portion corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a toward the center. Further, the drive ring 3221 extends further to the center side from the detection pieces 3221c arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (two in this case) of the detection pieces 3221c between the plurality of detection pieces 3221c. A plurality (four in this case) of special detection pieces 3221d are provided. That is, the drive ring 3221 of the present embodiment has the same number (12) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotation decoration body 3210, and the same number (4) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotation decoration body 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220.

  The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The outer base 3226 is divided into four parts with a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center of the through hole 3226a as a boundary, and each is attached to the unit base 3220.

  The inner base 3227 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a is the same shape and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220. The inner base 3227 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The inner base 3227 is divided into four parts with a cross line obtained by rotating a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center by about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction, and each is attached to the unit base 3220. Yes. In this embodiment, since the divided part of the inner base 3227 divided into four parts is different from the divided part of the outer base 3226, the unit base 3220 is compared with the case where the divided parts are the same. The strength and rigidity when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to can be improved.

  The back second outer decorative body 3228 has the same outer shape as the outer base 3226 and the same size. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed such that the inner diameter of the through hole 3228a is slightly larger than the same circumference where the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The back second outer decorative body 3228 includes a red annular decorative portion 3228b provided in an annular shape with a certain width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners outside the annular decorative portion 3228b. And a corner decoration portion 3228c. The annular decoration portion 3228b is decorated by arranging stylized plant leaves in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decoration portion 3228c is decorated to resemble a tangled wind. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a relief decoration on the surface. The back second outer decorative body 3228 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four like the outer base 3226.

  The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the same circumference in which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. In the back second inner decorative body 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a is substantially the same shape and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is a red decoration in which the leaves of the plant plant arranged in a certain pattern are arranged in a circumferential direction so as to form a pair with the annular decorative portion 3228b of the back second outer decorative body 3228. Is given. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on the surface. The back second inner decorative body 3229 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four like the inner base 3227.

  The back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 has a length in the front-rear direction connecting the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property.

  The rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the back second decorative substrate 3240. The rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c located at the lowest position among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 46).

  The special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227 and detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 has moved one of the plurality of trapezoidal protruding portions in the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 in the clockwise direction from the lowermost portion (rotate 30 degrees). It is attached to a trapezoidal part protruding at a position (see FIG. 46).

  In the back second decorative substrate 3240, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a quadrangular outer shape, and a polygonal through hole 3240a is formed at the center. Further, the back second decorative substrate 3240 is formed with an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a portion outside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the outer base 3226 and a portion inside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the inner base 3227. The back second decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight so as to correspond to the respective divided bodies of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 which are divided into four.

  Subsequently, the movement of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the back second rendering unit 3200 will be described. First, in the back second rendering unit 3200, the shaft portion 3210a protruding rearward from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has the inner periphery of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 from the front. Through the insertion hole 3240b of the back second decorative substrate 3240, and between the inner periphery of the outer base 3226 and the outer periphery of the inner base 3227, so that the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 can rotate. While being inserted, the rear end penetrates the shaft hole 3221 a and protrudes rearward from the drive ring 3221. A rotating body gear 3225 that meshes with the fixed gear section 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft section 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210.

  Among the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 move one counterclockwise from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 in a front view. The shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. In the remaining eight ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212, the respective shaft portions 3210a are inserted into the remaining shaft holes in which the shaft portions 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 are not inserted.

  In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment has four special rotation decoration bodies 3211 out of the twelve rotation decoration bodies 3210 that are in the orbit as shown in FIGS. It is located at both ends in the up-down direction and both ends in the left-right direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 are located at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock and 12 o'clock in the watch, and the remaining 8 ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212 are It is located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock, and 11 o'clock. In the present embodiment, the position of the 6 o'clock part is set as the specific position of the rotating decorative body 3210.

  In this normal state, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (FIG. 46).

  In the state where the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 27 and the like, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are arranged in a circle along the periphery of the game area 5a, Except for, all the rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in a good state. In the state assembled to the game board 5, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear is viewed from the front through the through-hole 3229 a (back second inner periphery decoration body 3230) of the back second inner decoration body 3229. It can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the normal state, the rotating decorative body 3210 located at the specific position of the 6 o'clock position which is the lowest end is the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100. And the outside is decorated by the back first lower decorative body 3164. In addition, the rotational decoration body 3210 at a specific position is located behind the first start port 2002 and can decorate the back of the first start port 2002.

  When the drive gear 3223 is rotated clockwise by the back second drive motor 3222 in this normal state, the transmission gear 3224 meshed with the drive gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshed with the transmission gear 3224. Through this, the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotating decorative body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

  At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, the shaft portion 3210a is moved in the circumferential direction. The rotating body gear 3225 rotates about the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction (here, the clockwise direction) as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. Thus, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured such that each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates by one rotation when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees. .

  As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, and in a state where the normal rotating decorative body 3212 is positioned at a specific position, The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 47A).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotation decoration body 3211 approaches a specific position, the normal rotation decoration immediately before the special rotation decoration body 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 47 (b) to (d) and FIG. 48 (e). ), See (f)).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotating decorative body 3211 reaches a specific position, it corresponds to the shaft hole 3221a of the driving ring 3221 in which the shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted. The detected piece 3221c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotation decoration body 3212 immediately before the rotation direction of the special rotation decoration body 3211 is inserted. The special detection piece 3221d protruding from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 48G). That is, when the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d, it is detected that the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 rotates the back second drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to the above, thereby rotating the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the above. It is also possible to revolve in the counterclockwise direction.

  Subsequently, a light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 49 and the like. The plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are full-color LEDs each having high luminance. These LEDs 3241 can irradiate the player with the emitted color regardless of the decorative colors of the rotary decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 arranged on the front side. it can. That is, the rotating decoration body 3210, the back second outer decoration body 3228, and the back second inner decoration body 3229 can be light-decorated with an appropriate color depending on the light emission color of the LED 3241.

  The plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 are provided at 12 positions located behind the respective rotary decorative bodies 3210 in a state where the rotary decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position (normal state). Of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250, twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, and the rear of the corner decorative portion 3228 c of the back second outer decorative body 3228. The upper left corner LED group 3256 and the upper right corner LED group 3257 provided at the position to be positioned, the lower left corner LED group 3258 provided at the lower left corner part behind the side unit 2200, the start port unit 2100 and the side The winning prize port LED group 3259 provided in the rear part of each general winning prize port 2001 of the unit 2200 is configured. .

  The twelve rotational decoration body LED groups 3250 have the part behind the lowest specific position as the first rotational decoration body LED group 3250a, and the second rotational decoration body LED group 3250b and the third rotation in the clockwise direction. Decoration body LED group 3250c, fourth rotation decoration body LED group 3250d, fifth rotation decoration body LED group 3250e, sixth rotation decoration body LED group 3250f, seventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250g, and eighth rotation decoration body LED group 3250h , A ninth rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, a tenth rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, an eleventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, and a twelfth rotation decoration body LED group 3250l. In the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, the LEDs 3241 provided respectively can emit light independently.

  Each of the twelve rotational decoration body LED groups 3250 includes a radiation passing from the revolution center of the rotational decoration body 3210 through the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3210 and the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3210 with the revolution center of the rotational decoration body 3210 as the center. , A first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. Four 1st LED groups 3251, 2nd LED group 3252, 3rd LED group 3253, and 4th LED group 3254 which constitute one rotation decoration body LED group 3250 are LED3241 provided in each, It is possible to emit light independently

  The first LED group 3251 of the rotating ornament body LED group 3250 is closer to the revolution center side (inner side) than the rotation center of the rotating ornament body 3210, and on the counterclockwise revolution direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotation ornament body 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) to the revolution center side with respect to the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise direction side) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the side (outside) opposite to the revolution center side with respect to the rotation center of the rotational decoration body 3210 with respect to the third LED group 3253.

  The twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 have, as a first intermediate LED group 3255a, a portion adjacent to the lowest specific position in the clockwise direction, the second intermediate LED group 3255b in the clockwise direction, Third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, The tenth intermediate LED group 3255j, the eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and the twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l are provided.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits a plurality of LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 in a normal state, thereby causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be decorated with light emission. That is, 12 circular light emitting decorations arranged on the circumference can be shown to the player. At this time, it is possible to decorate the rotating decoration body 3210 with different colors or to illuminate the ordinary rotating decoration body 3212 with different colors.

  Further, by causing the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 to emit light sequentially in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotating decorative body LED group 3250 emits light, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 may emit light. Thereby, the light emission between rotation decoration body LED group 3250 will be supplemented by the light emission of intermediate LED group 3255, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that turns more smoothly.

  In addition, each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 is divided into four groups of a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. After causing the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 to emit light, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, and then adjacent to the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is caused to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that turns more smoothly and a light effect that turns in small increments. Then, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating, if the light emission effect as described above is performed in accordance with the revolution speed of the rotating decorative body 3210, an LED is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 itself. As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 is revolving while emitting light.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251,. By emitting light in a proper order, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in one rotational decoration body LED group 3250. Thereby, when the rotating decoration body 3210 is stopped in a normal state, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light in order. The player can be given an illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (spinning) in a state where it is not revolving.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 emit light, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown an emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Further, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light at the same time, an annular light emitting decoration can be shown to the player. At this time, by increasing the luminance of the light emitting decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the shape of the rotating decoration body 3210 or the like (hard to see). Thereby, for example, in a state in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is made difficult to be seen by increasing the luminance and light is emitted in a ring shape, the rotational decorative body 3210 is rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotating decorative body 3211. After that, by making the brightness low or turning it off so that the rotating decorative body 3210 can be easily seen, it is possible to show the player that the rotating decorative body 3210 is moving sometime.

  As described above, according to the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various light emission by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240. Production can be performed. Further, by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be made less tired.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the back third stage production unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 54 is a front view showing a driving mechanism and a decorative board in the back third effect unit in a state where the left side ring decorative body and the right side ring decorative body are moved to the appearance position. The back third rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second rendering unit 3200.

  The back third rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a square frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the upper part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301. A lower unit 3330 provided in the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided in the left part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided in the right part of the front surface of the unit base 3301. And.

  The upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the left-right direction, and to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. The upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, the back third upper drive motor 3320 which is attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotation shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and the back third upper drive A spur gear-like drive gear 3321 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3320, a rotation link member 3322 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3322 Slides left and right to open and close the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 That the slide link member 3323, and a.

  The upper unit 3310 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover an upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the opening / closing position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and a part of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 from the front side. The front cover 3325, the gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from the rear, and the slide link member 3323 are biased in the direction in which the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is closed. An upper spring 3327.

  The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 includes a first decorative body 3312 that is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction, and a right side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3312. The second decorative body 3313 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend in a straight line from the proximal end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the chord of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3311a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3311b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3313 with the shaft hole 3312a as a center, and a shaft hole 3312a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3312b, a link piece 3312c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long hole-like link slit 3312d extending through the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. In the link slit 3312d, a transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3313 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3312 side around the shaft hole 3313a and a shaft hole 3313a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decorative body 3312 is rotated, the second decorative body 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3312 due to the engagement of the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. Accordingly, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is movable such that the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are opened and closed with the base end side as the center.

  The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, and the first LED 3316 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3311a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3311b. The second LED 3317 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3317 is a single color LED.

  The back third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotation link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third upper drive motor 3320 on the left side of the back third upper drive motor 3320. The rotary link member 3322 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the drive gear 3321 and a crank pin 3322b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape forward from the eccentric position. A crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of a slide link member 3323 described later.

  The slide link member 3323 has a base end side located in the vicinity of the back third upper drive motor 3320 and a tip end side of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction center (the portion where the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is rotatably supported). ) Extends to the vicinity in the left-right direction and is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 extends vertically on the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3323a into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3323b slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the decorative body 3312, and a detection piece 3323c detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is positioned to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322, the lower end is positioned below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322, and heads toward the front end side. So that it bends. Further, the slide link member 3323 has a flange portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is always urged to the right by an upper spring 3327 hooked on the flange portion 3323d.

  In the normal state, the upper unit 3310 is such that the slide link member 3323 is positioned at the moving end to the right, and the top ends of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are farthest from each other. The decorative body 3311 is in the most open standby position. In the state where the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are respectively positioned near the upper edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is located at a bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a in the slide link member 3323. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3323 c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

  In this normal state, the respective leading end sides of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 are away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. A rotational moment is applied to the respective tip sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3323 to move to the left via the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. The force which moves to the direction is acting. Due to the force to move the slide link member 3323 to the left, the force to move the crank pin 3322b to the left acts via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323.

  In a normal state, since the crank pin 3322b is located below the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322), the crank pin 3322b is rotated clockwise so that the crank pin 3322b moves downward and to the left. Try to revolve in the direction, but because the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b can no longer revolve in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. There is no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 side acts, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not close (move to the appearance position side), and the standby position remains open. It is locked in the state, and the load from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotation link member 3322 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third upper drive motor 3320 via the drive gear 3321, the crank pin 3322b of the rotation link member 3322 rises in the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the urging force of the upper spring 3327. When the slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the first decorative body 3312 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3312a so that the tip side thereof moves downward via the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the tip. The second decorative body 3313 rotates in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3313a by the second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3312 and the tip of the second decorative body 3313 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed).

  Further, since the slide link member 3323 slides leftward, the detection piece 3323c also moves leftward together, so that the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3322b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323a and then slides downward, and the crank pin 3322b When revolving 180 degrees or more from the state and positioned near the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the driving of the back third upper drive motor 3320 stops. In this state, the top positions of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, a force for moving the slide link member 3323 to the right is applied by the biasing force of the upper spring 3327, so that the crank pin 3322 b is applied to the crank pin 3322 b via the transmission slit 3323 a of the slide link member 3323. There is a force to move it to the right. In this appearance position, the crank pin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322), so that the crank pin 3322b moves counterclockwise so as to move downward and to the right. However, since the crank pin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. Never do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not open (move to the standby position side) even if a force from the upper spring 3327 or the like is applied, and the state of the appearance position remains closed. And the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are positions rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313) is within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is set as above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  Thus, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is driven by a constant current drive system to rotate the drive gear 3321 with high torque, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is set to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The lower unit 3330 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 which is attached to be openable and closable near the center in the left-right direction at the lower part of the unit base 3301 and to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331. A lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, a back third lower drive motor 3340 which is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and a back third lower drive. A spur gear-like drive gear 3341 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3340, a rotation link member 3342 that is rotated by rotation of the drive gear 3341 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3342 Slides left and right to open and close the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 That the slide link member 3343, and a.

  The lower unit 3330 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the opening / closing position of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 and a part of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the front side. The front cover 3345, the gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and the slide link member 3343 are biased in the direction in which the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is closed. A lower spring 3347.

  The lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 includes a first decoration body 3332 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and a left side of the base end side of the first decoration body 3332. The second decorative body 3333 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inside of the belly of the string from the distal end. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chord is further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in the direction of about 1/2 semi-arc with the antinode of the string directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3331a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3331b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3333 with the shaft hole 3332a as the center, and a shaft hole 3332a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3332b, a link piece 3332c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long-hole-like link slit 3332d extending through the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. In the link slit 3332d, a transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3333 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3332 around the shaft hole 3333a and a shaft hole 3333a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3332 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is movable such that the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 open and close on the proximal end side.

  The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and the first LED 3336 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3331a and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3331b. The second LED 3337 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full color LED and the second LED 3337 is a single color LED.

  The back third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotation link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the right side of the back third lower drive motor 3340 at the same height as the rotation shaft of the back third lower drive motor 3340. The rotation link member 3342 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crank pin 3342b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. A crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of a slide link member 3343 described later.

  The slide link member 3343 has a proximal end located in the vicinity of the back third lower drive motor 3340 and a distal end supported in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is rotatably supported). ) Extends to the vicinity in the left-right direction and is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 extends vertically on the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3343a into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3343b slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332 and a detection piece 3343c detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342, the upper end is located above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342, and heads toward the distal end side. So that it bends. Further, the slide link member 3343 has a flange portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is always urged to the left by a lower spring 3347 hooked on the flange portion 3343d.

  In the normal state, the lower unit 3330 is such that the slide link member 3343 is positioned at the leftward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are farthest apart from each other. The decorative body 3331 is in the most open standby position. In a state where the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are respectively located near the lower edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is located at a bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a in the slide link member 3343. Furthermore, in a normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. A rotational moment is applied to the respective tip sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment moves the slide link member 3343 to the right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. The force which moves to the direction is acting. A force for moving the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343.

  In a normal state, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated clockwise so that the crank pin 3342b moves upward and rightward. Trying to revolve in the direction, but because the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve further in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b revolves. There is no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side is applied, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is not further opened and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third lower drive motor 3340 via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the urging force of the lower spring 3347. When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 moves counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3332a so that the tip side moves upward through the link slit 3332d by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip. The second decorative body 3333 is rotated in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3333a by the second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3332 and the tip of the second decorative body 3333 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed).

  Further, since the slide piece 3343c slides to the right and the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right together, the lower detection sensor 3344 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a and then slides upward, and the crank pin 3342b is normal. When revolving 180 degrees or more from the state and positioned near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the driving of the back third lower drive motor 3340 is stopped. In this state, the appearance positions of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 exerts a force that moves the slide link member 3343 to the left. There is a force acting to move it to the left. In this appearance position, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated counterclockwise so as to move upward and to the left. However, since the crank pin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b is revolved. Never do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, even if a force from the lower spring 3347 or the like is applied, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 does not open (move to the standby position side), and the state of the appearance position remains closed. And the load from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 (the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is set as above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  Thus, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third lower drive motor 3340.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is driven by a constant current drive system so that the drive gear 3341 is rotated with high torque, and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is moved to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The left unit 3350 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided on the left side of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the vertical direction, and on the rear side of the left side ring ornament 3351. A left side ring decorative board 3355 that is attached, a back third left drive motor 3360 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and back third A spur gear-like drive gear 3361 attached to the rotation shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotation link member 3362 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotation link member 3362 The left side ring decoration body 3351 is opened and closed by sliding up and down by rotating That the slide link member 3363, and a.

  The left unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the left detection sensor 3364 for detecting the opening / closing position of the left side ring decoration body 3351 and a part of the left side ring decoration body 3351 from the front side. And a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from the rear.

  The left lateral ring decorative body 3351 includes a first decorative body 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction, and an upper side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3352. The second decorative body 3353 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are formed symmetrically with respect to the horizontal line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and are substantially semicircular so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the string belly from the distal end. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3351a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3351b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3353 with the shaft hole 3352a as the center, and a shaft hole 3352a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3352b, a link piece 3352c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long hole-like link slit 3352d extending through the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. And have. In the link slit 3352d, a transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3353 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3352 with the shaft hole 3353a as a center, and a shaft hole 3353a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3352 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. Accordingly, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is movable such that the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are opened and closed with the base end side as the center.

  The left lateral ring decorative board 3355 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the first LED 3356 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3351a, and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3351b. The second LED 3357 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3357 is a single color LED.

  The back third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third left drive motor 3360 below the back third left drive motor 3360. The rotary link member 3362 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position. A crank pin 3362b of the rotation link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of a slide link member 3363 described later.

  The slide link member 3363 has a base end side located near the back third left drive motor 3360 and a tip end side of the unit base 3301 that is supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction (the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 is rotatably supported). ) Up and down in the vertical direction and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided on the left side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 extends to the left and right at the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3363a into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3363b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decorative body 3352, and a detection piece 3363c detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the proximal end side.

  The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362, the right end thereof is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362, and heads toward the front end side. So that it bends.

  In the normal state, the left unit 3350 is such that the slide link member 3363 is positioned at the upward moving end, and the distal ends of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are farthest away from each other and the left lateral ring. The decoration body 3351 is in the most open standby position. In the state where the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively located near the left edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 approach the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is more than the rotation center. Located on the right. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the rotational moments to rotate in the clockwise direction respectively act, but the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second Since the second gear portion 3353b of the two decorative body 3353 is meshed with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the two decorative bodies 3353 is canceled and maintained in the standby position. Thereby, from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left side ring decoration A load is hardly applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 moves left in the transmission slit 3363a. Revolving so as to slide in the direction, the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the first decorative body 3352 moves counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3352a so that the tip side moves upward via the link slit 3352d by the transmission pin 3363b at the tip. The second decorative body 3353 rotates in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3352 and the tip of the second decorative body 3353 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed).

  Further, since the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward together, so the left detection sensor 3364 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3362b slides to the left in the transmission slit 3363a and then to the right, and the crank pin 3362b When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is positioned near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (to the right of the center of revolution), the driving of the back third left drive motor 3360 stops. In this state, the front end of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are in an appearance position where the left side ring decorative body 3351 is closed so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In the state of the appearance position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 are in a state of extending to the right from the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments to rotate in the clockwise direction act on the second decorative body 3353 and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3353b meshes with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the second gear portions 3353b is canceled and maintained in the state of the appearance position. Thereby, from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left side ring decoration A load is hardly applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 (the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353) is within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is set as above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  As described above, in the left unit 3350, the back third upper drive motor 3320 can open and close the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 between the opened standby position state and the closed appearance position state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third left drive motor 3360 is driven by a constant current drive system so that the drive gear 3361 is rotated with high torque, and the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is set to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The right unit 3370 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided on the right side of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the vertical direction, and on the rear side of the right side ring ornament 3371. A right side ring decorative board 3375 that is attached, a back third right drive motor 3380 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and back third A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3381 attached to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3382 Rotate the top and bottom to open and close the right side ring decoration 3371 That the slide link member 3383, and a.

  The right unit 3370 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a right detection sensor 3384 for detecting the opening / closing position of the right side ring decoration body 3371 and a part of the right side ring decoration body 3371 from the front side. A front cover 3385 and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from the rear.

  The right lateral ring decorative body 3371 includes a first decorative body 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction, and an upper side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3372. The second decorative body 3373 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed symmetrically with respect to the horizontal line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the chord of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3371a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3371b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3373 with the shaft hole 3372a as a center, and a shaft hole 3372a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3372b, a link piece 3372c projecting from the proximal end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long-hole-like link slit 3372d extending through the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. And have. In the link slit 3372d, a transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3373 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3372 with the shaft hole 3373a as a center, and a shaft hole 3373a supported rotatably on the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3373b meshing with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3372 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. Accordingly, the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is movable such that the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are opened and closed with the base end side as the center.

  The right lateral ring decorative board 3375 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the first LED 3376 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3371a, and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3371b. The second LED 3377 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3377 is a single color LED.

  The back third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third right drive motor 3380 above the back third right drive motor 3380. The rotation link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crank pin 3382b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position. A crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of a slide link member 3383 described later.

  The slide link member 3383 has a base end located in the vicinity of the back third right drive motor 3380 and a tip end on the center of the unit base 3301 in the up-down direction (a portion where the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 is rotatably supported). ) Up and down in the vertical direction and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided on the right side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 extends to the left and right at the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3383a into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3383b slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the decorative body 3372, and a detection piece 3383c detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382, the left end is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382, and the front end side is Bent to the opposite side.

  In the normal state, the right unit 3370 has the slide link member 3383 located at the upward movement end, and the distal ends of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are farthest from each other and the right lateral ring. The decoration body 3371 is in the most open standby position. In a state where the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each positioned near the right edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3383 c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are close to the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is more than the rotation center. Located on the left. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the rotational moments that try to rotate in the counterclockwise direction respectively act, but the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and Since the 2nd gear part 3373b of the 2nd decoration body 3373 meshes | engages, the rotational moment concerning each is canceled and it maintains in the state of a standby position. Thereby, from the side of the right side ring decoration body 3371, a force to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction hardly acts via the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

  When the rotary link member 3382 is rotated clockwise by the back third right drive motor 3380 via the drive gear 3381 in this normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is moved rightward in the transmission slit 3383a. The slide link member 3383 slides downward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the first decorative body 3372 moves in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3372a so that the tip end side moves upward via the link slit 3372d by the transmission pin 3383b at the tip. While rotating, the second gear 3373b meshing with the first gear 3372b causes the second decorative body 3373 to rotate counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3373a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3372 and the tip of the second decorative body 3373 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed).

  Further, since the slide piece 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward, so that the right detection sensor 3384 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3382b of the rotation link member 3382 revolves in the clockwise direction, so that the crank pin 3382b slides to the left after sliding in the transmission slit 3383a, and the crank pin 3382b is normally When revolving 180 degrees or more from this state and being positioned near the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (leftward of the revolution center), the driving of the back third right drive motor 3380 is stopped. In this state, the front positions of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are close to each other so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In the state of the appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are in a state of extending leftward from the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments to rotate counterclockwise act on the second decorative body 3373 and the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3373b meshes with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the second gear portions 3373b is canceled and maintained in the appearance position state. Thereby, from the right side ring decoration body 3371 side, almost no force is exerted to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are not rotated until their respective tips are in contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the right side ring decoration body 3371 (the first decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third right drive motor 3380 is set as above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  In this way, in the right unit 3370, the back third right drive motor 3380 can open and close the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 between the opened standby position state and the closed appearance position state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third right drive motor 3380 is driven by a constant current drive system, so that the drive gear 3381 is rotated with high torque, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  In the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 of the back third rendering unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are also provided behind the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331.

  In this embodiment, a two-phase stepping motor is used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. .

  In this embodiment, 200 pps (the width of one pulse is 5 ms) with the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 attached. Furthermore, even if it is excited with a pulse of 200 pps without a slow-up process from the stop state, it can be started automatically.

  Further, since the movement from the standby position to the appearance position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is completed in 130 steps, [130step × 5 ms. = 650 ms], and it is possible to appear and retreat (appear / retreat) at 650 ms.

  Next, a movable effect using the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 in the back third rendering unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, each of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is in a standby position. ing. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are in the standby position, the back side of the back second effect unit 3200 arranged in the front side. It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decorative body 3229 and is invisible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, when the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, The front end of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, and a decoration in which three rings are arranged vertically (up and down). It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 57).

  Further, when the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in a normal state, the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. The front end of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are arranged side by side (left and right). Can be shown to the player (see FIG. 58).

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. When the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are respectively moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3331 is located at the center in the frame of the unit base 3301 in a front view. The front end of the ring decorative body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are close to each other, and the front end of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the front end of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are close to each other. It is possible to show the player a decoration in which rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross (see FIG. 59).

  In the back third rendering unit 3300, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in a normal state, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are driven. Is moved from the standby position to the midway position from the appearance position to the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 (first The front end portions of the decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) are located inside the through-hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in a front view, and are partly on the player side (See FIG. 60). In this state, the two leading ends of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229, and two right side ring decoration bodies 3371 Since two tips appear in the upper and lower corners on the right side among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be changed. it can.

  As described above, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are appropriately combined. By moving to the appearance position, ring decorations arranged vertically, horizontally, or in a cross can appear, and various movable effects can be shown to the player.

  Also, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355, the right horizontal ring. The first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decoration substrate 3375 are appropriately illuminated to emit light on the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371. Therefore, various light emission effects can be shown to the player.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 55 to FIG. FIG. 55 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating in the clockwise direction from the normal state. FIG. 56 is an enlarged front view showing the lower part of the game board in a state where the special rotating ornament in the second back effect unit is moved to a specific position. FIG. 57 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring ornament and the lower vertical ring ornament in the back third stage production unit in a state where they are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 58 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 59 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration body, the lower vertical ring decoration body, the left horizontal ring decoration body, and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit in the state of being moved to the appearance position. is there. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit moved to the middle of the appearance position.

  FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board showing an example of the effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back third effect unit. FIG. 62 is a front view of the game board showing an example of the shadow effect executed during the light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 63 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown with the game board facing the game window of the door frame.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, an attacker unit 2400, a center accessory 2500, and the like. Since it is formed in a transparent state, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 27 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 are passed through them. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, the back first right decorative body 3163, the back first lower decorative body 3164, and the plurality of rotations in the back second directive unit 3200 Decoration body 3210 (special rotation decoration body 3211 and normal rotation decoration body 3212), back second outside decoration body 3228, back second inside Kazaritai 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognize the.

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 27 and the like, four special rotating decoration bodies 3211 out of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 in the back second stage production unit 3200 have both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the revolution track. , Located at both ends in the left-right direction. That is, one special rotating decorative body 3211 is located at a specific position (6 o'clock part of the timepiece) that is the lowest on the revolution track. The special rotating decorative body 3211 located at this specific position is positioned at the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100, and the outside is the back first lower decorative body 3164. It is in a state decorated by. Moreover, the special rotation decoration body 3211 (rotation decoration body 3210) of a specific position is located behind the 1st starting opening 2002, and has decorated the back of the 1st starting opening 2002 (refer FIG. 56).

  In the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are respectively in the standby position state. It is located outside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in the front view, so that the front is a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, a drive ring 3221, and the back second outer side. It is covered with a decorative body 3228, a back second inner decorative body 3229, etc., and is invisible from the player side.

  In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side through the inside of the back second inner decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 is displayed on the player side (front). Can be visually recognized in a good state.

  The game board 5 has the back first of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300 perform a predetermined movable effect.

  First, an effect using the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. As an effect using the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by driving the back second drive motor 3222. A movable effect of revolving in the clockwise direction can be performed while the plurality (12) of the rotating decoration bodies 3210 rotate in the clockwise direction. Thereby, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve around the effect image that can be seen through the inside of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 while rotating, so that the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate around the game area. It is possible to make 5a lively and entertain the player.

  As described above, for example, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative board 3170 in the back first stage production unit 3100 is caused to emit light while the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, the rear side is the rotation decoration body. Since the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 around which 3210 circulates, the player's interest can be directed to the back first lower decorative body 3164. Further, since the back first lower decorative body 3164 is conspicuous, a desired rotational decorative body 3210 (special rotational decorative body 3211) is placed in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164 with respect to the player. Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.

  At this time, only the first rotation decoration body LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position in the rotation decoration body LED group 3250 may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decorative body 3210 passing through the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 in the ring can be viewed well, and the other rotating decorative body 3210 is difficult to view. It is possible to show the player an effect like a roulette or slot with the inside of the ring as a window, and to enhance the throbbing feeling as to whether or not the desired rotating ornament 3210 stops at a specific position. Can do.

  Then, when the desired rotating decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211) stops in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164, as shown in FIG. Since the first starting port 2002 is provided, if the player receives the game ball B at the first starting port 2002, the player may think that there is a very high possibility that a “hit” will be drawn. It is possible to urge the player to drive the game ball B aiming at the first start port 2002 and to entertain the game ball B.

  Further, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while being rotated by the driving of the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of LEDs 3241 on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are appropriately set in accordance with the movement position of each rotating decorative body 3210. You may make it light-emit. For example, when one rotating decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are displayed. While turning on, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and the first LED group 3251 and the first LED group 3251 are turned on. The second LED group 3252 is turned off and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Further, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off, the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is turned off, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Leave it alone.

  Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 22 degrees from the first position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group are turned on. While 3254 is kept off, the intermediate LED group 3255 is kept on. Then, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the first position (the next rotating decorative body 3210 is positioned at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to rotate the rotating decorative body LED. The group 3250 is turned on and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Accordingly, the LED 3241 in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is positioned forward is turned on, and the LED 3241 in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is not positioned forward is turned off. As if the LED is provided in itself, the rotation decoration body 3210 can be shown to the player as if revolving while emitting light, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. .

  Further, in the back second rendering unit 3200, in a normal state, all the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high luminance, and then a plurality of rotational decorations are driven by the back second drive motor 3222. The body 3210 rotates and revolves, the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped in a state different from the normal state, and the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are turned off or dimmed. May be. Thereby, since all the rotary decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high luminance, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210. By changing the position of 3210, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, in the back second rendering unit 3200, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 can appropriately emit light, so that the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is changed from the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a. , Second rotation decoration body LED group 3250b, third rotation decoration body LED group 3250c, fourth rotation decoration body LED group 3250d, fifth rotation decoration body LED group 3250e, sixth rotation decoration body LED group 3250f, seventh rotation decoration Body LED group 3250g, eighth rotation decoration body LED group 3250h, ninth rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, tenth rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, eleventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, and twelve rotation decoration body LED group By emitting light (lighting) in order, such as 3250l, the player can have a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in a predetermined direction. So it can be, it is possible to entertain the player. When the rotation of the light is stopped, the player's expectation can be enhanced depending on at which position the rotation of the light stops, and the player can be entertained.

  Note that when the rotation of light is stopped, the rotation speed of the light is gradually decreased, and the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth in the rotating decorative body LED group 3250. The LED group 3254 and then the intermediate LED group 3255 may be lit in order so that the light moves in small increments in the rotation direction and stops slowly. Thereby, since the position where light stops becomes fine, it can be made difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of light stops, and the player can be excited and entertained.

  In addition, as described above, since the light can be rotated (turned around), by turning on and off in order in the circumferential direction, the lighting effect that measures time like a clock and the remaining time can be reduced. The suggested light-emitting effect can also be performed, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251,. The light may be emitted in any order. Thereby, while it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in one rotation decoration body LED group 3250, the rotation decoration body 3210 is not revolving with respect to the player. An illusion of rotating (spinning) can be provided, and the player can be entertained.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 emit light, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown an emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Next, effects using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. First, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are moved. Move from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front end of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are brought close to each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 when viewed from the front. You can show the player the decorations that are lined up and down.

  Further, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 58, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state to decorate the left side ring. The body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front end of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 come close to each other at the center inside the back second inner periphery decoration body 3230 in front view, and the three rings are lateral ( You can show the player the decorations arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 of the back third stage production unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position, and the decoration is formed in a state where three rings are arranged side by side. In the display device 1600, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed in the respective parts of the three rings. For suggestion, it is possible to perform a variable display of three symbol sequences. Thereby, in the state where the left side ring ornament 3351 and the right side ring ornament 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the top and bottom of the three symbol rows are compared with the case where the three symbol rows are variably displayed. Since the game is physically decorated by the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 at the appearance position, the symbol sequence that is variably displayed to the player is a game such as “big hit” It is possible to make it seem that there is a high possibility that the player will be stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 59, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, And the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively. Move. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 are brought close to each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral ornament 3230 and the left horizontal ring ornament 3351 The front end and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other, and the decoration in which five rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross can be shown to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59, when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are all moved from the standby position to the appearance position, Since a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross is formed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player, such as “big hit”, may occur. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a “big hit” game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. May be. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 are moved to the appearance position in this order, or the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring The decoration body 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 may be moved to the appearance position in this order. As a result, since the five rings are arranged in a cross shape through multiple stages, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not to move to the next stage at each stage. Can entertain.

  By the way, in the back third rendering unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are increased by a constant current drive method. Since it is driven by torque, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are placed in an extremely short time (here, 650 ms). ) From the standby position to the appearance position, or from the appearance position to the standby position. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 appear and disappear in an instant, giving a strong impact to the player. Can entertain the player.

  Furthermore, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is driven. And the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved to a position on the way from the standby position to the appearance position. Thereby, the tip part of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the tip part of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 (first decoration body 3372 and second decoration body 3373) However, it is located inside the back 2nd inner periphery decoration body 3230 in front view, and can be visually recognized partially from the player side.

  More specifically, in the state of FIG. 60, the two leading ends of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, The two front ends of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 appear at the upper and lower corners on the right side among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. Thereby, since the inner shape of the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 on which the display screen of the effect display device 1600 faces is changed, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decorative body are provided to the player. The movement of 3371 can be easily noticed, and the player can feel that something will happen and can increase the expectation of the game.

  When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, only the tip portion can be visually recognized. Thus, it may be moved halfway and moved to the appearance position as the next stage. Thus, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the player has completely moved to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small increments with respect to the standby position, and the player changes the shape inside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in small increments. Can be made easier to notice.

  In the back third rendering unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the first LED of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355. The second LED 3357, the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration board 3375 are appropriately illuminated, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that have moved to the appearance position side can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes. , Can entertain the player.

  By the way, in this embodiment, in the back third stage production unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Sometimes, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 includes the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the part directly behind the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. A decorative image 3390 similar to that shown in FIG. 6 is displayed (see FIG. 61).

  In the present embodiment, for some reason, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided. When it becomes impossible to move to the appearance position, even if an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is executed. These are kept at the standby position and are not moved to the appearance position side, and the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 61). Thereby, even if a problem occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, the decoration image 3390 can be seen, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the problem. By recognizing, it is possible to prevent the player from having to interrupt the game and feel uncomfortable, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back unit 3000, it is also possible to perform an effect by appropriately combining the effect by the back second effect unit 3200 and the effect by the back third effect unit 3300. As a result, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. In addition, since it is possible to show the player more stages of production, the player can be thrilled and thrilled at each stage, and the player's expectation can be raised and the decline in interest can be suppressed. it can.

  In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when an appropriate light emission effect is executed using the back first effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300, While turning off the LEDs located on the line, it is possible to perform a shadow effect in which the line is moved from one side of the predetermined direction to the other side in a short time (one second or less) so as to cross the game area 5a. (See FIG. 62). Thus, by turning off the LEDs on a specific line, a dark portion (shadow part 3050) appears on the line in the game area 5a, and the shadow part 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player “ha” and to concentrate on the game with a premonition that something will happen. Note that the shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and the diagonal direction.

  In addition, the above shadow effect is a movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3210, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, etc. It can also be executed when the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is switched. Thus, with the shadow effect as a break, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the next movable effect, effect image, etc., and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the gaming area 5a can be viewed from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101 a is arranged in a semi-tubular dish upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decoration. It is surrounded by a body 419 and a door frame top decorative body 453. Further, in the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312 a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 are provided. Back, dish upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left Since the decoration board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (game area 5a) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting the LEDs on the decoration board. The light can be moved along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  And as above-mentioned, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, since various light emission effects can be performed, for example, the 1st LED group 3251 and the 3rd LED group 3253 of the back 2nd effect unit 3200, the 2nd When the LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 and the LEDs on the decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in this order, the player can show a light-emitting effect that spreads from the center to the outside. Can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Or if it makes it light-emit in order of LED of each decoration board of door frame 3, 2nd LED group 3252 and 4th LED group 3254, 1st LED group 3251, and 3rd LED group 3253 of back 2nd production unit 3200, The player can show the player a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center, and the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area 5a.

  Further, in the back second effect unit 3200, as described above, on the door frame 3 side in the light emission effect in which light rotates (turns) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255. Alternatively, a light emission effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a may be executed. This makes it possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the entire pachinko machine 1 turns around the center of the game area 5a, giving a strong impact to the player, and making the player enjoy It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light-emitting effect as described above can be combined as appropriate, and also combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and to make the player hard to get tired. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 of the upper unit 3310 and the lower vertical ring decoration body of the lower unit 3330 of the back third rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000. 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 of the right unit 3370 are arranged at the center of the game area 5a (here, the back second inner circumference of the back second effect unit 3200). The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration are rotated outward from the inner periphery of the decorative body 3230 to be in the retracted position. The body 3371 is a rotating decorative body 3210, a back second outer decorative body 3228, a back second inner decorative body 3229 of the back second rendering unit 3200, And the second back inner decorative body 3230, and the second upper inner decorative body 3230, the second rear outer decorative body 3228, the second back inner decorative body 3229, and the second back inner decorative body 3230 are arranged vertically. The ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (front), and the upper vertical ring is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the effect display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a. The effect image displayed on the player can be viewed well from the player side (front), and the player can entertain the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are within the range of 0.5 second to 1.0 second (this embodiment In the form, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third drive motor 3320 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds). The three left drive motors 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive system, and an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring. When the decorative body 3371 is rotated, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated with high torque. A large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that have been stopped due to high torque. Since the vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be rotated to an appearance position at an extremely high speed, the player does not recognize them. In addition, the player can show an effect that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 suddenly appear in the center of the game area 5a. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left The ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 suddenly appear instantly can make the player strongly think that there is something good, and raise the expectation for the game. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 in a constant current drive system. When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with high torque, they are quickly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position. Part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371. The upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal The movement of the upper decorative ring 3371 can be immediately recognized, and the movement of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 greatly increases the player. Can surprise you.

  Further, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the portion between the proximal end side and the distal end side of the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. Since it is located on the rear side of a straight line connecting the base end side and the tip end side when rotating, a shape extending in a non-linear manner between the base end side and the tip end side (here, an arc) When the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position, In addition, the front end side of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be visually recognized. At this time, the portion (tip side) visible from the front in the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 is the base end. Since the portion between the side and the tip side is a non-linear shape, the direction projecting inward from the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 is the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decorative The direction is different from the direction of the base end side of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. Accordingly, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped turning halfway to the appearance position side, and only the tip side is visually recognized. When an effect that can be performed is executed (see FIG. 60), the player is different from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. Since an illusion can be made as if another decorative body has appeared, it is possible to show the player more various effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 are arranged with the base side at the center of the game area 5a (the back second inner peripheral ornament. 3230) is supported in a rotatable manner on the outer side, and has an elongated frame shape that extends to the center of the game area 5a at the appearance position, so that the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the lower vertical ring When the decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right Since the front end side of the horizontal ring ornament 3371 is located at the center of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, and the left horizontal ring ornament 335 appearing positions. , And the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest is strongly expressed in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. It can be attracted.

  Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 by a constant current drive system. The time when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position by high torque is set to 0. Since it is within the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, it is not necessary to use a large drive motor with a torque higher than necessary, and the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left An increase in space required for the drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 can be suppressed, and the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the lower vertical ring device are relatively The space for arranging the body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 and other members can be easily secured, and the secured vertical space allows the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, The ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the like can be made larger, and a large upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and a left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 can be obtained. , And the right side ring ornament 3371 or the like, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining for the player. Moreover, since it is not necessary to use a large drive motor with a higher torque than necessary or to use a complicated control circuit for outputting a high torque, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. .

  In addition, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and an upper vertical ring ornament 3311, a lower vertical ring ornament 3331, a left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and a right horizontal ring. When the decoration body 3371 is rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is displayed to the player. Since it is difficult to see the movement of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371, the display screen is brightened thereafter, so that the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, The lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 suddenly appear or disappear from the center. The effect can be shown to the player and the player can be surprised, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 play a game. The player can be entertained, and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive system, the upper vertical ring decoration Since the body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with high torque, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive motor 3360, back third right drive motor 3380, upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 and the like. Although there is a risk that problems are likely to occur due to early fatigue, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decorative body 335 , And the execution of the effect of moving the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position causes the decorative image 3390 to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even if the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 cannot be moved (rotated) to the appearance position, the decorative image 3390 can be used for the player. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be illuminated as if they moved to the appearance position. Same effects as the ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. It is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to show the exit to the player.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512) causes the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 to be displayed. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the right unit 3370 are not visible from the player side. Therefore, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well, and the player can entertain the effect image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 performs an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position, The number of upper vertical ring decoration bodies 3311, lower vertical ring decoration bodies 3331, left horizontal ring decoration bodies 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration bodies 3371 appear on the effect display device 1600 at the timing of moving from the retracted position to the appearance position. A decorative image 3390 is displayed at a position behind the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 at the position, and the frame-shaped upper vertical ring decorative body 3331 is displayed. Ring ornament body 3311, lower longitudinal ring ornament body 3331, left lateral ring ornament body 3351, and right lateral ring ornament body 3371 Since a specific effect image (for example, a plurality of symbol strings for suggesting a lottery special lottery result) is displayed in the divided area, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal The specific effect image is clearly demarcated by the ring decorative body 3351 and the right side ring decorative body 3371, the specific effect image can be made conspicuous, and the effect by the specific effect image can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. .

  Then, for some reason, any one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control board 1510 causes all the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311, the lower vertical ring ornaments 3331, and the left horizontal ring to be detected. Since only the movement control of the decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is paused, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical The ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 do not move from the retracted position, and the effect display device 1600 displays the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 at the appearance position. , A decorative image 3390 is displayed at the rear part of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring of the appearance position are displayed. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a part defined by the decorative body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 (decorative image 3390), the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are displayed for the player. , The left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 can be given an illusion as if they moved to the appearance position. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring by the decorative image 3390 similar to the vertical decorative ring 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. The player can show the same effects as the effects by the decorative body 3351 and the right side ring decorative body 3371. Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 fail to move to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3331 A decorative image 3390 similar to the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring An effect equivalent to the effect by the decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player by the decorative image 3390, and the specific effect image can be made conspicuous by the decorative image 3390. It is possible to make the player enjoy the effect by the specific effect image and suppress the decrease in the interest.

  In addition, when any one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, The movement control of all the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311, the lower vertical ring ornaments 3331, the left horizontal ring ornaments 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornaments 3371 is suspended, and the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311 and the lower vertical ring ornaments. 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and When performing the effect of moving the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position at the same time, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 moved to the appearance position, An effect in which any one of the ring decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 and the decorative image 3390 that can be visually recognized by not moving to the appearance position due to a malfunction is performed. Can be avoided, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, when an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, a decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decorative image is displayed regardless of whether or not the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are not moved to the appearance position. Since 3390 is displayed, an image for when a problem occurs in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is separately provided. This is unnecessary, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decoration image 3390 can be reduced.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, an upper detection sensor 3324, a lower detection sensor 3344, a left detection sensor 3364, and a right detection sensor 3384, When the malfunction that the right lateral ring ornament 3371 does not move is detected, the movement control of the upper longitudinal ring ornament 3311, the lower longitudinal ring ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 is suspended. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped at a halfway position due to a malfunction. To prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since only the movement control is suspended and the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the player can be entertained by the decoration image 3390, and the decrease in the player's interest is suppressed. be able to.

  Further, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is stopped by detecting a failure, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3371 is stopped. Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 No overload acts on the motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, It is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged, and it is possible to avoid the problem from expanding.

  Further, since the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are invisible in the state of the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration body for some reason. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are decorated on the effect display device 1600 as described above even if there is a problem that the movement cannot be made to the appearance position. Since the image 3390 is displayed, the effect of the decoration image 3390 can be enjoyed, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration at the retracted position can be enjoyed. Since the body 3371 is not visible, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 can be made difficult to notice that the player does not move, preventing the player from feeling uneasy and suppressing a decrease in interest Can be made.

  Further, when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the retracted position (normal state), the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 Since the vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is displayed to the player in the retracted position. Since the presence of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 can be made difficult to notice, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal When the ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical phosphorus that were not visible are displayed. The appearance of the decoration body 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and provide something for the player. It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  Further, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body are obtained by the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384. 3371 does not move to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 at the retreat position are Since the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are used for detection, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring. The decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are controlled to move to the appearance position. The upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal sensor. If the ring decorative body 3371 is still detected, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are not moved, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3371 is not moved. The ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 can be detected not to move to the appearance position, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be realized. Can be

  A decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 includes an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and a lower vertical ring decorative body. The size may be larger or smaller than the size of 3331, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351, and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. When the decorative image 3390 is larger than the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, the decorative image displayed on the effect display device 1600 3390 has an advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decoration image 3390 is smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, When an effect of moving the ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, left There is an advantage that the decorative image 3390 is not recognized by the player unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is stopped.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second stage production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the through-hole 3329a penetrating in the front-rear direction. In front of the back second inner decorative body 3229, in the normal state, four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 that are specially decorated and the remaining 6 that are decorated differently from the special rotating decorative body 3211 Twelve rotating decorative bodies 3210 that are flat and translucent made up of ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212 are centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through-hole 3229a. The display screens of the effect display device 1600 that are arranged on the revolution circle and are provided rearward from the through hole 3229a are facing. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotary decorative body 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. The rotating decorative body 3210 and the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a together with the shaft portion 3210a are on the circumference having a radius from the rotation center of the drive ring 3221 to the shaft hole 3221a (revolving circle) Move (revolve). At this time, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided closer to the revolution center than the revolution circle in the unit base 3220. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotating body gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolving direction of the rotating body gear 3225, and the rotating body gear 3225 is rotated by the shaft portion 3210a and the rotating decorative body 3210. Together with the shaft portion 3210a, it rotates (rotates) around the shaft extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 by the back second drive motor 3222, a plurality (12 pieces) of the rotary decoration body 3210 revolves in the same direction while rotating, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. It can attract the player's interest strongly and can make the player think that there is something good, and raises the expectation of the game and suppresses the decline in interest Can be made.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction have a flat plate shape, the surface of the rotating decorative body 3210 is directed forward, and the entire rotating decorative body 3210 is a player. Since it is easy to see from the side, when these rotating decoration bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, it is possible to show the player how the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 rotate with each other. It can be shown to the player, and the player can have a strong impact and can be greatly enjoyed.

  Further, behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body 3210 (one stop position (one A plurality of (12) rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 divided behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 that have stopped revolving at a specific position (positions where the rotation decoration body 3210 stops revolving); Since the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 configured by the intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 are provided, the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped positions. When the LED 3241 of the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 is caused to emit light in the state, the rotational decoration body 3210 can be illuminated, and the plurality of rotational decoration bodies 3210 are stopped. In state between each other, when the emit LED3241 intermediate LED group 3255 can emit light decoration rotational decorative body 3210. Therefore, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, if the LED 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the LED 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are appropriately caused to emit light according to the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, light is emitted. Since the LED 3241 is moved together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 having the translucency of the light from the LED 3241 are rotated and decorated. By irradiating forward (player side) through the body 3210, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be illuminated and decorated such that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decoration body 3210. By showing the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 rotates and revolves, the player is greatly enjoyed. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  At this time, the plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 are arranged in the revolving direction of the rotational decoration body 3210 with the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group. Since the LED 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 can be finely lit according to the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, only the LED 3241 located behind the rotational decorative body 3210 is divided. If the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating, the player can have a strong illusion and the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 that is decorated with light emission can be made. It can be more entertaining, and it can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. .

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 including the rotation decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotation decoration body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. When all the LEDs 3241 except for the LED 3241 included in the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the prize opening LED group 3259 are caused to emit light, an annular light emitting effect is shown to the player. be able to. In addition, since the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolving direction (circumferential direction) of the rotational decoration body 3210, the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are circumferentially connected. When the light is emitted alternately in the direction, the player can be shown a light emitting decoration in which light rotates on the circumference. Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By emitting light sequentially from the outside to the outside, the player can show a light-emitting effect in which the light circle spreads outward, or by causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light sequentially from the outside of the ring to the inside. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges inward. As described above, since various light-emitting effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when performing a light-emitting effect in which light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotation decoration body 3210, each rotation decoration body LED group 3250 has the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 in the rotation direction of the rotation decoration body 3210. Since the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are divided, the movement of light in the revolving direction can be made finer. Can show. In addition, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made slower, and it is difficult to get tired of the player by various lighting effects. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, by appropriately combining the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect of revolving while rotating the rotating decorative body 3210, an effect that could not be seen in a conventional pachinko machine is played by the player. The player can have a strong impact on the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, can entertain the player, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into the plurality of rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, each of the rotation decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255 is controlled to emit light. As a result, the load on the control can be reduced as compared with the case where the plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled to emit light one by one. Can be avoided, and the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 and the like can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotational decoration body 3210, for example, only the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 is provided at regular time intervals. The speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction is different between the case where light is emitted sequentially in the circumferential direction and the case where the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately emitted in the circumferential direction at the same time interval. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the light emission effect, and to allow the player to enjoy the light emission effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, and to suppress the lowering of the player's interest it can.

  Further, since the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the back second outer decorative body 3228 is provided. Since the LED 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 is difficult to visually recognize from the front by the back second inner decorative body 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the illusion that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210, and it is possible to further increase the impact of the light emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating. The effect by the decoration body 3210 can be more enjoyed, and the lowering of interest in the player's game is suppressed. Door can be.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have special rotating decorative bodies 3211 provided with a special decoration (three-sided decoration), the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are caused to revolve while rotating. The special rotation decoration body 3211 can make the player throbbing depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped at a specific position, and the player can entertain the movable effect by the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that one rotational decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position, and one special rotational decoration body 3211 are located at the specific position. And a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotational rotational body 3212 of the plurality of rotational decorative bodies 3210 is located at a specific position, only the rotational position detection sensor 3231 is provided. When the special rotation decorative body 3211 is located at a specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detect the rotation, and the detection by the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation are detected. Depending on the combination of detection by the position detection sensor 3232, the normal rotation decoration body 3212 or the special rotation decoration body 3211 is placed at a specific position. Les it is possible to detect whether located. Therefore, when one of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 is caused to stop revolving at a specific position, the rotation detecting sensor 3231 and the special rotating position detecting sensor 3232 are used so that the normal rotating decorative body revolving while rotating. 3212 and the special rotating decorative body 3211 can be revolved and stopped at a specific position, so that it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotating decorative body 3211 stops revolving at the specific position. The player can be excited and entertained, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotation decoration body 3212 and the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at the specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at the specific position. 3221d is provided in the drive ring 3221, so that the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d do not rotate as compared with the case where the detection piece or the special detection piece is provided in the rotating decorative body 3210. The configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be revolved while rotating by one back second drive motor 3222, the rotation and revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 are driven by separate drive motors. In comparison, the structure of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be simplified, the driving mechanism can be reduced, and control of the movable effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be controlled. The load can be reduced. In addition, as described above, since the driving mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reduced, a space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be relatively widened. The rotary decoration body 3210 can be made larger to make it stand out from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210.

  Further, since the shaft portion 3210a protrudes rearward from the LED 3241, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end is behind the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also behind the LED 3241. The rotating body gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221 and the like do not block the light emitted forward from the LED 3241, and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 can be surely decorated with light emission.

  Further, a back second drive motor 3222 for rotating the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, and the inside of the fixed gear portion 3220 b (inside of the through hole 3229 a) can be widened, so that it faces the inside. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect image can be more easily exhibited.

  In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the fixed gear portion 3220b and the back second drive motor 3222 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the back side of the drive ring 3221 is positioned substantially at the same position as the front-rear direction. Since the two-drive motor 3222 can be provided, an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210 can be suppressed. Further, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are formed in a flat plate shape, and the thickness in the front-rear direction applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reduced. From these things, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the diameter of the rotating decorative body 3210 can be made larger by relatively widening the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. It is possible to make the player stand out from the player side, attract the player's interest strongly to the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210, and provide other members in front of and behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210. Thus, by using the other members provided to produce the effects, it is possible to show the player more various effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is a gate as a privilege granting section provided in the game area 5a. When the player passes the part 2003 or is accepted into the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 as a privilege granting unit, a predetermined lottery (for example, a normal lottery that is advantageous to the player) A lottery of a result or a special lottery result, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) are given, and the player is made to perform a game ball B driving operation aiming at a privilege granting part such as the gate part 2003 You can play games.

  In the game area 5a, an upstream space 2511 is provided above the right upper right and right peripheral wall 2510 above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and on the downstream side of the upstream space 2511. Since the game balls B are distributed through different routes depending on the driving strength and the distribution passage group 2520 provided on the upstream side of the gate portion 2003 is provided, the first distribution constituting the distribution passage group 2520 is provided. The probability that the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 on the downstream side differs for each of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, the game ball B is placed at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 where the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511 and has a high probability that the game ball B will pass through the gate portion 2003. The driving strength of the gaming ball B must be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the player enters the game ball B. It is possible to give changes, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to allow the player to enter the game ball B for the desired entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  In addition, a stop portion 1006 protrudes inward from the periphery of the game area 5a in the vicinity of the right end of the upstream space portion 2511, and an inlet of the first flow passage 2521 is provided in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (for example, a specific or higher driving strength at which the game ball B circulates (rolls) along the periphery of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the stop portion 1006 enters the entrance of the first flow passage 2521 in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 in the flow passage group 2520 with a high probability. Accordingly, when aiming at the first circulation passage 2521, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts against the stopper portion 1006, and when aiming at the other second circulation passage 2522, the strength does not abut against the stopper portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven in, the game ball B can be driven in sharply, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  And the chance that the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 provided with an entrance in the vicinity of the stop 1006 has a low probability of passing through the downstream gate portion 2003, and the privilege is given. The game ball 5 is discharged out of the game area 5a without causing the player to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Thus, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B, to make the player hard to get tired, and to aim at the entrance of the remaining second distribution passage 2522 to the player. The driving operation of the ball B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is driven, the distribution passage group 2520 (the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage) that distribute through different routes according to the driving strength of the game ball B. The circulation passage 2522) can be reliably realized, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522, It is necessary to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a with the driving strength to enter the space portion 2511 and with the driving strength to enter the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. Yes, it is possible to further increase the difficulty level of the game ball B driving operation, and to make the player enjoy the game ball B driving operation and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the entrances thereof are adjacent to each other. Therefore, the game ball B is caused by a slight difference in the driving strength of the game ball B. Because the entrance of the distribution passage through which the player enters is easy to be different, it is possible to increase the difficulty of the player to drive the game ball B, and to entertain the player to drive the game ball B, and to reduce the interest Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are aggregated to some extent. The inside of the frame of the accessory 2500 can be made relatively wide, and the player can enjoy the game within the game area 5a and the effect within the frame of the center accessory 2500, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. it can.

  In the above embodiment, the flow passage group 2520 is configured by two flow passages of the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by two distribution passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided onto the second start-port guidance shelf 2423 with a high probability by contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker right lower passage 2426 with high probability.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the back second stage production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 has been shown to revolve in the same direction as the direction in which the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be revolving in the opposite direction to the direction of rotation.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, regardless of the presence or absence of a defect that does not move to the appearance position. Although the display of the decoration image 3390 is shown when performing the effect using the display, the display is not limited to this, and an effect image without the decoration image 3390 is displayed in a state in which no defect has occurred. The decoration image 3390 may be displayed only when a defect occurs in them.

  In the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive system. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since these are stepping motors, they may be driven by the 2-2 phase excitation method, and high torque can be generated.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown as stepping motors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a DC motor having a large starting torque may be used.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is assumed to rotate the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. Although the drive motors such as the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a solenoid, a rotary solenoid, or the like. .

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, a door frame effect display device 152, and a door frame sub-control based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. A display unit 185, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the effect display device 1600. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633 a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633 b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 111.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids For displaying the number of game balls collected by a circuit, a setting indicator 1310g for displaying a set value and displaying an error, and an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a formed in the game board 5 A base monitor 1310h. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also includes a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a and forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to an inconsistent content. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on process described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, a reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. "Random number circuit"). The main random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 to 65535 as a minimum value is set in advance as a minimum value), and generates an initial value. The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a clock signal (main control) to the main control MPU 1310a with an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed on the basis of a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, and within a predetermined numerical range. Once all the values in are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value in the predetermined numerical range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs the various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning mouth sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning mouth 2001, a general winning mouth sensor 3001, a gate sensor 2506 that detects a gaming ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, and a big winning mouth 2005 A first prize opening sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball B received by the first prize receiving port 2007 after being detected by the big prize winning hole sensor 2403; A second receiving sensor 2405 for detecting a game ball B received by the second receiving port 2008 after being detected by the mouth sensor 2403; Collected by a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects unauthorized magnetism in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 3005 that detects unauthorized vibration in the game area 5a, and an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 A detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 for detecting the game ball B to be played is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit.

  A detection signal from a setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via a main control input circuit. A signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The RWM clear button 633z includes a RAM built in the payout control MPU which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310. A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in each predetermined area, a function as an error cancel switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, and a set value It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. For this reason, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 includes a signal (RAM clear signal) that informs RAM clear as a RAM clear switch, and a signal (RAM clear signal) that informs that an error has been cleared as an error clear switch ( Although there is an error release signal) and a signal (setting value selection switching signal) that conveys setting value selection switching as a setting switching button, the main control board 1310 has a RAM clear signal and setting that are important signals relating to itself. While the input of the value setting change signal is monitored, the input of the error cancellation signal that is the control target of the payout control board 633 not related to itself is not monitored.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are sent via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, a payout control input circuit and a payout control output described later). When the signals are input to the main control board 1310 without passing through the circuit, they are respectively input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, via the main control input circuit. Is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the general winning opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, the second receiving port sensor 2405, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the out opening sensor 3032. Each detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and then input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. ing.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. 2414, the respective drive signals are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, Retention indicator, 1st special symbol indicator, 1st special reserve number indicator, 2nd special symbol indicator, 2nd special reserve number indicator, round indicator, etc. Output directly without intervention. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) is reversed when the launch is not permitted. Set to It should be noted that the logic of the firing permission signal is set as an initial value (default), and after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after power recovery), a firing permission signal setting process in a main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. The hardware including the main control output circuit with the reset function is configured so as to be set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the big prize port sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 use contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 is played. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. In addition, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5, the game ball B is also detected by the out port sensor 3032. Occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the out-port sensor 3032. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 are mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switch. Note that a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life may be used regardless of whether or not the game balls B frequently enter the general winning opening 2001.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “main control side”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Capacitor ”)). With this main control side capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU 1310a as a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on. Then, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation unit having a plurality of functions are provided. The RWM clear button 633z includes a RAM built in a payout control MPU that is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (built in main control) provided in a main control MPU 1310a that is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310. A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM), a function as an error cancel switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, and setting It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching values.

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is a RAM clear determination period after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on) The period until the determination of step S14 in the process is started).

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is a setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed (when the main control MPU 1310a passes the RAM clear determination period and the main control side power is turned on later) In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the setting key cylinder 1311a of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set by the setting key inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. In a period until it is determined that the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return from the rotation position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Limited To have.

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error cancel switch is an effective period after the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period have elapsed. Even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is input to the payout control unit 633a (a payout control MPU described later) in the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period, it is invalidated. Has been.

  Note that the period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed, as described above. However, in the setting switching valid period, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process described later after the RAM clear determination period elapses. Since the setting key inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of 1311a performs the process of continuously monitoring the rotation position of the setting key cylinder, an interrupt for permitting the start of the main control side timer interruption process described later The permission setting (step S52 in the main-control-side power-on process) cannot be performed, and the injustice detection process of step S112 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process described later cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switch valid period is a period during which fraud detection is not possible.

  During this setting switching valid period, that is, the period during which fraud detection is not possible, the fraudster may make some unauthorized alteration to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, first, the back cover 640 first covers the rear side of the game board 5 as described above. In order to secure a space in which the state can be opened, the main body frame 4 must be opened largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, in the setting switching valid period, that is, in the period during which fraud detection is not possible, the main body frame 4 is largely opened (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2, so If any illegal modification is attempted, the illegal act becomes extremely conspicuous in the game hall, and therefore, such illegal countermeasures can be taken. Therefore, it can contribute to prevention of fraud.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 350, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input.

  The payout control MPU includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in payout control”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to a signal indicating that the pressing operation unit has been operated is input via the payout control I / O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, a ball-cut detection sensor 574, a payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 350, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. Entered.

  The door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent out via the payout control input circuit. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 and the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. Is input.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display, A command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner, or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 350), and when the number “2” is displayed, it indicates that it is “ball ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 350 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 110, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 111, and detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that informs permission to launch the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 111 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit satisfies launch condition 1 in which a palm or a finger is touching the handle 111 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and a CR unit, a CR unit connection terminal board, If the firing condition 2 that is electrically connected is established, and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B Therefore, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 111. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 330 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “payout control side”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Capacitor ”)). With this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on is input to the payout control MPU. It is completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  In this embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b that performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided with the launch control unit 633b. It may be configured. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The power may be input to the power supply board 630 through a relay board that is not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 64, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control section 1511 that performs presentation control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a door frame presentation display based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is sent from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the panel driving board 1720 in the driving board unit 1700. The game board decoration drive board serial data is transmitted to each decoration board of the game board 5 or the drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 is provided. It is transmitted from the I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 through the panel drive board 1720, or provided on the door frame 3. Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the one lift drive motor 175b, the second lift drive motor 182 and the like, and a lighting signal, a flashing signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 or The door side light emission data for outputting the gradation lighting signal and the door side drive light emission data configured to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, or the door frame effect display device In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the display unit 152 and the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, the sound information is extracted from the sound ROM. For example, a control signal (sound command) is output to the sound source IC.

  A plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second stage production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and a left lateral ring decoration of the back third stage production unit 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotation position and movement position of the body 3351, the right side ring decoration body 3371, and the like are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive board 1720.

  Further, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 165 of the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and performs various operations from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 provided on the door frame 3. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to the performance are output. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4ch) are transmitted to the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3 as sound information. .1ch surround signal, etc.) can be sent to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the game board 5 are a plurality of serial data different from the display command. This is performed by the input / output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The panel drive board 1720 sends a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LEDs (LED 121a, LED 122a, LED 138a, LED 153c, LED 159a, grid decoration LED 195) of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3. LED 213a, upper outer top LED 224, upper outer valley LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, lattice decoration LED 245, etc.), or a lighting signal or flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command is provided in the game board 5 Output to the LED of each decorative board.

  Further, the panel drive board 1720 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to each drive provided in the first elevating drive motor 175 b and the second elevating drive motor 182 provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Or output to a motor.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Although the detailed display is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a door frame effect display device 152, and an effect display. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling the display of the device 1600, an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, and the image ROM. And an image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

  This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame effect display device 152. And rendering control of the effect display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is specified. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. The non-resident area transfer data has a sequence in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance as the screen data drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data. It is prescribed.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Further, when the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and drawing for one line held in the line buffer is performed. In this method, data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display. This will affect the drawing speed on the apparatus 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. “Sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are positioned on the screen or overlapped with each other, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device are set. Rendered at 1600.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 sequentially cross from the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeatedly performed in the direction to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, the front of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Are sequentially output from left to right as viewed from the left side, and output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line is displayed. Based on the drawing data of the minute, it outputs to the pixels for one line sequentially from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 as main scanning.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board to be treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, a payout control board, etc. It is necessary to solder on the solder side that is the side. However, as mentioned above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of pachinko machines, slots, fusion gaming machines, and other gaming machines, but other general electric machine manufacturers can be downsized. A surface mount type (so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, the production may be stopped due to a decrease in the number of lead-type electronic components produced. Therefore, a lead-type electronic component that can be configured as an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate that is handled as a main substrate.

  However, when configured as this lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component is larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and some or more of the protrusions have protrusions. It may be formed into a distorted outer shape (shape). When a lead-type electronic component having such an external shape (shape) is mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate that is treated as a main substrate, it may be difficult to place the components on the substrate due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. For this reason, it is difficult to configure an SMD type electronic component as the lead-type electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among the lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, the SMD type electronic components are limited to substrates that can be handled as the main substrate. It may be permitted to be mounted on the mounting surface.

  Here, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65A is an enlarged view of a part of a region where an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 65B is a view of the enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate in which the lead type electronic components are replaced with the SMD type electronic components replaced with a predetermined area, and the lead type electronic components are replaced with the SMD. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram (b) showing a front surface (mounting surface) and a back surface (solder surface) of a substrate that is miniaturized by collecting electronic components of a type, and FIG. 67 is a rear surface ( FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit. In FIG. 65 and FIG. 67, other various electronic components are omitted except for the electronic components necessary for explanation, for ease of viewing the drawings.

  The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is an alternative having the same function as a lead type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type), and this lead type Schmitt trigger inverter. Is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and the main control is performed by some unauthorized means. When missing from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that there is no incoming ball for any of the sensors that transmit the incoming game ball. It is always determined that fraudulent acts such as those that convey fraudulent acts. Note that a plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control board 1310 as lead-type electronic components.

  In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resists except for various land patterns. Has been.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b), an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as “Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30”). In addition, a lead type high frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor MC30”) capable of removing noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is mounted in the vicinity of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It has become so. In FIG. 65A, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated and accommodated in one SMD package. In this embodiment, SOP (Small Outline Package) having 14 pins is adopted as the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be described as “SOP14”). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, seven leads from two opposite sides of the SMD package body have a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, in this embodiment, 1.27 mm) and bend toward the outside. After being placed on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead, each lead and the surface of the main control board 1310 ( Mounting surface) A rectangular land pattern formed only on 1310x is soldered. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 0.76 mm larger than the width dimension of each lead (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). It is. In this embodiment, the SMD package body has a width dimension of 5.3 mm, a length dimension of 10.8 mm, and a height dimension of 1.5 mm. Including the length of the protruding lead, the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

  Although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in order to mount lead type electronic components on the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the solder surface. It is described as “the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310” (hereinafter the same).

  Capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, in this embodiment, 5 mm) and protrudes in a straight line parallel to the outside. It is formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) through the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads. Ring-shaped land patterns (also referred to as through-holes, that is, through-holes having lands; the same applies hereinafter) to the back surface (from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310). (Solder surface) After two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern formed on 1310y, main control board 131 The two leads protruding from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the lead and the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are respectively soldered. The The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1. 3 mm).

  Note that the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed as a ground (GND). Are formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. In addition, a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), which is a ground (GND). The solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the main control board. Holes (copper) penetrating through a plurality of through holes (both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of main control board 1310 formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of 1310 The same ground (GND) is obtained by being electrically connected through the plated holes)). The diameter of the through hole is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern, and is 0.3 mm. The through hole has a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. ) Are electrically connected to form the same ground (GND), and various wiring patterns are used for routing on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. There are several things that can be done.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), a region MSLKMIC30 indicating a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is disposed is white as silk printing. In addition to printing with a solid line (or black solid line), a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left corner. Specifically, in the region MSLKMIC 30, the lead serving as the first terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the lower left side and the seventh terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is the left-right direction in FIG. (GND) terminal) is placed on the lower right side, the lead on the 8th terminal is placed on the upper right side, and the lead on the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) is placed on the upper left side. .

  The rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads of the first to sixth terminals and the eighth to thirteenth terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are electrically connected to the respective wiring patterns for transmitting the corresponding control signals. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the seventh terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern for supplying power.

  The package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved with the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols. For example, “ABC”) and the product number (the number listed in the catalog, for example, “74XYXYZZ”). Or printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small in size, the surface area of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

  Although the details of the main control board 1310 will be described later, the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game. The main control board box 1320 configured by a transparent cover body and a transparent base body in which a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation are formed is housed and sealed. This heat radiating vent can release the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

  Then, when checking the product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 is stored in the main control board box 1320 in the state ( The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 when the mounting surface) side is visually observed through the transparent cover body. Is small and difficult to see.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 in FIG. MIC30 part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is silk so that the size is easier to see than the part number (number listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 It is printed in white (or black) as printing. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be surely visually confirmed.

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number printed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) is used for silk printing so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable that it is printed with. Thus, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  Further, the capacitor MC30 is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the vicinity of a rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the direction of the capacitor MC30 is not specified because there is no polarity) is printed as a white solid line (or black solid line) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of the area MSLKMC30. In the upper right part, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, in the region MSLKMC30, one lead is electrically connected to the wiring pattern for supplying power so that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. The ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead are instructed to be inserted into the lower ring-shaped land pattern paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern, respectively.

  The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Here, an advantage of mounting an SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate will be briefly described. As described above, since the SMD type electronic component can be reduced in size as compared with the lead type electronic component, the electronic component mounting density when the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Can be extremely suppressed as compared with the electronic component mounting density when the lead type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. For this reason, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) area of the substrate on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since the SMD type electronic component is small, the area around the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted can be increased, and the lead type electronic component can be changed to the SMD type electronic component. It is also possible to increase the area between the replaced components (that is, it is possible to provide an electronic component mounting mode in which there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate depending on the replaced components). Thereby, since the SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate can be viewed from multiple directions, unauthorized modification of the SMD type electronic component, the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) and the SMD type The state of mounting with electronic components (soldered state) and the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns on SMD type electronic components can be confirmed. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to the ease of finding unauthorized alterations.

  In addition, the area around the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted can be increased, and the area between the lead type electronic component replaced with the SMD type electronic component is also increased. Therefore, for these regions (substrate surface (mounting surface)), the SMD type electronic component part number (number listed in the catalog) is imprinted on the surface of the package body of the SMD type electronic component. It can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the printed product number (number printed in the catalog), and this product number (published in the catalog) The number of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the easy recognition of the SMD type electronic component.

  When the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is mounted on the SMD type electronic component, the distance between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is extremely short (for example, a Schmitt trigger). In the inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the main body and the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm.) The back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface of the substrate ( There is a problem in that it is difficult to find such an illegal circuit even if a wrong action of forming some illegal circuit between the mounting surface) and the like is performed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is employed as a method for preventing any unauthorized circuit from being formed between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  A configuration in which wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are not arranged at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component is adopted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). The configuration in which each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal is not arranged at all in the region passing through the circuit is adopted.

  A configuration in which a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern that supplies power is not disposed at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). In this configuration, a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern that supplies power are not disposed at all.

  A configuration was adopted in which no through hole was arranged in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65A, through holes MTH are arranged on the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration in which the through hole MTH is not disposed at all in the region of (mounting surface) (in other words, the region passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) was adopted. As described above, this through hole MTH is electrically connected by both surfaces (holes (copper plated holes)) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of main control board 1310. Thus, the same ground (GND) can be obtained. In addition to the through-hole MTH, a plurality of through-holes MTH ′ (not shown) are provided in the main control board 1310 in order to route various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. Although present, such a through-hole MTH ′ also passes through the lower surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). In which the through hole MTH ′ is not disposed at all.

  Of each lead of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to one lead is formed on the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Adopted a configuration that does not pull out the electronic parts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 with various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not arranged at all in the region that passes through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), and a configuration is adopted in which it is arranged from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  Of each lead of the SMD type electronic component, in order to shorten the wiring pattern for electrically connecting one lead to the other lead, the surface of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component (mounting surface) The configuration in which each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal is not arranged at all in the area (1). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 with various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not arranged at all in the region that passes through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), and a configuration is adopted in which it is arranged from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  Via each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern by soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 And a configuration in which the control signal cannot be taken out is adopted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out without passing through each wiring pattern electrically connected to. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which a control signal cannot be taken out from a part different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to illegally form a new circuit such as a short circuit or a disconnect circuit between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Can be difficult. Moreover, since various wiring patterns to the SMD type electronic component can be visually observed, the intention of the fraudster who intends to provide an unauthorized circuit to the SMD type electronic component is abandoned. Can do. Accordingly, fraudulent acts on the SMD type electronic component can be prevented.

  Also, by not arranging wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the SMD Control signal to the SMD type electronic component so that other illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back side of the main body of the type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding substrate And control signals to other illegal ICs cannot be used in combination in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component.

  Further, by not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, other illegal ICs (SMD type electronic components) As for the type of the device, it is easy to arrange the control signal between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. You can make it impossible to select things.

  Further, among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to one lead is formed on the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not pulling out the SMD type electronic component to the outside, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern drawn to the outside.

  In addition, each lead of the SMD type electronic component is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, whereby each lead pattern is electrically connected to the land pattern. Without taking out the control signal, it is not possible to take out the control signal from a part different from each lead of the SMD type electronic component so that the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern cannot be used illegally. can do.

  Further, among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, in order to shorten the wiring pattern for electrically connecting one lead to the other lead, the surface of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component ( By not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the area of the mounting surface), each wiring pattern electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component can be connected from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By disposing, an illegal circuit cannot be formed around the lead. Of the leads of the SMD type electronic component, a lead that is not used (also referred to as “empty terminal”) is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Or, when it is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that supplies power, it should be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component so that an illegal circuit cannot be formed around the empty terminal. Can do.

  In addition, by disposing no through hole in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of the SMD type electronic component The control signal cannot be taken out through the through hole so that another illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface and the front surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding substrate. It is possible to prevent other unauthorized ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through hole, and control signals from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate can be made through the through hole. It can be prevented from being used as a take-out.

  Further, by not arranging a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern for supplying power in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. An illegal other IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. As a result, it can be prevented from becoming a driving source for other illegal ICs.

[6-4a. Visibility of part number by SMD package]
Next, a configuration in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate handled as a main substrate will be described. Since the SMD type electronic component can be reduced in size as described above, the size of the substrate itself can be reduced by being collectively mounted. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as a main board, and when the main control board 1310 is viewed in a state of being accommodated in the main control board box 1320, a measure for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package is taken. Another configuration (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second to third embodiments”) will be described. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b) (hereinafter referred to as “the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment”) is described. The components having the same functions as those shown in FIG. 6 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the setting indicator 1310g, the base monitor 1310h, and the like described above are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the electronic component of the type, is arranged as a white solid line (or black) The part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left corner.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number printed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the main control MPU 1310a, which is a lead type electronic component, and various lead type connectors. The surface of the main control board 1310 ′ (mounting surface) is gathered by collecting alternative SMD type electronic components having the same function as electronic components such as various lead type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs. ) 1310x ′. The external dimensions (vertical dimensions, horizontal dimensions, and thickness dimensions) of the main control board 1310 ′ are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. .

  The main control board 1310 ′ has a straight line passing through the middle point of the upper side and the lower side of the main control board 1310 ′ as a center line. And a component placement region 1310xa ′ for placing various connectors, and a part number and a product number (published in the catalog) on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′ on the right side from the center line. Number list) is formed as a component list area 1310xb ′, which is an information area written like a parts list of electronic parts configured in an aligned manner.

  Specifically, in the component arrangement region 1310xa ′, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (a plurality of other connectors not shown), and a resistance MR0. MR4 (other resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (others not shown) IC) is mounted. In the component arrangement area 1310xa ′, an area (not shown) indicating a position (which may include designation of orientation) where these various electronic components and various connectors are arranged is a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing. In the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors, corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, stress due to this wiring (this stress is caused by routing in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the reaction force of the wiring that accompanies the connector acts on the connector to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the substrate.

  In the component list area 1310xb ', a component list of electronic components configured in an arrangement in which component numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in a catalog) are aligned is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part arrangement region 1310xa ′. As white (or black). A separator “:” is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified.

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number listed in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing such component information, precautions regarding gaming machines may be described. For example, a description for the purpose of alerting such as “the main control board is a board important for security and should be handled with care” may be provided.

  As described above, the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 ′ can be divided into the component arrangement area 1310xa ′ and the component list area 1310xb ′, and thus the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. It is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors that are mounted on the board.

  In addition, it replaces with the silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of main control board 1310', and the foil extraction area | region and foil extraction in the structure of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package which concerns on 5th Embodiment mentioned later Characters may be used, or a resist-extracted area using a twice-coated resist and a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated resist in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment And may be adopted.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the electronic component of the type, is arranged as a white solid line (or black) The part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left corner.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number printed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66B, the main control MPU 1310a which is a lead type electronic component, and various lead type connectors. The surface of the main control board 1310 ′ (mounting surface) is gathered by collecting alternative SMD type electronic components having the same function as electronic components such as various lead type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs. ) 1310x ′. By integrating the SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310 'can be reduced. The external dimensions (vertical dimensions, horizontal dimensions, and thickness dimensions) of the main control board 1310 ′ are the horizontal dimensions of the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Only the dimension is half (the vertical dimension and the thickness dimension are the same).

  Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control board 1310'. These various electronic components and various connectors are arranged in the component arrangement region 1310xa ′ formed on the main control board 1310 ′ in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. (I.e., the area (not shown) indicating the position (including the designation of orientation) where these various electronic components and various connectors are arranged) is the same arrangement and is white as silk printing (or , Black))), and the corresponding part numbers in the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors are also arranged in the same manner and printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, stress due to this wiring (this stress is caused by routing in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the reaction force of the wiring that accompanies the connector acts on the connector to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the substrate.

  On the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, there is a parts list which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310 ′ in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. The parts list of the electronic component constituted by arranging the part number printed in white (or black) as the silk print in the region 1310xb ′ and the part number (number listed in the catalog) is white as the silk print (or , Black). The size of the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) is larger than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. Large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A separator “:” is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number listed in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing such component information, precautions regarding gaming machines may be described. For example, a description for the purpose of alerting such as “the main control board is a board important for security and should be handled with care” may be provided.

  Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, each lead of the above-described ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (described as a part number “MIC1” in the drawing) and lead type electronic components are used. Leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5 and MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′. The part number and part number (numbers listed in the catalog) are the main control board 1310 ′ so as not to overlap (to avoid) this part. Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the component list area 1310xb ′ formed in the above.

  In this way, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ is used as an area for component placement, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ is used as a part number and a product number (published in the catalog). Are used as a component list of electronic components configured in an aligned manner, so that the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ and the back surface of the main control board 1310 ′ Since the role of (solder surface) 1310y ′ can be classified, various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ can be easily recognized.

  Further, since the SMD type electronic components are gathered and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, the size of the main control board 1310 ′ can be reduced. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ has a reduced number of portions where various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude and are soldered, thereby reducing the back surface ( (Solder surface) 1310y 'can be formed as a flat surface.

  In addition, since various leads of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ are soldered, they are reflected and feel dazzling when exposed to light from a fluorescent lamp or the like. As described above, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, and soldering may occur. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of parts formed, even if light such as a fluorescent lamp hits the flat surface, A parts list of electronic parts composed of an arrangement of silk-printed part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) is visually recognized. It does not occur adverse effects of Kunar.

  In addition, instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, the measure of the product number visibility by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment to be described later is taken. The foil extraction region and the foil extraction character in the configuration may be adopted, or the resist extraction region and the double application of the double coating resist in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment. You may employ | adopt the white resist extraction character using a resist.

  By the way, a general electric machine manufacturer uses a multilayer substrate on which various wiring patterns can be formed in each layer. However, main control boards and payout control boards used in gaming machines are two-layer boards ("double-sided boards") that form various wiring patterns on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the substrate to enhance security. It is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate regardless of whether it is a lead type electronic component or an SMD type electronic component. For example, in order to increase security, it is necessary to mount the main control MPU 1310a of the ZIP type included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and it is advantageous to mount the lead type electronic component. For those with the SMD type, the lead type electronic component is mounted without using the SMD type electronic component.

  When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board As compared with the case where only the lead type electronic component is mounted on the main control board, the number of leads of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board is reduced. As a result, the area used as a region for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board can be increased, and an area used as a region used for other functions can also be acquired. Can do.

  Therefore, for example, the SMD type ICs and SMD type connectors are not mounted on the main control board produced as a mass-production machine in the above-described area of the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board that has increased. A land area for mounting land pattern 1310ya ′ (see FIG. 66B) in which various land patterns for mounting and pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed can be provided. In the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, SMD type electronic components are not mounted on the various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya ′, so various land in the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya ′. The pattern or pad pattern becomes an unmounted pattern, and the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya ′ becomes an empty area.

  When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are formed depending on the region where the unmounted pattern is formed. However, when such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, the surface of the main control board ( The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be used effectively without being restricted by the arrangement of various electronic components and various connectors on the mounting surface) and the routing of various wiring patterns.

  In addition, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, it is not visible from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and the presence of the unmounted pattern can be hidden. It is preferable in terms of security.

  A part of such an unmounted pattern may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience. For example, the connector (SMD type connector) may be more easily connected to the wiring if it is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

  Further, a part of such an unmounted pattern may be formed as a lead type electronic component or a lead type connector for convenience. For example, a case where soldering strength is required, such as a connector having a large number of insertions and removals, can be mentioned.

  Next, when the main control board 1310 is viewed in a state of being accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the small Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD package, has a small package main body surface area, so that the manufacturer name (abbreviation and symbol is also displayed). And other parts of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as “fourth to sixth embodiments”) in which the measure of the part number is taken by the SMD package that the part number (the number listed in the catalog) is small and difficult to see. Will be described as “the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package”). 67 (a) to 67 (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b) (hereinafter referred to as “the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment”) is described. To those having the same function as those shown in FIG.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (direction designation is also possible) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Area MSLKMIC30 is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed near the area MSLKMIC30 in the lower left. As white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number printed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ) The region MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no orientation is specified) so as to be disposed in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead to be) The white solid line (or black solid line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further connected to the main surface as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is a white chain line as silk printing. (Or a black chain line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ and in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, printing can be performed with a large component number.

  In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the product number MSLKMIC 30p, the product number MSLKMIC 30p is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 with an information area near the area MSLKMIC 30 '. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the product number (number printed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be surely visually confirmed.

  The product number MSLKMIC 30p may be the same as or larger than the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. May be. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p can be increased for printing.

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number printed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) is used for silk printing so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable that it is printed with. Thus, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMC30 ′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no direction is specified) is a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing. In addition to being printed, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLKMC30 ′ and in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the size of the part number is set. Although it is necessary to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number is increased. This is because it can be printed.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (direction designation is also possible) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Area MSLKMIC30 is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed near the area MSLKMIC30 in the lower left. As white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number printed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ) The region MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no orientation is specified) so as to be disposed in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead to be) The white solid line (or black solid line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further connected to the main surface as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating a position (including designation of orientation) at which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is indicated by a chain line. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a foil cut character in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ and in the upper left.

  The foil-extracted region is a chain line that is a copper foil wiring pattern except for a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns in a layer (copper plane) where various wiring patterns are formed. This is a region formed by removing the surrounding copper foil. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ formed as a foil removal region has a notch 1310 yMIC 30 in a part on the left side in FIG. As a result, the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ becomes a U-shaped katakana, and a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 via the notch 1310yMIC30 and the U-shaped region. The inner region of the MSLKMIC 30 ′ can be electrically connected. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and therefore the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 corresponding to the mounted region. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to noise (enhanced against noise) by securing the above area as much as possible.

  The foil-cut character is formed as a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as the foil drawing character is formed as the foil drawing character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a foil-cut character.

  In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the product number MSLKMIC 30p, the product number MSLKMIC 30p is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 with an information area near the area MSLKMIC 30 '. It is formed as a foil-extracted character so as to have a size that is easier to visually recognize than the size of a product number (number printed in a catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. The foil-cut character is formed as a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be surely visually confirmed.

  The product number MSLKMIC 30p formed as a foil-drawn character is the same as the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be large or large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and therefore the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p is set in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component in a smaller size, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p is increased. This is because it can be formed as a foil drawing character.

  In addition, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as foil-drawing characters together with the product number (number printed in the catalog). In this case, the characters are formed as foil-drawing characters so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferred. Thus, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMC30 ′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (a direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed by a chain line as a foil drawing region at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30, and this region MSLKMC30 A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed in the vicinity of 'and on the upper left as a letter without a foil. The foil-extracted region is a chain line that is a copper foil wiring pattern except for a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns in a layer (copper plane) where various wiring patterns are formed. This is a region formed by removing the surrounding copper foil. The foil-cut character is formed as a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as the foil drawing character is formed as the foil drawing character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a foil-cut character.

  In addition, the wiring pattern for forming the foil drawing region and the foil drawing character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from various electronic components, as well as a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various types. The land pattern and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically insulated from each other.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (direction designation is also possible) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Area MSLKMIC30 is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed near the area MSLKMIC30 in the lower left. As white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number printed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ) The region MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no orientation is specified) so as to be disposed in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead to be) The white solid line (or black solid line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The whole is a green resist and is solid except for various land patterns.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with a main part as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the control board 1310 is white painted twice. A white resist using a white resist formed with a chain line as a white resist removal region using a resist and having a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in the upper left portion in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30 ′. It is formed as a blank character.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the part number MSLKMIC 30p, the part number MSLKMIC 30p is stamped or printed on the package main body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and below the region MSLKMIC 30 ′. It is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that has been painted twice so that the size is easier to visually recognize than the size of (number listed in the catalog).

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region where the capacitor MC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 (the direction of the capacitor MC30 is not specified because there is no polarity). The region MSLKMC30 ′ is a white resist extraction region using a white resist painted twice. The part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30 'and in the upper left as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice.

  Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with a white resist as a first of the white resists coated twice (that is, the white resist coated twice). First, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is positioned at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 as the second of the white resist coated twice. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating a position (including direction designation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line shape, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ and in the upper left. The corresponding part number is masked as a white resist-extracted character, an information area is provided in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 ′ and below, and the product number MSLKMIC 30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is marked as a white resist-excluded character in this information area. Region where the capacitor MC30 is disposed at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity). MSLKMC 30 ′ is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line shape, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked as a white resist removal character in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC 30 ′ and in the upper left.

  In the masked state as described above, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with a white resist by solid coating with a white resist except for various land patterns. In other words, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns.

  As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white color of the second layer. By covering the whole area except for the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC30 ′ indicating the position (including designation of the orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is disposed is white. Part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) that are formed with chain lines as the resist removal area, the part numbers corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed as white resist removal characters, and stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is a character without white resist A region MSLKMC30 ′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no direction is specified) is formed by a chain line, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character. Is done. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be surely visually confirmed.

  When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character, it is formed to be larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-free character.

  When the product number MSLKMIC 30p is formed as a white resist-extracted character, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. May be the same or larger. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and therefore the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p is set in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component in a smaller size, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p is increased. This is because it can be formed as a white resist-free character.

  Note that the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-excluded characters together with the product number (number printed in the catalog). In this case, the characters are formed as white resist-excluded characters so that the size is easier to see than the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable. Thus, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character, it is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-free character.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also formed with various patterns of white resist. You may comprise so that it may be solid coating except a pattern. In this case, the area indicating the position (which may include the designation of the orientation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-printed as the surface (mounting). Surface) is printed with dark solid lines such as dark green, black, gray, etc., and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are silk printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as dark green, black, gray, etc. Printed as dark characters. By configuring in this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of other substrates are solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns. The control board 1310 can be made to stand out. In addition, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) is also written. ) May be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as silk printing.

  In addition, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solid-coated with white resist except for various land patterns, and the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 1 You may comprise so that it may print as silk printing using the resist of the different color of the 2nd application which makes the color of the resist of the second time (underground) and the second time different. After printing the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as white (silk printing) excluding various land patterns as the first time (base), then on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is the second time in a state in which the area indicating the position (which may include the designation of the orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the component number corresponding to the various electronic components are masked. The entire surface (mounting surface) may be printed as silk printing in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red except for various land patterns. Even with this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of other substrates are solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns. The control board 1310 can be made to stand out. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize an area indicating a position where various electronic components are arranged (which may include designation of orientation) and a component number corresponding to the various electronic components.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also formed with various patterns of white resist. You may comprise so that it may be solid coating except a pattern. In this case, an area indicating a position (including designation of orientation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A white resist removal region is formed by a solid line, and a part number corresponding to various electronic components is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as a white resist removal character. Also, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) in addition to this product number) is also main. You may form as a white resist extraction character on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310. FIG.

[6-4b. Measures to prevent modification of SMD type electronic components]
Next, a miniaturized electronic component called an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, so that it can be exchanged for an illegal electronic component to obtain an illegal game ball. The point which prevents an action is demonstrated.

  As described above, the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension as the size of the SMD package body. 10.8 mm and the height dimension is 1.5 mm, and the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm including the length of the lead protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

  Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from a person who obtains an illegal game ball by making an unauthorized modification. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body in which a plurality of pores are formed and a transparent base body. As shown in FIG. 68, the main control board box 1320 has a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 that are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of a crimping portion 1303. The crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and a plurality of crimping portions 1303 are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then to open the main control board box 1320 It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

  However, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegal. If the electronic component is exchanged, an unauthorized game ball may be obtained by a person who performs such unauthorized modification.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in this embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. The configuration to adopt was adopted. Thus, even if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmitt The trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be taken out from the main control board box 1320 through the vent hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

  Further, as described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input, and is omitted from the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means. Then, the main control MPU 1310a always determines that there is no entry among the various sensors that convey the entry of the game ball, and the improper is always the one that conveys an illegal act such as the approach of a magnet or unauthorized vibration. It is determined that cheating is taking place. As a result, when the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is missing, a state where there is no entry to the person who performs unauthorized modification. The state is maintained and no illegal game ball is acquired, and the illegal alteration is performed by notifying the illegal act, and the game computer (hall) is informed and notified of the game. You can also tell the staff in the hall. Further, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that fraudulent acts are always carried out for various types of sensors that convey fraudulent acts such as the approach of a magnet or unauthorized vibration, as described above, Is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched toward the game area 5a. It is in a state where it cannot be performed at all.

  In the above-described embodiment, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD type electronic component. However, as other SMD type electronic components, For example, when the resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the main control board box 1320 is formed through the vent 1301z. It is necessary to make the inner diameter of the vent 1301z smaller than the resistance of the SMD type so that it does not jump out from the inside of the SMD type.

  Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is visually confirmed whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. It may be difficult to distinguish. Further, when the SMD type resistance peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 jumps out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the vent hole 1301z, the resistance is lowered to the inside lower side of the main control board box 1320. Since there is no trace of the peeled off SMD type resistor, it becomes more difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, for example, when the JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as the SMD type resistor, the length type is 2.0 mm and the width dimension is 1.2 mm in this 2012 type. In such a small SMD type resistor, even if a problem occurs in which the main control board 1310 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 can be used. In order not to jump out, the inner diameter of the vent 1301z is smaller than the smaller one of the length dimension and width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, the width dimension is 1.2 mm). It shall be a thing (here, for example, 1.0 mm).

  Thereby, even if a small SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the vent hole 1301z. Therefore, an opportunity to visually recognize the small SMD type resistor that has been peeled off inside the main control board box 1320 can be obtained, and if the main control board box 1320 is shaken up and down or left and right, A small SMD type resistor that peels off collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310, and a sound is generated. This sound provides an opportunity to recognize the small SMD type resistor that has peeled off. Can be obtained. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, instead of electronic components such as lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, electronic components such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are employed. The inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z is smaller than the smallest dimension among them.

  Thus, even if a small SMD type electronic component is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is sure to jump out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the vent 1301z. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that a defect that the SMD type electronic component is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the deflection of the main control board 1310 can be found.

  In the above-described embodiment (including the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments), the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. As described above, SMD type electronic components can also be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrates treated as main substrates such as the power supply substrate 630 and the payout control substrate 633.

[6-4c. Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested at a specific testing institution and cannot be shipped to the game hall unless it is approved by this specific testing institution. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals relating to the game. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the vertical direction). When the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested at a specific testing institution, it is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and is attached to the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. While the test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed, the main control board 1310 is produced when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine shipped to the game hall. The test harness cover body side opening 1301k is formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It is made as to not. For this reason, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-production machine, an area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested in a specific test organization, the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310, such as a land pattern formation area 1310ya. '(See FIG. 66 (b)) and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for mounting the test harness to the test connector 1310k on the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. The structure to be formed was adopted. Thereby, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested in a specific testing institution, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine shipped to a game hall, the surface of the main control board 1310 Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the (mounting surface), other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

  Further, with this configuration, in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test organization, the test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. Subsequently, the test harness electrically connected to the test apparatus installed in a specific test organization is connected to the main control board via the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. Electrical connection is made with a test connector 1310k mounted on the mounting land pattern formation region 1310ya ′ on the back surface (solder surface) of 1310. Subsequently, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be held and held (held) by the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that the test harness is directed to the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibrations caused by a movable body operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition to preventing this, it is possible to prevent the test harness from which various important signals relating to the game are extracted in the test of the pachinko machine 1 from being twisted and disconnected.

  In this embodiment, as the test connector 1310k, a straight SMD type connector (each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board. The right angle SMD type connector (type in which each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel with the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) is used. The back surface (solder surface) of the control board is mounted in the vicinity of any of the left side, the lower side, the right side, and the upper side, and the side wall (transparent cover body 1301) of the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. Of the left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the upper side wall of the tester to the test connector 1310k) to the test connector 1310k An arrangement for forming a test harness cover side opening 1301k may be employed for applying Ri. Even if configured in this way, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested at a specific testing institution, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine shipped to a game hall, Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310, another SMD type electronic component is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. In preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 in a specific testing organization, the test operator first performs a specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. A test harness electrically connected to a test apparatus installed in the engine is connected to the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board through a test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the test connector 1310k to be mounted.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine in which a test firing test terminal (test connector) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a test device in a specific test organization is connected is provided in the game control device (game control board) has been proposed. (For example, JP2013-128621A (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, a test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when tested at a specific testing institution, whereas when used in a game hall. Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board and becomes an empty area, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board cannot be increased by this empty area.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface-mount type electronic component on a board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, although the surface mount type electronic component in the gaming machine described in this document may have an identifier such as a part number corresponding to the surface mount type electronic component, the size of the surface mount type electronic component is large. There was a problem that the identifier was small and it was difficult to visually recognize the identifier.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface-mount type electronic component on a board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mount type electronic component in the gaming machine described in this document is mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface-mount type electronic component is There is a fear that an illegal game ball may be obtained by peeling it from the game control board and replacing it with an illegal electronic component.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a tact switch or the like is provided on a board that can be operated by operating a pressing operation unit to feel that the switch is turned on or off by a click feeling during operation (for example, a special feature). No. 2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 21)). By the way, an electronic component such as a tact switch described in this document is a lead type in which each REIT is inserted into a through hole provided in the substrate from the surface of the substrate toward the back surface and soldered on the back surface side of the substrate. It is an electronic component. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of the game, for example, if the board bends as the lead-type electronic component is operated, this deflection causes the board to There is a possibility that an electrical failure may occur due to peeling of a soldered portion of another electronic component mounted on the board.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which various control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back of the gaming board (for example, JP 2013-128621 A (paragraph [0032] to paragraph [0034] and FIG. 3)). By the way, the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player, so it is accommodated in a board case having a sealed structure and is used for illegal acts such as unauthorized modification. Preventive measures are required.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface-mounted component on a board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mounted component in the gaming machine described in this document is mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, it is within the area of the surface of the game control board on which the surface-mounted component is mounted. If the wiring pattern is routed to the surface, the distance between the back surface of the surface-mounted component and the surface of the game control board is small. A problem arises in that fraudulent acts cannot be prevented.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a main control board for controlling a game is placed on the back side in a state of being accommodated in a case (for example, JP-A-2006-214975 (paragraph [0030], paragraph [0031] and Fig. 2) By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the main control board is important for controlling the game, so it is housed in a case and sealed as a security measure. It is placed on the back side, and it is required to improve crime prevention for those important in crime prevention.

[6-5. Measures against electromagnetic noise that enters through the setting key switch]
Next, countermeasures against electromagnetic wave noise entering through the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As described above, since the setting key switch 1311a includes a resin type and a metal type, first, countermeasures against electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the resin type setting key switch 1311a will be described. An electromagnetic noise countermeasure for the setting key switch 1311a will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram (a) showing the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the method of connecting the metal frame plate of the setting key switch to the ground (GND), and the metal frame plate of the setting key switch. FIG. 6B is a diagram (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the method of connecting the ground to the ground (GND), and the setting change in the method of insulating the metal frame plate of the setting key switch from the ground (GND). FIG. 10C is a diagram (c) illustrating the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1311, and is a diagram illustrating the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 in a method of insulating the metal frame plate of the setting key switch from the ground (GND). d).

[Countermeasures against electromagnetic noise for resin type setting key switches]
As described above, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is rotated by inserting a setting key into the non-conductive resin-made cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and the inner side of the outer cylinder 1311aa. A non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab and a non-conductive resin which is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa and a circuit for turning the contact ON / OFF by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab is formed. A rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa are formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, bent so as to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac, and protrudes to the rear of the base body 1311ac. A metal in which a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada are formed on both side surfaces (the front side surface and the rear side surface in the figure) A frame plate 1311ad of, and a. The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. An insertion port 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

  Further, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are each formed of non-conductive resin, so that a person who is charged with static electricity sets it. Even when the front surface of the key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is touched, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge enters the setting change board 1311 via the setting key switch 1311a. And an end portion of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z of the cover body 1301 of the non-conductive resin main control board box 1320. The distance between the key switch 1311a and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad Since it is separated by a dimension d (about 2 mm in this embodiment), even if a person charged with static electricity touches the through hole 1301z of the resin cover body 1301 having non-conductivity or its periphery, Electromagnetic wave noise due to electric discharge enters the setting change board 1311 via the setting key switch 1311a because it becomes difficult to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a via the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za. Can be prevented.

  In this way, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can prevent electromagnetic noise that enters the setting change board 1311 through itself, and therefore, for the purpose of further enhancing the anti-electromagnetic noise, A method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, and a resin type setting key switch A method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311; There is.

[Resin type: Method to electrically connect metal frame plate and ground]
In a method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, FIG. As shown in b), the setting key switch 1311a is formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged at the center point where the center lines in the vertical and horizontal directions of the setting change board 1311 intersect. Long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter simply referred to as “long through holes”) having a pair of opposed lands having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change substrate 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada can be inserted. "SLH1, SLH2" may be described)). A pair of A terminals and B terminals, which are two lead terminals formed on the right side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. Through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 having lands (hereinafter simply referred to as “through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2”) and two lead terminals formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a Through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 having a pair of lands through which a certain COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal can be respectively inserted (hereinafter, simply referred to as “through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4”) are a pair of opposing long 90 degree rotation angle with through holes SLH1 and SLH2 It is formed on the right and left direction of the center line of the setting change substrate 1311 Te. In addition, a through hole SSTD that can be inserted through a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that designates the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a is provided in the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311. Is formed in a region surrounded by the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and the long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

  Further, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has various pin terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4 (hereinafter simply referred to as “through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4”) having lands through which the first pin terminal to the fourth pin terminal can be inserted may be described. Is formed).

  Of these four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4, the uppermost through hole SSTH1 into which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is the right side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is electrically connected to the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the two lead terminals A and B can be inserted. Surface).

  Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the through hole SSTH2 that is disposed below the through hole SSTH1 and through which the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is connected to the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN2 is changed so as to be electrically connected to the through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 through which the two lead terminals COM1 and COM2 formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac can be respectively inserted. The back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 is formed.

  Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4, the through hole SSTH3, which is disposed below the through hole SSTH2 and through which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, is connected to the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN3 is changed so as to be electrically connected to the through hole SLTH3 through which the B terminal of the two lead terminals A and B terminals formed on the right side surface of the base body 1311ac can be inserted. The back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 is formed.

  Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4, the lowermost through hole SSTH4 which is arranged below the through hole SSTH3 and through which the fourth pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is set The change substrate 1311 is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, in the copper plane, through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 to the setting key switch 1311a and through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 In the periphery of the SSTH 3, foil-extracted regions that are formed by removing the copper foil are formed. Due to these areas where the foil is removed, the setting change substrate 1311 is electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y. . It should be noted that on the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted to the left and right of the setting change board 1311. For a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape along the direction, the long through holes are not taken away from the outer periphery of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 when soldering. Copper foils are removed from the holes SLH1 and SLH2, and thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of each long hole. Due to this thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern), the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground).

  On the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, in the copper plane, the surroundings of the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 to the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 In the periphery of SSTH3 and the periphery of the above-described wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, and SPTN3, a foil-extracted region that is formed by removing the copper foil is formed. Due to these areas where the foil is removed, the setting change substrate 1311 is electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y. . In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted to the left and right of the setting change board 1311. For a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape along the direction, the long through holes are not taken away from the outer periphery of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 when soldering. Copper foils are removed from the holes SLH1 and SLH2, and thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of each long hole. Due to this thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern), the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground).

  It should be noted that through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. These four through holes STH are a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change substrate 1311 and a solid ground (substrate surface) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 ( Board ground) and the same ground (GND).

  The entire surface of the setting change substrate 1311 (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y is solid-coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. The surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 is a color different from the predetermined color of the resist as silk printing in the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the resist of the predetermined color. The area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is silk-printed as an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged in a color different from a predetermined color of the resist as silk printing. Printed with solid lines of the same color. The area SSLKSW1 is formed larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is disposed in the area SSLKSW1 and mounted (soldered by the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311). In this state, the area SSLKSW1 line (rectangular solid line) is arranged outside the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the line of the area SSLKSW1 (rectangular solid line) from overlapping. Similarly to the region SSLKSW1, the area SMLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN is arranged on the setting change board 1311 is not overlapped by the connector SMCN even if the connector SMCN is mounted. It is like that.

  As described above, in the method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, the resin type A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) of the setting change board 1311 through the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2. Therefore, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically floated with respect to the setting change board 1311. That is, the electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source, so that the electrically floating metal is not made on the setting change board 1311. As a result, in the state where the metal called the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the solid ground (board ground) of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The metal frame plate 1311ad is housed in the main control board box 1320 so that it cannot be directly touched by a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a, and functions as an antenna that is electrically stabilized and picks up noise. Therefore, the ground line for transmitting the setting change board 1311 and the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, can be prevented. It does not give fluctuations. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

[Resin type: Insulating metal frame plate from ground]
Setting change board so that the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In the method of fixing to 1311, as shown in FIGS. 69C and 69D, the setting key switch 1311a is set at the center point where the center lines of the setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions intersect. A pair of opposing long through-holes having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the key switch 1311a can be inserted. SLH1 and SLH2 are formed on the vertical center line of the setting change board 1311. And a pair of through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 through which the two terminals A and B formed on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted, and the setting key switch 1311a A pair of through-holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 through which the two lead terminals COM1 and COM2 formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac can be inserted, respectively, are a pair of opposed long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2. Are formed on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change substrate 1311. In addition, a through hole SSTD that can be inserted through a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that designates the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a is provided in the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311. Is formed in a region surrounded by the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and the long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

  Further, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has various pin terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4 through which the first pin terminal to the fourth pin terminal) can be inserted are formed.

  Of these four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4, the uppermost through hole SSTH1 into which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is the right side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is electrically connected to the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the two lead terminals A and B can be inserted. Surface).

  Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the through hole SSTH2 that is disposed below the through hole SSTH1 and through which the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is connected to the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN2 is changed so as to be electrically connected to the through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 through which the two lead terminals COM1 and COM2 formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac can be respectively inserted. The back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 is formed.

  Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4, the through hole SSTH3, which is disposed below the through hole SSTH2 and through which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, is connected to the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN3 is changed so as to be electrically connected to the through hole SLTH3 through which the B terminal of the two lead terminals A and B terminals formed on the right side surface of the base body 1311ac can be inserted. The back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 is formed.

  Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, SSTH4, the lowermost through hole SSTH4 which is arranged below the through hole SSTH3 and through which the fourth pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is set The change substrate 1311 is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, a square that surrounds the entire long through holes SLH1, SLH2 for the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 for the setting key switch 1311a on the copper plane. A foil removal region SINSx having a shape is formed. Due to this foil drawing region SINSx, the long through holes SLH1, SLH2, and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 are solid grounds formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. It is electrically insulated from (substrate ground). In addition, the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 was cut out of a copper plane formed by removing the copper foil around the through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3 with respect to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A foil removal region is also formed. Due to these areas where the foil is removed, the setting change substrate 1311 is electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y. .

  The rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 is the same as the foil removal region SINSx at a position corresponding to the foil removal region SINSx formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change substrate 1311 on the copper plane. A foil-extracted foil removal region SINSy formed by removing the copper foil is formed except for the wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, and SPTN3 described above. The foil drawing area SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, and SPTN3 to the periphery of the through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3 with respect to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. Due to this foil removal region SINSy, the long through holes SLH1, SLH2, the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4, the wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, SPTN3, and the through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3 are formed on the surface (mounting) It is in a state of being electrically insulated from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y.

  It should be noted that through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. These four through holes STH are a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change substrate 1311 and a solid ground (substrate surface) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 ( Board ground) and the same ground (GND).

  The entire surface of the setting change substrate 1311 (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y is solid-coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. The surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 is a color different from the predetermined color of the resist as silk printing in the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the resist of the predetermined color. The area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is silk-printed as an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged in a color different from a predetermined color of the resist as silk printing. Printed with solid lines of the same color. The area SSLKSW1 is formed larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is disposed in the area SSLKSW1 and mounted (soldered by the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311). In this state, the area SSLKSW1 line (rectangular solid line) is arranged outside the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the line of the area SSLKSW1 (rectangular solid line) from overlapping. Similarly to the region SSLKSW1, the area SMLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN is arranged on the setting change board 1311 is not overlapped by the connector SMCN even if the connector SMCN is mounted. It is like that.

  Here, the reason why the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 are formed on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 will be described. By forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is made of metal. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1, SLH2 having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed in the frame plate 1311ad can be inserted are set. The change substrate 1311 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y. The substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 can be moved away from the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a. Accordingly, in the state where the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered, the metal is temporarily assumed. Even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the frame plate 1311ad, the electromagnetic wave noise is set via the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. By being prevented from entering a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the change substrate 1311, the metal frame plate 1311ad itself is attenuated. That is, electromagnetic wave noise from the metal frame plate 1311ad can be prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. Thus, intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise from the metal frame plate 1311ad can be prevented on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise is important for controlling the progress of the game via the setting change board 1311. Proceeding to the substrate ground of the main control board 1310 which is the control board can be reliably stopped, and no fluctuation is given to the ground line which transmits the board ground (ground).

  Thus, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In the method of fixing to the setting change board 1311, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered. In this state, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal frame plate 1311ad, the electromagnetic wave noise is removed from the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. Via regions SINSx and SINSy Since it is prevented from entering the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the constant change substrate 1311 and is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself, To the ground line that transmits the substrate ground (ground) by reliably stopping the proceeding to the substrate ground of the main control board 1310 which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game through the setting change board 1311 It does not give fluctuations. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

[Countermeasures against electromagnetic noise for metal type setting key switches]
As described above, the metal type setting key switch 1311a is a metal cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting in which the setting key is inserted and rotated with respect to the inner side of the outer cylinder 1311aa. The key cylinder 1311ab has the same configuration as the resin-type setting key switch 1311a in that the material of the same configuration as the resin-type setting key switch 1311a is different.

  In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. It has become a state. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. The surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac are covered. That is, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab and electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is in an electrically connected state, there is a problem that electromagnetic noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad.

  Thus, unlike the resin type setting key switch 1311a described above, the metal type setting key switch 1311a cannot prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the setting change board 1311 through itself. Therefore, as a countermeasure against electromagnetic wave noise, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 and is connected from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. There is a method of fixing to the setting change substrate 1311 so as to be insulated.

[Metal type: Method of insulating a metal frame plate from the ground]
Setting change board so that the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. The method of fixing to 1311 is the above-described grounding of the setting change board 1311 without electrically connecting the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. Since it is the same as the method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from GND), the description is omitted, but the setting is made on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. Foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the change board 1311 are formed. It will be described reason.

  By forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, a metal frame of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is formed. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed in the plate 1311ad can be inserted are the setting change boards. It is possible to be electrically insulated from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of 1311.

  In other words, the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 can be moved away from the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a, and the setting is made. The board ground of the change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad). It has become. Accordingly, in a state where the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered, the metal Even if electromagnetic noise enters the outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad, the electromagnetic noise passes through the metal frame plate 1311ad and the surface of the setting change substrate 1311. Solid ground (formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed on the 1311x (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y. Invade the board ground) It metallic outer cylinder 1311aa by is prevented, metallic setting key cylinder 1311Ab, and is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. That is, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy. Can do. Accordingly, intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad can be prevented on the setting change board 1311 side. Can be reliably stopped from going to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game via the setting change board 1311, and the ground line for transmitting the board ground (ground) It does not give fluctuations.

  In this way, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In the method of fixing to the setting change board 1311, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered. In this state, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad, the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the metal frame plate 1311ad. Of the setting change board 1311 Solid ground formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 via the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y. Since it is prevented from entering the (substrate ground) and is attenuated by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered is changed to the setting change substrate 1311. The ground line for transmitting the substrate ground (ground) is not changed by reliably stopping the progress to the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310 which is an important control substrate for controlling the progress of the game via . Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Note that the space between the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab is filled with a non-conductive resin (insulating resin), and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab is connected to the metal outer cylinder 1311aa. A configuration in which the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab are not electrically connected to each other and insulated may be employed by adopting a rotatable configuration. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the metal frame plate 1311ad and the front surface 1311x (mounting surface) and back surface of the setting change substrate 1311. (Solder surface) It penetrates into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 via the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed on the 1311y. Is blocked by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. That is, electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa can be prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. Thus, invasion of electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa can be prevented on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise is important for controlling the progress of the game via the setting change board 1311. Proceeding to the substrate ground of the main control board 1310 which is the control board can be reliably stopped, and no fluctuation is given to the ground line which transmits the board ground (ground). Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  In addition, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is configured by covering the entire or front side of the metal outer cylinder 1311aa with a non-conductive resin cap or rubber cap (lid). The cap (lid body) may be exposed from the through hole 1301z formed in. On the front surface of such a cap (lid), an opening is provided at a position corresponding to the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab.

[Selecting the setting key switch]
Here, the selection method of the setting key switch 1311a will be briefly described. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a includes a resin type and a metal type. As described above, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can prevent electromagnetic noise entering the setting change board 1311 through itself, and therefore, for the purpose of further enhancing electromagnetic noise resistance. A method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311; and a resin type setting key. A method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311; There is. In the metal type setting key switch, as described above, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, and the setting change board. There is only a method of fixing to the setting change substrate 1311 so as to be insulated from the ground (GND) of 1311. The setting key switch 1311a is basically a resin type, and the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. A method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to be connected is adopted.

  If a problem such as malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or malfunction of electronic parts occurs due to the influence of the electromagnetic noise in the test for anti-electromagnetic noise, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is adopted and the resin The setting change board 1311 is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. The method of fixing to is adopted. In this case, a metal type setting key switch 1311a is employed instead of the resin type setting key switch 1311a, and the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is connected to the ground ( It is also possible to employ a method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the GND.

[Status where electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch]
A state in which electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch 1311a will be described. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba provided in the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value, so only a limited number of people including the game hall manager are allowed to possess it. And is limited to 2-3 people. For this reason, when confirming the set value or changing the set value, first, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the metal A person who has the setting key accesses the setting key switch 1311a. That is, the person who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 may be different from the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

  Then, an attendant such as a game hall clerk who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is charged by itself when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotating it. Electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and this metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the frame ground via the door frame metal ground wire. The substrate 559 is electrically connected. This frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire. That is, a staff member such as a game hall clerk who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is charged by itself and electrostatically discharged when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127. The electromagnetic noise caused by the noise is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key, so that the door lock reinforcing unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground substrate 559, the island equipment ground wire, It can be removed from the pachinko machine 1 to the ground of the island facility in the game hall. On the other hand, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a does not touch the cylinder lock 127, so that the electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to charging of the cylinder key 127 is set via a regular metal key. 1311a.

  Since the resin type setting key switch 1311a can prevent electromagnetic noise entering the setting change board 1311 through itself, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can be set for the purpose of further enhancing the electromagnetic noise resistance. A method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In addition, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is set to be insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In the method of fixing to the change board 1311, the setting change board 1 11 is formed on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, so that the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is charged with static electricity. Electromagnetic wave noise due to electric discharge is further included in the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a (in the case of a metal type setting key switch 1311a, a metal outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab are further included. It can be attenuated by. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by charging and electrostatic discharge of the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311.

  As described above, the door frame 3 includes various decorative portions, and electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions is transmitted to a metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown). It is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the ground wire, and is transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. The various decorative parts decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and are arranged on substantially the entire door frame 3, so that a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a is conscious of the door frame 3 when accessing it. If you touch it without touching, you will touch various decorative parts on the door frame 3, and electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge will be transmitted to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1 It has come to be.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 are formed on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311, and the foil removal regions SINSx, In SINSy, a pair of long holes are formed along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are formed, but one of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 is connected to the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 via a resistor. Solid ground formed on 1311y ( The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 may be connected to the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change substrate 1311 via corresponding resistors. It may be configured to be electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on (solder surface) 1311y. In this way, electromagnetic noise caused by charging and electrostatic discharge of the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is caused by the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a (in the case of the metal type setting key switch 1311a, Further, a metal outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab are further transmitted to the resistance via the metal outer cylinder 1311aa. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by charging and electrostatic discharge of the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311.

  In the present embodiment, an electrostatic removal pad that can remove electromagnetic wave noise may be provided at a predetermined location on the front surface of the door frame 3, or when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4. Of the main body frame 4 in which the left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction is opposite to the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4. The right side in front view in the vertical direction may be provided in the open side portion of the main body frame 4. Further, since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows facing the island facilities in the game hall, when the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is opened from the outer frame 2, it faces the one pachinko machine 1. A staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall reaches the back side of the other pachinko machine 1 that is. When a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like releases the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 from the outer frame 2 for some reason, the back of the other pachinko machine 1 opposite the one pachinko machine 1 There is also a case to access the side. Therefore, since it is necessary to remove electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to charging of the clerk of the game hall, etc., an electrostatic removal pad can be used as a part that can be reached by a clerk of the game hall. It may be provided on the rear surface side of the back cover 640, may be provided on the rear surface side of the interface board cover 636, may be provided on the rear surface side of the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632, or may be provided on the rear surface of the dispensing device 350. It may be provided on the side.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, you may comprise the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 5 by shape | molding with the resin which has electroconductivity. The main body frame base unit 300 has a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface in a front view, so that the main body frame base unit 300 and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected. . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 described above via a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown). The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). Thereby, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall or a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a can, for example, enter the main body frame base unit 300 on the open side of the main body frame 4 in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. Since the left hand can be placed to support the body and the right hand can be extended to the back side of the main body frame 4 or the back side of the game board 5, when the left hand is placed on the main body frame base unit 300, it is charged by itself When the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electric discharge is transmitted to the main body frame base unit 300 and transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, it is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the door frame metal ground wire, and the frame ground substrate 559 is grounded to the island facility. It is transmitted to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the wire and removed from the pachinko machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 as described above, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the door frame metal ground. Although the frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, the frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 via the wire. The wire is not electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, but is electrically connected to the terminal of the power supply substrate 630 of the main body frame 4 so as to electrically connect the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply substrate 630. It may be. The door frame 3 is used to decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and includes various decorative portions. The various decorative portions may have no decorative plating at all. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via a wiring not shown in the figure, Although the frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the island facility ground wire, the door frame metal ground wire is not electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, and the body frame The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 may be electrically connected by electrically connecting to the terminals of the fourth power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 is supplied with AC 24V from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral). The L terminal of the power supply board 630 to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board 630 is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against excessive voltage transiently is provided on the power supply substrate 630. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and current flows and the excessive voltage disappears. In addition, it has a performance to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board 630 by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the pachinko machine 1. Is done.

[Arrangement of main control board box and drive board box]
Here, the arrangement of the main control board box 1320 and the drive board box 1730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board.

  As described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. As described above, the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200, as shown in FIG. 70, the rear face of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730.

  Explaining this arrangement, as described above, the insertion port 1311aba for inserting the metal setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. The front surfaces of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a are flush with the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. In other words, the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab do not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. When an operator performs the work of mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, temporarily place it on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. For this reason, the temporarily placed game board 5 may be stopped during work, and the operator's leg may hit the game board 5 and fall down.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200, the rear face of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Adopts a configuration in which a distance dimension da is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. As a result, when the worker places the game board 5 temporarily on or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls down, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5. Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 are in contact with the floor of the game hall because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the main control board box 1320. A space is securely formed between the outer cylinder 1311aa of the key switch 1311a and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab between the floor of the game hall. In can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the gaming hall.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wirings for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island equipment in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids, and other electrical drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 is bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented. In a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200, the rear face of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is the cover of the drive board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface of the body, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 via the slit 641, The outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder which are blocked by the cover body of the driving board box 1730 and cannot enter the main control board box 1320 and the tip of the unconnected wiring is provided in the setting change board 1311 Contact with the front portion of 1311ab can be reliably prevented.

  Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring contacts the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder 1311ab provided on the setting change board 1311, the resin-type setting key switch 1311a has the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting. Since the key cylinder 1311ab is molded from non-conductive resin, there is no problem, but in the metal type setting key switch 1311a, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal. As described above, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the gold of the setting key switch 1311a is formed. A pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1, SLH2 having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed in the frame plate 1311ad made of metal can be inserted, The setting change board 1311 is electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, and the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310). ) Is not exposed via the setting key switch 1311a, so there is no influence on the board ground of the main control board 1310 which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game via the setting change board 1311. Fluctuates the ground line that transmits the ground (ground). Rukoto is not. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are formed of a non-conductive resin. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 do not contact each other and are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially parallel to each other without contacting each other.

[Modification]
In the setting key switch 1311a described above, a predetermined number of tumbler pins are arranged in the setting key cylinder to be accommodated, but a switch in which more tumbler pins are arranged may be adopted. In this way, security can be further improved, and if it is mass-produced and widely available in the market, the unit price can be reduced and it can contribute to cost reduction. FIG. 71 shows a case where a setting key switch 1311a ′ that accommodates a setting key cylinder in which more tumbler pins are arranged is mounted on the setting change board 1311 than the setting key cylinder that is accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a. explain. FIG. 71 is a modified example 1 (a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board in a state where the main control board box is attached to the game board, in which the main control board box is attached to the game board. It is the modification 2 (b) which shows the lower part of the left view of the game board. In FIG. 71, the same components as described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above, FIG. As shown, the front surfaces of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a ′ protrude from the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a ′. The front surface of the drive board box 1730 has a distance dimension db with respect to the rear surface of the cover body, and is disposed so as to protrude rearward of the game board 5. In order to protect the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a ′ and the setting key cylinder 1311ab protruding from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, the protective cover 1304 is pivoted on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320. It is supported and can be opened and closed. The protective cover 1304 is formed with a locking projection (not shown), and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking projection is formed in the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320. When the locking projection of the protective cover 1304 is released from the locking groove of the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, the protection cover 1304 is pivotally supported to open from the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, and the setting key switch 1311a 'can be accessed.

  By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, when the worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker is mistaken. The protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 abuts the floor of the game hall even if the leg of the game board 5 hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 falls toward the floor of the game hall. The front portion of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a ′ can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by securely forming a space between the floor of the game hall. it can.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wirings for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island equipment in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids, and other electrical drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 is bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented. In a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, a protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it is blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320. Can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a ′ provided on the setting change board 1311 and the front surface portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are formed of a non-conductive resin.

  When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 do not contact each other and are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction. The cover body 1301 of the control board box 1320 is arranged substantially parallel to the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are They are arranged substantially parallel to the vertical direction without contacting each other.

  The board holder 1200 in which the length in the front-rear direction (ie, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in the front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200 is shorter than the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 described above. When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a ' Although the front surface protrudes from the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a ′ is a distance dimension with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the driving board box 1730. It has dc and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5As a result, when the operator places the game board 5 temporarily on or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls down, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a distance dimension dc with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5. Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 are in contact with the floor of the game hall because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the main control board box 1320. A space is securely formed between the outer cylinder 1311aa of the key switch 1311a ′ and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab between the floor of the game hall. It can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the gaming hall between. In other words, when the worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. The front and back directions of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200 ′ in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the front portions of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a ′ do not come into contact with the floor of the game hall even if they fall down. That is, the length in the depth direction) is adjusted. It should be noted that the front and back direction of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200 ′ (ie, the depth direction) so that the front portions of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a ′ do not contact the floor of the game hall. In addition to this length, a recess is formed in the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100 to which the board holder 1200 ′ is attached, and the depth of this recess (the length in the front-rear direction (ie, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1). ), Or the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 by the recess and the substrate holder 1200 ′ may be adjusted.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wirings for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island equipment in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids, and other electrical drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 is bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented. In a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200 ′, the rear face of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is the driving board box 1730. Since the distance between the rear surface of the cover body and the distance dc is arranged near the front side of the game board 5, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 via the slit 641. , The outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a ′ and the setting which are blocked by the cover body of the driving board box 1730 and cannot enter the main control board box 1320 and the tip of the unconnected wiring is provided in the setting change board 1311. Contact with the front surface portion of the key cylinder 1311ab can be reliably prevented. Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are formed of a non-conductive resin.

  In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 do not contact each other and are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially parallel to each other without contacting each other.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 30 thru | or FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is operated by the player rotating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111, and the game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. B, that is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5 a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp inlet 2501. .

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest part (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510), While coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N, the region on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. When the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first probability is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2501, the side unit There is a possibility that it will be received in the general winning opening 2001 of 2200, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 or the like. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. Section 2511), it is discharged above the gate part 2003 of the center accessory 2500 through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the portion 2003, the gate portion 2003 passes with a certain probability.

  The distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first distribution passage 2521 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006, and an entrance that is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. The second distribution passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the first circulation passage 2521 and enters the upstream space 2511 and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not contact (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right hit), the player enters the second distribution passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 flows through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 is guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the gate portion 2003, and the gate portion 2003 is not much moved. It passes through the right side of the gate part 2003 without passing through. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is guided to the left from the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the gate portion 2003, and is high. Pass through the gate part 2003 with probability.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the attacker unit 2400 The closed second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2450 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate unit 2003 is positioned at the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 with a very high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. Enter the attacker right passage 2422. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003 or the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate part 2003 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted between the gate part 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to the left of the attacker right passage 2422 with a very high probability, and enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability.

  Note that a general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422. When the game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001 and detected by the general winning port sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 comes into contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 and enters the second start port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability. It distributes on the second start door 2411. When the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 does not enter the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B enters the attacker lower right passage 2426 and is related to the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005. Without being discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the closed second start opening door 2411.

  When the game ball B enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is “normal hit”, and the second start opening door 2411 is When in the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B that has entered the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and has not been received by the second start opening 2004 is discharged to the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 side and rolled on the closed big winning opening door 2413. Later, it is discharged into the game area 5a and discharged out of the game area 5a through the out port 1008. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and the special winning opening guide shelf 2424, and the intermediate passage 2427 is open. The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the winning prize exit guidance shelf 2424 side enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being related to the big prize winning port 2005.

  Because of the above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 so much, so that the second start port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B. The normal lottery result is not often drawn, and the game ball B is not received much at the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, since the game balls B that have circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 pass through the gate part 2003 with a high probability, the normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate part 2003 of the game balls B ( “Normal hit”) is highly likely to be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received at the second starting port 2004.

  For this reason, since the player performs a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511. In addition, the driving strength of the gaming ball B must be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the gaming ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by giving a change to the operation of driving the game ball B, and to make the player enter the operation of the game ball B to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit” “)” Is generated and a lottery of a special lottery result is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “15R big hit A”, “15R big hit B”, and the like. .

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special variation time has elapsed, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 350 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be received, or the predetermined winning opening 2005 is given. When any of the conditions for accepting the number of game balls B (for example, 10) is satisfied, an open / close pattern that closes the game balls B in an unacceptable state (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Repeat a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it is “15R big hit”, 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the “big hit”, when the big winning opening 2005 is opened due to the big hit gaming state, when the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the sorting piece 2415, the big hit game After the state ends, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is a time variation that changes the probability of changing the probability that a special lottery result such as “big hit” will be drawn for a predetermined number of fluctuations or the display time of an effect image that suggests the special lottery result. This is to maintain the state.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  As described above, when the special winning lot 2005 is opened by the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the second distribution passage When the game ball B is operated to aim at the entrance of 2522, the operation of the game ball must be finely adjusted. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest in games will be reduced. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the first Since the game ball B can be distributed to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (the big winning opening 2005 side) through the two start opening guiding shelves 2423, it is easy even without adjusting the delicate driving operation. The game ball B can be received into the big prize opening 2005 by the driving operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state, and the driving operation of the game ball B according to the gaming state is sharp. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, 15R big hit game A, 15R big hit game B, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern string fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). And the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2450 are set to have a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that causes the unit 161 to be operated. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 161 can be raised and made conspicuous by the first elevating drive motor 180a and the second elevating drive motor 182, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 160. be able to.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, and the back first effect unit 3100 and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. , And the back third stage production unit 3300, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission stage, a movable stage, and the like. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the back first of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. Using the effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, the back third effect unit 3300, etc. as appropriate, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. It can be entertained and it can suppress that a player's interest in a game falls.

[8. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 64 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 72, and FIG. 74 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the behavior of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation The display process will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as “main control MPU”.

[8-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control, special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and an initial value for hit judgment used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating the big hit gaming state For the determination of the symbol random number to be used for the determination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display and the initial value of this symbol random number Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and determination for this normal symbol Normal value determination random number for normal symbol used for determination of initial value of random number for normal use and normal symbol for use in determination of variable display pattern of normal symbol variably displayed on normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values within the specified numerical range one after another, and once all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value within the predetermined numerical range and Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number when the value is acquired from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination.

  In the present embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU when the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on or in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when they do not match, the normal value per-symbol determination initial value determination random number is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU. An initial value derivation that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that extracts the ID code from the counter and updates the random number for determination per normal symbol based on the extracted ID code Run the physical, fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is derived by using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is performed when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a two-stage security measure by executing and a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is taken out from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU and this taken out ID code is used as an initial value determining random number for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are attached, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if a momentary power failure occurs at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable ball can be opened and closed and the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. A gaming state cannot be generated.

[8-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control by the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM here. It operates as a function of a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is not cleared when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI. If the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW, it is determined that the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. It is determined to be performed, and it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. It should be noted that since this is a very short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, actually, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. The operator operates the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  When determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 0 (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (that is, a main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) This is a flag indicating whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing various information and a value of 0 when not erasing various information. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU detects the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key at the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. Is inserted, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned on by turning it 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. It should be noted that since it is extremely short in the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18, the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a is The pachinko machine 1 is powered on after the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

  In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and sets the key switch according to the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or a signal for setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area). 1311ab is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change or confirmation display of setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when 1311ab is turned on. A value of 1 is set when the confirmation display is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display are not permitted. Note that the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. Note that when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Can receive various commands.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of a power failure warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. Is determined (step S25). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  In step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG does not have a value of 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). Although the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0, the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied. Then, it is determined that various types of information are to be deleted as in the case where the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 1 (step S27). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. If it is determined that there is, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this setting value confirmation display processing, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

  Subsequent to step S28 or in the determination at step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG Is determined to be 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0), a checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S29, the main control MPU sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, the main control MPU determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S29 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, an error display process is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the power is turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Note that the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This routine is again performed by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 after turning it clockwise by 60 degrees clockwise. The main control side power-on process is started. In step S14, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and in step S16A described above, sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. At the same time, in the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined based on the setting key ON signal. Is set to ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. Therefore, in the determination in step S25 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value. 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 1, It is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, and after the setting change process in step S37, which will be described later, in a process in step S38, which will be described later, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. By clearing it, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and advance the game (hereinafter referred to as “first RAM error canceling method”).

  As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off and the setting key cylinder 1311ab remains at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). Thus, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. In step S14, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and in step S16A described above, sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. On the other hand, in the above-described step S18, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the switch 1311a is not set to ON and the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is determined in step S26 described above. Is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 That is, the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but it is determined that various information is to be deleted in the same manner as when the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. By clearing all areas of the built-in RAM except for a specific area, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and advance the game (hereinafter referred to as “second RAM error canceling method”). .

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, an error display in step S33 is performed, and the main control built-in RAM When there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or the information cannot be trusted), two cancellation methods, a first RAM error cancellation method and a second RAM error cancellation method It can be done by. As a result, when there is no need to change the setting value at all, the second RAM error canceling method using the RWM clear button 633z can be used to cancel the RAM error.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if it is determined that the main control side power-off process has been completed normally, the main control MPU has a built-in main control as a power recovery. A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. Therefore, the main control-side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If a value of 1 is not set in FLG, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 1, that is, a predetermined set value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, a setting change process is performed (step S37). The setting change process will be described in detail later, but is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error release switch) that also has three functions. Here, setting switching for selecting and switching a setting value is performed. Acts as a button function. A signal (setting value selection switching signal) indicating that every time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is displayed. When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned off from the ON operation, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU. To do.

  In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0, that is, predetermined. If the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but it is determined that various types of information are to be erased as in the case where the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. (Step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various types of information are to be erased, the main control built-in RAM is always terminated when the setting change process ends. The predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is excluded (the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specific area of all the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the “specific area” is a count of the number of game balls collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5. And an out-sphere counting dedicated area in which results (total number) are stored. The set value exclusive area stores a set value that is changed in a setting change process described later, and the out ball count exclusive area is a game ball collected by the out port 1008 that is counted in a ball count process described later. The count result (total number) of numbers is stored.

  The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, the main control MPU is a logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. Is a command to clear the RAM, when various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU is stored. A unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and an initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code is performed. The fixed value is set to the normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining the initial value of the determination random number for normal symbol described above. Tosuru.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main winning ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU”) for setting an initial value in the main control built-in WDT for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time until the main control MPU is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU) is reached by the time until the counted time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and timing is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state is used, and a random number is stored in a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU for updating by hardware. The setting such as latching and acquisition is performed, and activation of the hard random number circuit with built-in main control is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Once all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The other values are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information by creating a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command To remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning voltage as described above. The The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S54 that there is no power failure warning signal input, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination, initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal has not been input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S56. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S12 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU performs a RAM access prohibition setting (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. When the control cannot be performed, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU is forcedly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and the main control side power-on process is executed again. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control-side power-off process at the time of power-off and the checksum calculated in step S29 when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control built-in RAM. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or is momentarily stopped, and this main control side power-on process is performed by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Further, in the determination in step S25, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1. If so, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and in the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area. In the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL -When FLG is value 1 and setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, that is, a predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied If it is determined that various types of information are to be deleted in the same manner as in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is specified in the process of step S38. With the exception of the band to completely erase (clear). As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is changed. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing, the main value can be changed even if the setting value can be changed and determined (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process). The control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 Is in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which the probability variation (probability variation) is reached), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the next business start. Therefore, an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. In addition, when the setting value is determined to be changed, the setting value obtained by the setting value before the setting changing process is obtained even when the current setting value is maintained when the setting changing process is performed. It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value. Only possession is permitted and limited to 2-3 people. In the present embodiment, even if the setting value is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, an attendant such as a game hall clerk erases (clears) the game backup information. When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch when it is necessary to turn on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the game backup information is mainly stored. It can be erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the problem in the case where the process after step S26 is promoted after the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described.

  As described above, when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous power failure. That is, even when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island in the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power supply to the facility is cut off until a time of about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is being performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the island facilities of the game hall In the case where the power supply from is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery. If a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the waiting time is reached, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged to is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within the period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side described later Even if timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-on processing is performed. Kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, all of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch at the time of power recovery, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall and the game called RAM clear. There is a problem that the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication by a staff member such as a hall clerk.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from progressing. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24. If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation stored value of step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is performing the game, and the pachinko machine Even when the power to 1 is cut off, the game information by the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU by supplying the power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2. Step of backup processing for storing various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off process composed of the process of 58 to step S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU of the main control MPU When restarting, it is determined that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby allowing the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control side The charge charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as a direct current + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure notification signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again. As long as remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game.

  By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is performed in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are determined by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting and starting main control timer interruption processing described later. The system adopts a mechanism that can avoid updating various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use. Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) The various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for the counter), etc.) is completely covered by software so that the main control side power-off process is reliably completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, such as various pieces of information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter), etc., so that it is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is built in as transmission information Store in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, a problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, A problem will be described in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the special prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will transfer from the state closed by the member to the open state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the That is, for example, a main winning board 1 count display command that indicates the number of game balls that have been entered into the big winning opening 2005 and detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the main control board. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing the transition from the existing state to the closed state (that is, closing start of the round of the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round of the big hit gaming state (fifth round), the attack solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening / closing member. To move to the current state (that is, the fifth round of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the five rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time reduction state, and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a player indicating that the movable piece is open) that indicates that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece, thereby the second start opening. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while 2004 is open, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored to start driving the start-up solenoid 2404 and close the movable piece. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the gaming state is such that the gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the game instruction screen for entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game he played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers after power failure, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening / closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game is in the big hit gaming state and the attacker solenoid 2 A screen that informs that the winning prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member by starting the drive of 05 (for example, “It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. The game ball is inserted into the big winning opening. The screen that tells the player the message “Please play the game to play a ball” is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will receive the grand prize opening 2005 after power is restored. In the above example, for example, a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. When a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, driving of the start port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece as a return destination of the main control board 1310. Screen indicating that the second starting port 2004 is open (for example, “A movable piece is open. Please play a game so that a game ball enters the second starting port.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. A game of making a ball can be instructed.

  As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S29, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and are always cleared in step S38 except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, first, a power-on state command is transmitted, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, followed by a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on status command is an RWM clear button on the payout control board 633 when power is turned on (including when power is turned on, and when power is restored by power failure or instantaneous power failure). When the 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and at power-on (in addition to power-on, Including power recovery and power recovery after a power failure or short interruption), any of the low probability short-time state, high probability short-time state, low probability non-short-time state, and high probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether to return in the state (probability and short time state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What kind of game specifications (for example, when the probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbol variations (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state of

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is not known whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur).

  As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the types of works While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[8-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 74 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and normal electric symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later. Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, or from the second starting opening sensor 2402. , Detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403, detection signal from the out sensor 3032, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 Signal (This signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, and may be masked to omit reading), the door frame opening switch 4a A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the award ball control process described below is read, and the input information of the main control built-in RAM as input information Store in the storage area. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command classified into the other corresponding to this is transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2101, a corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal, a start opening winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that do not match the result are treated as having no incoming game balls or being ignored.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those in which the empty terminal process is performed) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Since the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, The detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the out opening sensor 3032, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, and the detection from the vibration sensor 3005. Signal, signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (the signal from this RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control timer interruption process which is this routine, so it is masked and read. ), A detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process to be described later It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that notifies the control board 633 that it has been normally received.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 whether or not the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display informing that a fault has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number that is updated by the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the design random number is a random number related to winning determination (winning determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter is incremented. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The normal value determination random number per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the normal symbol determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random numbers for normal symbol determination, the winning determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update processing. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are set in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball count process (step S107). In this ball count process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 is input to the game area 5a which is partitioned into the game board 5 When the out-port sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the provided out-port 1008, the value 1 is added to the value of the collected-ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out-port 1008. Perform (increment) operation. The main control MPU sets the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 in the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to storing, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU creates a ball collection command to notify that when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches ten. And stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535) and further adds (increments) the value of the collection ball counter by 1 to the collection ball counter. The counter value overflows to a value of 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Or create a self-check command to check the connection state between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main award ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the award ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the award ball When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. Created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on this input information. In order to notify that, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5. Based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as “various winning ports provided on the game board 5”) such as the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005, etc. The number of game balls to be released is counted, and is stored and updated in the award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls is over (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the fact, and as transmission information The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value is used as the main prize ball number information output determination counter value. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the main control MPU reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, although the second start port 2411 is not in the open state, the second start port 2004 has entered the game ball B or the grand prize port door 2413 is not in the open state. First, it is checked whether there is an abnormal state related to the prize ball, such as a game ball B entering the big prize opening 2005. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred in the fraud detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. Thus, the main control MPU outputs a security signal, which can contribute to an attendant such as a game hall clerk being able to find an abnormal state related to a prize ball at an early stage. Note that the security signal that is output when it is determined that an abnormal condition related to the prize ball has occurred is a security signal that is output when it is determined that a magnet is to be described later, or a vibration that is described later. This is the same signal as the security signal that is output when it is determined that the goto has been performed. In addition, the security signal is output by the main control MPU to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. However, after the main control MPU transmits a command for instructing the output of the security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU sends the command to the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. A security signal may be output to the hall computer installed in the computer.

  Further, in the cheating detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, cheating using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as “magnet goto”). And the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (incremented). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that magnet got is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is obtained. As a result, the value 0 (zero) is set. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) .), A magnet gossip command that is classified into a notification display that informs that magnet got is performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a magnet is being carried out in the fraud detection process, the main computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is The control MPU outputs a security signal, so that a staff member such as a game hall clerk can discover the magnet at an early stage.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, the fraudulent act due to vibration (hereinafter referred to as “vibration goto”). And the value of the vibration goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). The value of the vibration goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the vibration goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is obtained. As a result, the value 0 (zero) is set. When the value of the vibration goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) .), A vibration goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that vibration goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the vibration is being performed in the fraud detection process, the main computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is When the control MPU outputs a security signal, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can contribute to finding a vibration goto at an early stage.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is input when not in the big hit gaming state (big prize opening) In the case of occurrence of an abnormal prize winning such as when a game ball enters in 2005), a prize abnormality display command that is classified into an alarm display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. .

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a magnet goat and / or a vibration goto is detected, a value 1 is set to the cheating detection flag FD-FLG as a fraud detection, while the magnet goat and the vibration goto are set. If not detected, a fraudulent act detection flag FD-FLG is set to 0 as a fraudulent act is not detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. In addition, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning a prize opening, a value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines, based on the value of the above-described fraud detection flag FD-FLG, that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0, that is, no fraud has been detected. Sometimes it is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that this is the detection, the firing permission logic is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. It should be noted that the logic of the firing permission signal is determined by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic is set as an initial value (default). Although it is configured, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after power is restored), it is set to the firing permission logic.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control when the latch signal is input Obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (the jackpot It is determined whether or not a game state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”)), and the counter value for updating the design random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (determined the hit type) whether or not any of the hit type determination values matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 2101, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. If it is based on the above, a variety of commands related to special figure 2 tuning effects are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a big hit gaming state is entered, various commands classified as jackpot related (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 closing display command, a large winning combination, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 The lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp is turned on so that the round indicator lamp is lit. The power is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp is turned on to light the 15 round display lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on or off the occurrence of a short time in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the counter value for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per-random determination random number is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning opening winning information. The data is stored in the normal winning slot winning information storage area of the RAM.

  In the normal winning award winning prize information storage area, the 0th section to the third section (four sections) are provided, and the normal winning opening is in order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. The winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  Information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning slot winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning award winning prize information is set, the normal winning award winning prize information stored in the first winning prize winning information storage in the first winning prize winning information storage in the first winning prize winning information storage is stored in the second winning section of the ordinary winning prize winning prize information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, and the ordinary winning opening prize information in the third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage is in the second section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, respectively. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is shifted to become an empty area. For example, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal winning slot winning information storage, the normal winning slot winning information in the first winning section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning prize. In the 0th section of the mouth winning information storage, the ordinary winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage, respectively. The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage are vacant areas. Here, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning slot winning information is set as the holding ball and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 Based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal holding indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the holding indicator is turned on, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Following the normal winning award winning process, read out the normal winning award winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and take out the value of the random number for judgment per normal symbol from the read out the normal winning award winning information. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that a gaming state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol taken out matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect production are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while the extracted normal When the random number for determination per symbol does not match the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. , Create various commands that are classified as related to the usual figure synchronization production, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as output information To remember. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of normal winning) is ½.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the winning prize opening 2005 or a starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes a movable piece. 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, and the launch permission logic Is a base monitor that outputs a firing permission signal set in the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633 and displays a count result (total number) of game balls collected by the out port 1008 A display signal is output to 1310h, and a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g is output.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, and classified as related to the jackpot. Various commands to be executed (for example, a winning prize 1 count display command corresponding to a winning prize count command based on a detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403 when a game ball having entered the winning prize opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric character effects, various commands categorized as notification displays, various types categorized as status displays Commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided in the game board 5. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to the outside as the main prize ball number information. The main prize ball number information output command for instructing transmission to the hall computer via the terminal board 558 and various commands classified into specific histories (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008) A ball collection command that reports that every time 10 balls are reached, a setting change command that reports that the setting value has been changed, or something that is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) stored in the main control built-in RAM An error display command that informs the user that the setting value is stored, and a setting value that conveys that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area (to be described later) in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed. Sure display command, etc.) are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are configured as main peripheral serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial manager and complete transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after the power is turned on, this is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In order to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, as the main peripheral serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in turn, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read out from the game backup information and the various information is Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  When the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 each time a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the received ball For each collection command, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (that is, collected at the out port 1008 is stored) in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). The total number of game balls to be updated) and the updated date and time) are updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the game hall business hours have ended without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the outlet 1008) Sphere collection information in which the total number of spheres) is associated with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 has started the ball collection information stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the day, and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection history information. The counted value stored and held as the ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. You may use both the counted value and the sum total of the counted value so far.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine is output to the peripheral control board 1510. Be able to. That is, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 72 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. In the setting of the work area, a power-on state command classified as power-on in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the power-on status command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and then the power-on main control return destination command is configured. The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. Subsequently, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main-control-side power-on process shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the process shown in FIG. 73, when the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, Status that constitutes a power-on state command as serial data, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes a main control return destination command at power-on , Mode, and sum value are sent to the main control board inspection process inspecting device, and then the main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command at power-on is configured, status, mode, and sum value order To transmit to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[8-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 75 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the set value is acquired, it may be read out or extracted. However, when the set value is extracted, the extracted set value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates various values stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum. The checksum is performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process (at the time of power-off) in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same determinations as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has game control information such as various information, a checksum value (sum value), and a backup flag BK-FLG. This flag indicates whether or not the data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not normally completed Is done.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When the value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination of step S208, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 is within the normal range. It is determined whether or not any of the values is within the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S208 that it is not within the normal range, it sets the setting value 1 that is the initial value for the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the set values 1 to 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is the normal range. However, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and the setting value 1 that is the initial value may be set with respect to the setting value acquired in step S200. .

  In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination in step S208. When it is determined that the MPU is in the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error release switch) that also has three functions. Here, setting switching for selecting and switching a setting value is performed. Acts as a button function. This determination is made by reading a signal (setting value selection switching signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and from the setting value setting change signal from the RWM clear button 633z. It is determined whether a detection signal is input. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the selection switching signal of the set value from the RWM clear button 633z is input, while the set value from the RWM clear button 633z is When the selection switching signal is not input, it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated.

  In step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value and updating the operation (step S218). ). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, the predetermined area The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set to.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and updates the setting indicator 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is turned off. Is determined (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and sets the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position (i.e., The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder turning OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, the setting key OFF operation It determines that that is not.

  In the determination in step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key is not turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S216 again and determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. . In step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, performs the determination of step S222, and sets the key. When it is determined that is not operated, the process returns to the determination in step S216 again. When the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is operated, the set value is changed every time the operation is performed. The value is incremented by 1 and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed. Displayed on the container 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored until it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the setting value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure is the main value. Since it is not stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM, it is discarded and the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, the predetermined area Therefore, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the processing in step S224, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and power is restored, the set value updated when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Are stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU stops the output of the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and updates the setting indicator 1310g. Is not displayed (step S228).

  Subsequent to step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change or confirmation display of setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time of setting, and to perform setting change or confirmation display of the setting value The value is set to 1 when permission is allowed, and the value is set to 0 when permission to perform setting change or confirmation display is not allowed. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display are not permitted thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that determined in step S208. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is normal in step S224. It is determined whether or not any of the set value 1 to the set value 6 is within the range. When it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  In step S233, when determining that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), and subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 73, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. The peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. This is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by a setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, the peripheral control MPU updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in a built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S233 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the power is turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 76 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S350, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S350 is within a normal range (step S352). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 91. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are preset. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, in order to reconfirm that the set value is acquired in step S350 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM Is determined to be one of the set values 1 to 6 within the normal range, and when it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

  In the determination in step S352, when determining that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g, thereby setting the indicator. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S354).

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S352 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S356) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the power is turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Subsequent to step S354, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation (step S358). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and sets the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position (i.e., When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the rotation position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. Based on an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is received. Entered Setting key when there is no determined not to be OFF operation.

  In the determination in step S358, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S358 again and repeats the determination in step S358 until the setting key is turned OFF.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main signal is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting indicator 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S360).

  Subsequent to step S360, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S361). As described above, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change or confirmation display of setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time of setting, and to perform setting change or confirmation display of the setting value The value is set to 1 when permission is allowed, and the value is set to 0 when permission to perform setting change or confirmation display is not allowed. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display are not permitted thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S362), then creates a set value confirmation display command and sets transmission information (step S364), and then in step S364. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the set transmission information (set value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S366), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 73. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 is the same as that shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S362, the transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) set in step S364 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main peripheral serial data. This is done before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to give priority to the peripheral control board 1510 by the setting value confirmation display command that the confirmation of the setting value has been completed. The set value confirmation display command indicates that the set value confirmation display process as this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). ).

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 72, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 72 (FIG. 75). The processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 72) and the processing performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 72 (step S356 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 76). It is the process performed in.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 77 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted. Can be informed that the launch is permitted, while if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, the launch can be stopped (not permitted). .

  The error display process which is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 72, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 75) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 72 (specifically, FIG. 76). The main control MPU may perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 73. Therefore, the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 74 cannot be performed. It is not possible to carry out the firing enable signal setting process in step S113 that. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the fire permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 72, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. One process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 75) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 72 (specifically, When the main control MPU is started in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 76, after the power is restored in step S400, the error display process which is this routine is started. However, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired, the firing permission signal logic is issued. It is set to stop logic (firing unauthorized logic) to the fire control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 via the reset function main control output circuit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port.

  Subsequent to step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 includes the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 75, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same as that in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. The control board transmission command transmission process, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 76, and the peripheral control board transmission in step S120 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as command transmission processing. The error display process which is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 72, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 72 (FIG. 75). And the process performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 76, and ends and ends as described above. By this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the serial communication initial setting in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays error display history information (information in which the error display command is associated with the received date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Update.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a white background “A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant” in the blue background image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. While controlling to display the message image of the character, the volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510 with the announcement “RAM error has occurred. Please call me” Regardless of which, the maximum volume is forcibly set and control is performed from various speakers. The process of performing the RAM error notification by the error display command is the process having the highest priority. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to transmit another error and receives the error display command, the RAM error notification is performed. Is the top priority.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 147 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a continuation of processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 78. FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[9-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIGS. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is used to set the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs the wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 1 is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions, and is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM here. It operates as a function of a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information. This determination is made when it is determined that the RAM is not cleared when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z While it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RWM clear button 633z It determines with the press operation part being operated.

  In the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (that is, a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete the payout information (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process described later (at power-off). (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning voltage as described above. Is done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination in step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal is not input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  In the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. The number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal. In or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The number of game balls that have been paid out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later. Is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the payout.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process in step S550 described later, and the stored value is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, the award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch, it becomes an error release signal for notifying that the error displayed on the error LED display is released). Detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from payout detection sensor 591, detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, BRQ signal from CR unit, BRDY signal and CR connection signal, transmitted by command transmission processing described later The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands have been normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, a ball bite determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball bite state caused by the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are repeatedly paid out. At this time, time management of the judgment condition and the mismatch counter reset judgment time set is performed. For example, when the ball scratch determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball scratch determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gummy judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set).

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 350 is executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, the payout control MPU performs a momentary power failure or power failure. Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery By restoring the values to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery. With wear, so that it can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of various signal exchanges between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 350 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, pay a rental ball as an error status output setting to the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thereby, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 350 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored at the time of power recovery, so it is extremely early after power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a ball cannot be performed can be output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and a payout device 350 is supplied to the CR unit. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is informed that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 The number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above based on the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, and the full tank and the ball shortage check process from the full tank detection sensor 154. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is full is stored in the state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information that indicates that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, the above-described ball breakage determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball break check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball break is transmitted to indicate that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number. The ball breakage information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball play are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, the above-described ball break information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball break information Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays based on the various information are created. To the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball break information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number based on the ball break information, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, and this power failure warning If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S554, the timer update process is performed. In step S556, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed, a command reception process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, a main operation setting process is performed in step S562, and an LED is displayed in step S564. Display data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the process of the payout control MPU varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has received a power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process when power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[9-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 78 to 80.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 81 (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 147 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 84 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on a single semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 82 under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in a very short time. Can be As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below, the peripheral control MPU outputs a command or pachinko machine related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying date and time information and time information specifying hour, minute and second are acquired from the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current control information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. The peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the peripheral control MPU can be received. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1006 again to determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  In step S1006, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, the peripheral control MPU first sets the steady process flag SP-FLG to a value of 1. Is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs a presentation operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, and a press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382, the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information obtained by operating the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and the press operation) Rotation based on the RAM of the peripheral control MPU to which the operation history information etc. of the unit 303 is set) Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the work 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is set according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the presentation proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, based on a lamp pallet setting table composed of a specified brightness value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light; Set each. While the production is in progress, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one luminance designation value ranging from the luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance is set, the above-described floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to become the set luminance designation value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the brightness designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the specified brightness value, one specified brightness value can be set in a 32-step range from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st specified brightness value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the 31st luminance that becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. One luminance designation value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the clockwise direction, and the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance (lights off). When the first luminance designated value is set to the next highest luminance level after the value, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance designated value toward the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light change along the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), while the rotation operation unit 302 is turned off. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness when rotating clockwise, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness) toward the first brightness specified value (for example, Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a staff member of a game hall clerk, etc.) can set the brightness during the production is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or a game hall clerk) Etc.) can be set to a desired luminance by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the effect, the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance are obtained. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) as an image. It can be done. In the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

  The normal palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of the 17 levels is selected in steps of 5% from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is a designated value. , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the luminance designated value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designated value that is the luminance designated value described above. Of the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value, the value corresponds to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In this embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance as the normal pallet value for various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Among various decorative boards that are set as the above-described gradation information and are provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light, a palette for a specific decorative board (LED that feels dazzling to the player) (not shown) A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  In the special palette value, the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the gradation information described above. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32-level ranges from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which are the luminance specified values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance (lights off) is obtained. The lowest possible brightness is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While being set along the normal palette value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) rotates the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set along the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designated value by the operation 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, as direct light, The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value at which the minimum brightness (off) is set) Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance is turned off). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  Moreover, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of production is set, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can exert a more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance. Even if one luminance designation value is set over the luminance designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance designation value is set for a specific decorative board. For other decorative boards, one specified brightness value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set, so the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark) The luminance adjustment can be performed very easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although indirect light from the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the brightness compared to direct light, the special pallet value that is different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) for LEDs used as indirect light. Thus, the brightness can be set. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually managed by the palette value, so that the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of an LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the peripheral control MPU and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control MPU ( 1 frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. Yes. This can prevent delays in processing time, but so-called frame dropping will occur, but it will be possible to produce music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from various speakers by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize production.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data from the head screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU is indicated. The pointer is updated.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the head light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, the sound command data that indicates the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, In order to instruct which sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU, the pointer is updated.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be performed, it is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process to be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to holding prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In this received command analysis process, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyzes various commands. The peripheral control MPU reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. And set the RAM in the peripheral control MPU.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and reads (extracts) light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. The player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value described above. When one luminance designation value up to the 31st luminance designation value is set, the above-described gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to become the set luminance designation value. It can be done.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU indicates that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing start of a start opening winning effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a variation pattern command for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, It is analyzed whether or not it is a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start pending changes, and a winning prize 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is received at the winning prize opening 2005. Recognize that there is.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyzes various commands. The various commands include various commands classified as related to Special Figure 1 tuned effects, various commands classified as related to Special Figure 2 tuned effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized in relation to figure production effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display, various commands categorized in status display, various commands categorized in test relation, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Thereby, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU and a plurality of tracks in the sound source built in the peripheral control MPU. , And a track number for instructing which track is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning processing, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, hour / minute / second which is time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is converted to the peripheral control ROM. Is read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

  When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 (for one screen). One frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, Read (extract) from the peripheral control ROM and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data and outputs the sound data. Set the output channel to be used according to the channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so as to obtain a volume corresponding to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, from the output channel set in the sound data creation process. Outputs sound data to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The values are converted to 1024 levels up to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. Music and sound effects flow from various speakers by controlling the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0-6. In this way, music and sound effects flow from various speakers by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

  Specifically, for the production sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is rotated. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) Until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative pattern change display is started after the change pattern command is received, or 0.5 seconds elapses after the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit and after the decorative pattern confirmation display. The operation can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A certain period of time (in this example, surroundings) when the variable symbol display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) From the time when the control unit receives the variation pattern command until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative symbol variation display starts, or after the stop control command is received at the peripheral control unit after the decoration symbol confirmation display 0.5 By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the time until the second elapses), the resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process Is converted into seven levels of substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is further rotated by the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the production sound can be adjusted by setting the substrate volume by increasing or decreasing the substrate volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control MPU include a plurality of sound sources in the internal sound source of the peripheral control MPU. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from various speakers, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined production sound is the maximum volume, the volume flowing from various speakers is allowed to be the maximum allowable volume by being amplified to the master volume value. It is set to become. Specifically, for the production sound, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually the volume flowing from various speakers. Amplified to the master volume value, serializes the amplified performance sound and outputs it as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sound data incorporated in the track to be used Regardless of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound, Synthesized and volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound, indeed, amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from various speakers, and outputs the amplified notification sound as the audio data serialization.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from various speakers, a brief explanation will be given on the control of flowing the notification sound in order to notify the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1. The sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound are incorporated. The sound data of the track and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set to the volume flowing from various speakers. Is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the various speakers. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from various speakers.

  In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from various speakers for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, the notification sound proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set so far. The volume of the effect sound being performed is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the volume adjustment switch by rotating the volume adjustment switch (at this time, the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are changed). When the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operation, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound), and flows from various speakers.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from various speakers, the volume of the production sound is increased when the notification sound flows in order to inform the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1. Although the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from various speakers, the sound that has been muted proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation, so if the notification sound stops flowing from the various speakers after a predetermined period of time, The sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but starts to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the peripheral control MPU controls the volume of the sound from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The sound source can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a game hall clerk operates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of the malfunction or the player's fraud by the notification sound.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the content stored in the SDRAM is provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the regular processing backup area.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1008, and the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. , Step S1014,..., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is inputted from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU to notify that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. To do. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 83 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  In step S1045, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, if it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is directly executed. finish. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. In step S1008 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. In addition to informing the blank signal interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. By telling the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the execution has been completed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to the value in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not it is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. . In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 82 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. 84 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine control section steady process of the peripheral control section power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  In step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33 ms 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. Sometimes, this routine is finished as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the peripheral control MPU adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) is provided. Driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby history information (for example, original signals) of detection signals from the various sensors. Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Or acquiring the movable position, the movable position is grasped.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a rotation operation unit) 302 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, and the like) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of effect sounds output from various speakers is adjusted, or a plurality of decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are mounted. The brightness of various LEDs can be adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set in different areas, and the SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in FIG. 1 and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 82, various processes related to the effects in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  As described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU receives the main peripheral serial data as 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU. The information is taken into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interruption processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 85 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination in step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1 byte reception period timer has not timed out. If it is determined that it is within the period to be acquired, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). ). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the value is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In step S1206, the peripheral control MPU determines that the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and If it is determined that the third byte of the main serial data is not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the peripheral control MPU is in the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). . In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, static discharge occurs and generates noise. It is in a friendly environment.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When received, the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216). This routine ends.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period that can be received is exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and step S1212. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in (2) does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. Determination is made (step S1302). If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines that a power failure notification signal is not input. While sometimes this routine is terminated as it is, when it is determined that a power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1304 that the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been started and the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds, it performs power saving processing ( Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied and backed up to a steady process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, the peripheral control MPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1312 again after determining that the power failure notification signal is not input or following step S1314, and determines whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. judge. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this manner, in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when determining that the power failure warning signal is not input, and the peripheral control While the MPU is reset, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that a power failure warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 82 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal is continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU is not reset immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted because the WDT clear process is not executed. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU is reset because the WDT clear process in Step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with various noises by automatically resetting.

[11. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 2101 as shown in FIG. On condition that the detection signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S2031), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S2032). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 is on (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S2033), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM (step S2034).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S2035). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S2039) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit A”, According to the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the winning prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close, and a sorting piece 2415 for distributing the game ball B received by the big winning prize opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is provided. Drive control is performed, and a process of setting the valid state in the 15th round in which the game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed. Also, when the mode suggests “15R big hit B”, the big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is received as the first receiving opening. The distribution piece 2415 that is distributed to either the 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process of setting the valid state to the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed.

  Here, the “valid state” and “invalid state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, a “valid state” is provided as a state when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008. Here, the “valid state” indicates that in the 15th round in which the game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game balls B are received by the second receiving port 2008, and the high hit state after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is a state that is allowed (validated) to be controlled to a probability state. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the “valid state”, the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the “invalid state” different from the “valid state” is set as a state in which the game ball B is not received at the second receiving port 2008. Here, the “invalid state” is a state in which the game ball B is not accepted by the second receiving port 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 in the “invalid state”, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit game state is ended. In addition, the “invalid state” makes it possible to notify the hall management side of information relating to such an abnormality when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 due to an abnormality such as an illegal act. Therefore, it is set as the period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008. In the present embodiment, the game ball B is set to the “valid state” in a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, and the second receiving port 2008 has a game. When the ball B is accepted, the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state. Further, although the “invalid state” is set for a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which the game balls B are not distributed to the second receiving port 2008, it may be set to “valid state”. Thus, even if it is set to “valid state” in all rounds in the big hit game state, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the first to the 14th rounds. As in the case where the “invalid state” is set in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the “valid state”.

  In the big hit control process (step S2041), after performing the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During the execution of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B), it is possible to distribute the game balls B to the second receiving port 2008 in the first to fifteenth rounds of opening the big winning opening 2005. When the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set since the control is performed to the high probability state (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state. If the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability short time state) after the big hit gaming state is finished. The high probability flag is not set. When the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 98, which will be described later, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the hour / hour counter becomes “0” or The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state is in effect, and is used for big hits (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which are controlled to a short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. Set when exiting based jackpot gaming state. The time-short flag is the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 98 to be described later or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big win or the counter value of the time-count counter becomes “0”. Reset by processing.

  The short-time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the short-time state continues. The short-time state (high probability) When the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) is controlled to the short time state, low probability short time state, the number of times of the short time state is set, and the short time number counter is Each time the special symbol variation display is executed until the counter value reaches “0”, the countdown is performed. However, when the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. Is reset (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S2036), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S2037), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S2036), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S2038). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S2032).

  If it is determined in the process of step S2031 that the first start port sensor 2101 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, FIG. 88 shows. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2041.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S2042). If it is determined in the process of step S2042 that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2043 to 3 are set to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S2045 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S2044, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S2041. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S2041. Whether or not the game is a big hit, if the big win is reached, the type of the big hit, otherwise the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S2045), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S2042 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S2043 to S2045, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first held state. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the first reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to be. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S2041, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S2061).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored (the value of the reserved number counter) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S2062).

  Then, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), and stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the start winning that has occurred is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the execution display device 1600 Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of the variable display according to the start winning is performed as the game effect to be executed or the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is displayed. Can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information relating to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first determination information indicated by the received previous determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S2034).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S2033 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, it is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2051.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on the counter value, the second reserved memory number is the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “4” (step S2052). In the process of step S2052, if it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2053 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2053, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2054, the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S2051. To store.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2052 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control for the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S2053 to S2054, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second on-hold state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (second held number designation command 0 to 1) indicating the second reserved memory number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to be. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S2037). The first special symbol process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S2080)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) in which, for example, a determination process of a mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S2082)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2083).
5). The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop mode. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S2084)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S2080) should be performed in the processing of step S40 described above (see FIG. 72).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S2080).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 92, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S2102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing in steps S2103 and S2104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  After that, as a process of step S2105, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) (step S2106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S2105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S2111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S2112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S2111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 94A is selected (step S2113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S2114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 94 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table at a high probability and used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability short time state). In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, and the setting value is 4 1/289, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6, match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has been won with a jackpot probability of 1/269. The first special random numbers other than the first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a loss determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are out of place. In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, in the second special symbol process executed in step S2038, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, Similar to the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the special random number, 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 3 1/299, the second special random number was won with a big hit probability of 1/289 when the set value was 4, 1/279 when the set value was 5, and 1/269 when the set value was 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the second special random numbers other than that correspond to the loss determination values indicating that they are out of place.

  Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 1 / 31.9 when the set value is 1, 1 / 30.9 when the set value is 2, 1 / 29.9 when the set value is 3, First special random number (at low probability) with a jackpot probability of 1 / 28.9 when the set value is 4, 1 / 27.9 when the set value is 5, and 1 / 26.9 when the set value is 6. The first special random number that is the same as the first special random number set in the big-hit determination table) is matched with the big-hit determination value, and the other first special random numbers are matched with the loss determination value. Each special random number is associated. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state), for each set value, the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won is a low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) And the time-short state (low-probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number Similar to the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the special random number, 1 / 31.9 when the set value is 1, 1 / 30.9 when the set value is 2, and the set value 3 1 / 29.9 when the value is 4, 1 / 28.9 when the value is 4, 1 / 27.9 when the value is 5, and 1 / 26.9 when the value is 6 The second special random number (including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability) matches the jackpot determination value, and the other second special random numbers are lost. The second special random number is set to match the judgment value. It is associated.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that it is a jackpot (step S2115). ), A big hit flag indicating that the change is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S2116), and the first special read out in step S2102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that it is out of place, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S2102 (step S2117). As a result of comparing the reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S2102, if it is determined that the reach is shifted (step S2118), a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set and processing is performed. The process ends (step S2119).

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 95, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S2105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S2121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 94 (B). (Step S2122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S2121, it is determined to be an off symbol as a mode when the first special symbol variation is stopped (step S2124).

  As shown in FIG. 94B, the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) in association with each determination result (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. Opening / closing control of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R big hit gaming state A, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the fifteenth round (opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easily), for example, 20 seconds), when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, When the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the special hit state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set. While the variable display of the symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times, the high probability short-time state is controlled, while the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round. Unacceptable When the can, 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times
2. Opening and closing control of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and opening the big winning opening 2005 for a short time in the fifteenth round (opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) is set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state), and effective in the 15th round If the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the state, the high display is performed until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the big hit gaming state is finished. If the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round while controlling the probability short-time state, a special symbol (the first special symbol and the first symbol after the jackpot gaming state is finished). Determining 15R jackpot B which variation display of the special symbols) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times, from among the two types of jackpot to any jackpot.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A in this example, as the operation schedule of the big prize opening 2005 in the 15th round, the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the predetermined time (4.5) Seconds), the special winning opening 2005 is set to be opened for a long time (20 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds), the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. Then, when opening the long winning opening 2005 (20 seconds) for a long time, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the sorting pieces 2415 is started, and the second receiving port 2008 is operated during the operating period of the sorting pieces 2415. The game ball B is set to be acceptable. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) ) Is set.

  On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B of this example, the operation schedule of the big prize opening 2005 in the 15th round is set so that the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds), the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. The game ball B is set to be receivable at the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the sorting piece 2415. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) ) Is set.

  As described above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are valid in the 15th round (the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, so that the high probability state is reached after the jackpot gaming state is finished. However, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, it is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when the second winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is opened. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and further, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during a period in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the received game balls B to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, the probability that the game ball B will be received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, so the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. The probability of doing is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the winning prize opening 2005 is only briefly opened (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, so it is very difficult to accept the gaming ball B in the winning prize opening 2005. Since the sorting piece 2415 is only operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period in which the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received by the big winning opening 2005 is the second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the probability that the game ball B will be received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, so the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability of doing is also very low.

  As an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the sorting piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10). ), And when the 15th round in 15R jackpot gaming state A and 15R jackpot gaming state B starts, The schedule is started. In this way, by making the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B of this example, the winning prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the winning prize opening 2005 in each of the first to fourteenth rounds. Is set to In addition, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in each of the first to fourteenth rounds, the sorting piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is placed in the first receiving port 2007 instead of the second receiving port 2008 during that period. Is set to be accepted. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, an invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted by the second receiving port 2008, and after the end of the big hit gaming state A state that is not controlled to a high probability state). In this way, in both the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big winning opening 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. A game of whether or not the game ball B is accepted is simply performed when the special winning opening 2005 is opened without performing a game of whether or not (accepted).

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value allocation is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, of the 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot A (15 rounds) that is relatively advantageous to the player. Distribution of 50 judgment values with respect to a big hit with a high probability that the game ball B will be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state with the eye and a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends Is set, however, the 15R big hit B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball B will be accepted by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low, and the big hit gaming state ends. 50 determination values are assigned to a jackpot with a low probability of being controlled to a high probability state later. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R big hit A and 15R big hit B, 65 judgment value distributions are set for the 15R big hit A which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the distribution of 35 judgment values to 15R big hit B which is relatively disadvantageous to the player is set. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B, which is different in the player's advantage, is determined, so what kind of big hit is determined at the time of the first big hit Can be noticed. In addition, in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed. At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, the 15R big hit game A is determined with a higher probability than the big hit on the first special symbol side. it can. Therefore, since the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive time, the game does not become monotonous.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R big hit A is determined, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 15R big hit B is determined, the 15R big hit B symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when 15R jackpot A is determined, 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as a process of step S2125, these lottery results (indicating either the type of jackpot, losing reach or losing (specifying the stop symbol of the first special symbol) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that it may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082) as the process of step S2126, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU starts the left / middle / right decoration symbol variation display based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of left ornament symbol → right ornament symbol → middle ornament symbol. Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU sets 15R out of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the big hit A is specified, it is determined as the 15R big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when the 15R big hit B is specified, it is decided as the 15R big hit B symbol (common with the 15R big hit A symbol). When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is fluctuated and stopped at either the 15R big hit A symbol or the 15R big hit B symbol, it can be determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R big hit A symbol and the 15R big hit B symbol, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B cannot be discriminated.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as an aspect (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, when the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol that is accompanied by the reach symbol. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) If the outlier is specified, it is a detachable design that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 96, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S2141), the type of jackpot determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step If the reach flag is set (step S2143), a reach variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state is selected (step S2144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are selected. When it is not set, that is, when it is a normal deviation (a deviation that does not execute reach production) Selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S 2145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S2146), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S2147). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S2148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers) and design random numbers (first design random numbers, second design random numbers). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation processing (step S2083) as the process of step S2149. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol random time information set to about 1 second when the time is short. When the time is short, the variation pattern of the special symbol is set such that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-time reduction so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. Symbol variation time information is set.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S2083).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 97, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S2082) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, in the process of step S2173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 98, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time-shortage counter is set to “0” while the time-shortage flag is set and the time-short state continuation count is set. (Step S2183). If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S2184), and then it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S2185). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, the time reduction flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). If it is determined in the process of step S2183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S2185 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S2187.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S2187), a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started is set (step S2189), and the big hit gaming state is started (a big hit round start command is set). The waiting time until the game is started (a period during which a display indicating that the big hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S2190). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is further set. If it is not “0”, the counter value is reset (returned to “0”), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S2192), this process is terminated.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Thereby, the presentation according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot control process (step S2039).

  In step S2189, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. In the process of step S2401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, the processing shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls opening / closing of the big prize opening 2005 and is in an effective state in the fifteenth round (a big hit gaming state by receiving the game ball B at the second receiving port 2008) And a winning ball opening / closing process (step S2402) set to a high probability state after the completion of the game, and the game ball B received by the big winning port 2005 in the fifteenth round to the second receiving port 2008 In addition to controlling the drive of the sorting piece 2415 so that it can be sorted, Performing second receiving opening and closing process of monitoring the second receiving port 2008 in effect state whether the game ball B accepted (step S2403), in this order.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the special winning opening / closing process (step S2402).

  If it is determined in step S2411 that the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 100, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the big prize opening 2005. According to the operation schedule, when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds for long-time opening, 0.5 seconds for short-time opening) has elapsed from the open state of the special winning opening 2005 (step S2412), or When the game ball B has won the maximum number (for example, nine) of the winning balls 2005 in the opened state (step S2413), the opened large winning port 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S2414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the big winning opening 2005 to be closed (step S2415), the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds are transmitted as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. A big hit round end command is set according to (step S2416), and the process proceeds to step S2428.

  If it is determined in step S2411 that the big prize opening 2005 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. When it is determined to start a new round by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to the open state when it is time to open the large winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S2417). (Step S2418), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds is set as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). If it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds that open the grand prize opening 2005. If it is the start time (step S2420), the valid state flag is set (step S2421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S2420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the closed winning opening 2005 or the closed winning opening 2005 is controlled to be open (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. If it is determined that a new round is not started by controlling the winning prize opening 2005 to be in an open state (second open in the same round, etc.) (step S2418), or a valid state flag When it is determined that it is not the time to set the game (when it is not at the start of the 15th round) (step S2420), the closed winning prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open (step S2422), and step S2428 is performed. Migrate to Thus, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute an effect in accordance with the type of jackpot designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command and the current number of rounds.

  It should be noted that the valid state flag is a state set to an valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). It is a flag to show. In the fifteenth round of the first to fifteenth rounds that open the above-mentioned prize winning opening 2005, the game ball B received by the prize winning opening 2005 in the second receiving opening / closing process (step S2403) described later is used as the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 by drivingly controlling the sorting piece 2415 to be distributed to any one of the second receiving port 2008, and is set to an effective state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S2428 that the game ball B has been received at the special winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. As a command to be sent to 1510, a winning prize entry command is set (step S2429), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the winning prize entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the presentation display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. produce an effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B to the winning prize opening 2005. Can be executed.

  If it is determined in step S2417 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the large control port 1310 as shown in FIG. When the number of rounds is completed by repeating the open and closed states of the winning opening 2005 (step S2423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S2424). If it is determined that a second acceptance passage flag to be described later is set (step S2425), a high probability flag is set (step S2426), the time reduction flag is set and the counter value of the time reduction counter is set. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations in the short-time state (step S2427), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag has not been set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, the time reduction flag is set, and the time reduction state is set to the counter value of the time reduction counter. When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S2427), this process ends. As described above, when it is determined that the second reception pass flag is set (the game ball B is received by the second reception 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round), the high probability flag is set. And the short time flag is set, and the high probability short time state is controlled, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round) If it is determined that only the short time flag is set, the low probability short time state is controlled.

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second receiving opening / closing process (step S2403).

  If it is determined in step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the open state (the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the sorting piece 2415), FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 from the opened state of the second receiving port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when opened for a long time). When 0.2 seconds at the time of short-time opening has elapsed (step S2432), or when the current round (15th round) is ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to be closed (step 1524). S2433), the second receiving port 2008 in the opened state is closed (the game ball B is swung to the first receiving port 2007 side by the sorting piece 2415). Controlling the divided state) (step S2434).

  If it is determined in step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 101, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 When it is time to open the second receiving port 2008 according to the operation schedule 2415 (step S2435), the closed second receiving port 2008 is controlled to open (step S2436).

  Next, if it is determined in step S2437 that the game ball B has been received in the opened second receiving port 2008, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. Determines whether or not the game ball B has been received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the fifteenth round during the setting of the effective state flag (step S2438). If it is determined that the game ball B has been received at the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state at the 15th round (step S2438), the second acceptor is received during the valid state at the 15th round. When the second acceptance passage passing flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S2439), the second acceptance passage passing flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. When the second reception pass command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441), this process ends. As described above, unless the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the second receiving port passing flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. Is not set, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. In addition, when the second reception pass command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, etc. produce an effect corresponding to the reception of the game ball B to the second reception 2008. Can be executed.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S2802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate section passing process such as obtaining a normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S2804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode. Normal symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S2806)
5). When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per symbol”, the second start port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball B (step S2807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2803) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 72).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S2802).

  If it is determined in the process of step S2801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is on and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S2811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the normal random number and the normal variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, the holding number of normal symbols is the maximum value “4”. It is determined whether or not (step S2812). In the process of step S2812, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S2813 to S2814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S2813, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2814, each random number acquired in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the main control MPU RAM. .

  However, in the process of step S2812, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of step S2813 to step S2814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S2803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 104, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S2821 as It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is then processed as step S2822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbol variable display stored in each storage area of the main control MPU RAM is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are counted from the first (first) area. Store in order. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area And when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is read out. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the current game state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) (step S2826). ) Is selected (step S2826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state) (step S2825), a non-time-short normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2825). In step S2827, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S2828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and the short hit normal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is short time (low probability short time state, high probability short time state), and A non-time / short-time normal figure determination table used when the game state is non-time / short-time (low probability non-time / short-time state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball B passes to the gate portion 2003 in the short time, it is surely won by the usual figure, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to the second start opening 2004. The game ball B is controlled to be received.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving common figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the common figure determination values indicating that each common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time saving state, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the second start opening door 2411 is rotated and the second start port door 2411 is rotated. There is no control that allows the game ball B to be received in the second starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that it is based on the normal symbol (step S2829). ) After setting the flag per universal symbol indicating that the variation is won per symbol (step S2830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S2831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S2832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2804) (step S2833), this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the control in the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extremely reduced. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second start port 2004 is controlled with an open / close pattern that is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 is It is much easier to win the game ball B in the second start port 2004 due to the long time of the game, and the game ball is more efficiently aimed at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. B can be awarded. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. Also, the game ball B cannot be won at the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during the non-time-short state control, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the second start port 2004 cannot win the game ball B. In order for the game ball B to win, the game ball B must be launched (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B is the obstacle nail. By contacting N, various movements are imparted to the game ball B and flow down. For this reason, even if the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it does not necessarily win the first start opening 2002 but wins the first start opening 2002. The game ball B that has not been discharged is discharged to the outside through an out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the time-short state control, the game ball B can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. In order for the ball B to win, the game ball B must be fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center bonus 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is The passed game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the time-short state control, the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the non-time-short state control is performed. Compared to the first start opening 2002 in the middle, the game ball B wins the second start opening 2004 with extremely high efficiency.

  In addition, during the control of the short time state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the time when the second start port 2004 is opened is long, etc., so that the game ball B can easily win the second start port 2004, and further to the second start port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable symbol display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. The special symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control) can be digested. That is, when the time-short state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit is made again in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls B by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is one, so that the game to the second start port 2004 is Even if the winning of the ball B frequently occurs, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[12. Pachinko machine behavior at power-on]
In the present embodiment, as a function of the pachinko machine 1, a function for changing a setting value and a function for performing a confirmation display of the setting value are mounted. Specifically, the setting value setting can be changed by executing the setting change process in step S37 described above, and the setting value confirmation display can be performed by executing the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 described above. Allowing to be done. When performing such setting value change, in addition to operating the power switch 630a when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a. When the confirmation display of the set value is performed, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating. Note that, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z has both the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch.

  First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 105A is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. FIG. 105B is a time chart showing the power on of the pachinko machine 1. 105 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed sometimes. FIG. 105 (C) shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 105, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait time is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU operates the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch. It is determined whether or not (step S14). When determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 0 (step S16B). Then, following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and sets the key switch according to the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or a signal for setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON is determined. The determination result is stored as operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z while pachinko machine 1 needs to be turned on, and a person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a needs to turn on the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

  After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, a setting change process (step S37) is performed. If the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU permits a preset set value display. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON is determined. The determination result is stored as operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, but the operation is performed until the timing ty that is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process thereafter. Information storage is to be maintained. At timing ty, based on the storage of the operation information, initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is to be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. However, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Is not operated, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. At the timing ty, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information. From the timing ty, the initialization of the main control built-in RAM ( Step S38) is to be performed.

  When initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx, but at the timing ty, the RWM clear button 633z is operated. It is not necessary that the pressing operation unit is operated. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the RWM clear is performed. It is possible to change from the state where the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG only needs to be reset to 0 during the period from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (B), when the setting value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. The setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is determined to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the timing ty. . In addition, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  When changing the setting value, it is necessary that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, and the setting key switch 1311a is operated to be turned on. However, at the timing ty, it is not necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, and similarly, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the RWM clear is performed. It is possible to change from the state where the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated. Similarly, the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is changed to the state where it is turned off. It is possible to do. However, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on before the timing ty is reached, the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty. It is necessary to change from the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on again to the state where it is turned off, and further from the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state where it is turned off. This is because the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation in the determination in step S222 of the setting change process. In this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON operation. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the operation is turned off.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change process (step S37). Anything to do. In this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, and the setting key is set at the timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has been initialized (step S38) after the setting change processing (step S37) from the timing ty. In the meantime, any value may be used as long as the value is reset to zero.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3. On the other hand, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a. Is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is decided to perform the set value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the time ty, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. To do. In addition, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  Note that when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing tx, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty. There is no need. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the setting key It is possible to change from the state in which the switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which the switch 1311a is turned off. However, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on before the timing ty, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty. Later, it is necessary to change from the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on again to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and further change from the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which it is turned off. This is because the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation in the determination in step S358 of the set value confirmation display process. In this determination, however, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the operation state is changed from the existing state to the OFF state.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, and at the timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is completed. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is between timing ty and timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that resets to the value 0 is acceptable.

  In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. As a condition, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 as the second operation information, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in FIGS. It is assumed that the situation continues. In this regard, the situation in which the main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing tx. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is limited to not set the value 1 (set to the value 0) as the second operation information. Yes. This may be changed or set illegally when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (such as when it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice) during business hours of the game hall. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 1 in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The situation is such that the main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is moved from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM clearing is performed. It is possible to set the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG and prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from being disabled. And even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of trouble in the game start itself.

  In the present embodiment, at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the set key ON flag as the second operation information The value of CS-FLG is set, and the operation information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. At the time of the timing ty, the operation information is stored. Based on this, it is determined whether initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), or setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed, and the determined processing. Like to do. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx and before the timing ty arrives, the operation mode of the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a are changed. Even in such a case, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained without being changed. Thereby, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the hall manager mistakenly operates the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the operation mode is changed, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained so as not to be changed, so that there is no need to newly power on the pachinko machine 1 again. 1. Immediately execute the process intended by the hall manager after power-on (one of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), set value confirmation display process (step S28)) can do.

  Further, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z without operating the setting key switch 1311a. In order to change the setting value, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a. When performing the confirmation display, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. At the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the set key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. And the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and the hall manager depends on which combination of the operation information is at the timing ty. Is executed (any of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), and set value confirmation display processing (step S28)). For example, when the operation control unit is provided corresponding to the initialization of the main control built-in RAM, the setting value setting change, or the setting value confirmation display, in addition to the power switch 630a. It is necessary to provide three operation units, but by changing the processing executed after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 depending on the combination of operation information, the operation unit for pressing the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the power switch 630a In addition, it is only necessary to provide two operation units of the setting key switch 1311a, and the number of parts related to the operation unit can be saved.

  In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. As shown in FIGS. 105 (B) and 105 (C), for the period from the timing tx to the timing ty, The setting state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held as the second operation information, and it does not matter whether the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty, the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be repeated any number of times. On the other hand, after the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 moves relative to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. When closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx is reset, and the setting change process (step S37) and the setting value confirmation display process are performed at the timing ty. The setting change process (step S37) is performed at the timing ty without performing (step S28) or resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx. Alternatively, it may not be determined that the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, even when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. May be restricted so that setting value setting change and setting value confirmation display cannot be performed. According to this, as described above, the setting is illegally changed when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during business hours of the game hall (when the game hall manager is difficult to notice). Or illegally confirming the settings.

  Further, in this example, the RAM clear notification flag is set as the first operation information on the condition that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is temporarily operated in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. Although the value 1 is set in RCL-FLG, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed and held. It is good also as a condition. Similarly, in step S18 of the main-control-side power-on process, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 as the second operation information on condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON even temporarily. However, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, even when the hall manager accidentally touches the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, processing that is not intended by the hall manager is performed. It can be prevented from being executed.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is limited not to perform fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 or fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005. . That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, the hall manager changes from the state where the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although it is possible to change the state from being in an OFF operation state, it is limited not to execute fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 or fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005. . As a result, even when the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or adds vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as an illegal act. Can be prevented, and inhibition of regular work can be suppressed.

[12-1. Modification of pachinko machine behavior at power-on]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, the setting value is changed, or the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed. The timing for determining whether or not the unit is operated is the same as the timing for determining whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, but the body frame 4 is opened and set. About the timing which determines whether there exists key ON operation, you may make it differ from the timing which determines whether the press operation part of RWM clear button 633z is operated. A modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 107 (A) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. 107 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed when the machine 1 is turned on. FIG. 107C shows a confirmation display of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case of performing. Note that, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z has both the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch.

  As shown in FIG. 107, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait time is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (step S12) (step S12). S14). When determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 0 (step S16B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. ing. Since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z while pachinko machine 1 needs to be turned on.

  After the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process following step S16A or step S16B (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and sets the key switch according to the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or a signal for setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as second operation information. doing. As described above, in the modified example, the first operation information is stored at the timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time waiting process, whereas the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process at the timing ty1. The second operation information is stored. Note that the setting key switch 1311a is set as the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty1 because at least 10 seconds (s), which is a waiting time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time waiting process (step S22), is set. May turn on the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, but after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, The setting key switch 1311a may be turned ON until the timing ty1 when the control MPU completes the wait time waiting process comes.

  At timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU determines the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS. -It is determined which combination the values of FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, a setting change process (step S37) is performed. If the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU permits a preset set value display. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. However, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process thereafter. On the other hand, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON, and the determination result is stored as second operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. However, the storage of the second operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process thereafter. At timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing ( Step S28) is to be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Must be operated. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at the timing ty1, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation information. Store in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information. From timing ty2, initialization of the main control built-in RAM ( Step S38) is to be performed.

  When initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx, but at the timing ty1 or timing ty2, the RWM clear is performed. It is not necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the button 633z. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Therefore, before the timing ty2 arrives. In addition, it is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

  When the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned on at the timing ty1, but at the timing tx or the timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on. The ON operation may be performed. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is maintained. Since the information is stored, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a can be freely changed between the ON operation state and the OFF operation state. Yes.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG only needs to be reset to 0 during the period from the timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (B), when the setting value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Need to be. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the setting value is changed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation information. Store in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is determined to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the time of timing ty2. . In addition, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at timing ty2, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  When changing the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx. However, at the timing ty1 or the timing ty2, the RWM clear button 633z is operated. There is no need to operate the pressing operation section. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Therefore, before the timing ty2 arrives. In addition, it is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

  Further, when the setting value is changed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at timing tx or timing ty2. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is maintained. Since the information is stored, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a can be freely changed between the ON operation state and the OFF operation state. Yes.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG only needs to be reset to 0 during the period from the timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed. In this example, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing ty1, and the setting key is set at the timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has been initialized (step S38) after the setting change processing (step S37) from timing ty2. In the meantime, any value may be used as long as the value is reset to zero.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Need not be. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation information. Store in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is determined to perform the set value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the time of timing ty2, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed. To do. In addition, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty2, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  Note that when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at timing tx or timing ty2. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is maintained. Since the information is stored, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a can be freely changed between the ON operation state and the OFF operation state. Yes.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing ty1, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed at the timing t4. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 0 between the timing ty2 and the time when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. It only needs to be reset to.

  In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in FIGS. It is assumed that the situation continues. In this regard, the situation in which the main body frame 4 has never been opened with respect to the outer frame 2 before the timing ty1 arrives, or the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing ty1. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is limited to not set the value 1 (set to the value 0) as the second operation information. Yes. This may be changed or set illegally when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (such as when it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice) during business hours of the game hall. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 1 in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The situation is such that the main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is moved from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM clearing is performed. It is possible to set the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG and prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from being disabled. And even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of trouble in the game start itself.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, and the first operation information is controlled by the main control. The first operation information stored in the MPU general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) and stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Further, at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main control MPU. The second operation information stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) and stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. At timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing ( Whether to perform step S28) is determined, and the determined processing is performed. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx and until the timing ty1 when the second operation information is stored, the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON operation state and the OFF operation is performed. It is possible to change freely. At time ty1, the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed in the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. At the timing ty2 after that, whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), to perform setting change processing (step S37), or to confirm the set value based on the storage of the operation information Whether to perform the display process (step S28) is determined, and the determined process is performed. As a result, when the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed, the hall manager erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Even if the user forgets to perform the operation, by changing to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, the pachinko machine 1 is newly set. There is no need to turn the power on again, and the processing that the hall manager intends after powering on the pachinko machine 1 (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (Any step S28) can be executed promptly. Further, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, even if the hall manager erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, By changing the setting key switch 1311a to the state in which the second operation information is stored until the timing ty1 arrives, the setting value setting need not be changed again, and the pachinko machine 1 After the power is turned on, the processing intended by the hall manager (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), or setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is promptly executed. be able to.

  As described above, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored is reached, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. The first operation information is configured to be longer than the period until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is not necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a at the same time. It is possible to perform the ON operation, and the operation of the hall manager with respect to the plurality of operation units can be facilitated.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized or the setting value is changed, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. The timing for operating the pressing operation unit of 633z is set to the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and not to the timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. This is composed of a push-down switch whose operation state is not maintained for the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, and after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, until the timing ty1 arrives. Even if an attempt is made to continue to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, it may be unclear whether or not the timing ty1 has arrived, so the hall manager operates the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. There is a possibility of stopping. For this reason, about the timing which operates the press operation part of RWM clear button 633z, it is set as the time of the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the press operation part of RWM clear button 633z is operated over a long period of time. There is no need to continue, and initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and setting change processing (step S37) can be reliably executed as intended by the hall manager.

  Also, as mentioned above. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. At the time when the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, a command for specifying that it is waiting to determine whether or not there is a setting key ON operation at timing ty1 is issued to the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ) To complete the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 and until the timing ty1 arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is output depending on the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. The setting key operable notification is executed to notify that the state can be changed to the state in which the ON operation is performed. This setting key operation possible notification includes a voice that repeats “setting key operation is possible”, a message “setting key operation is possible!”, And setting value setting key switch 1311a of 1-6 in the selection operation process is ON. Lamp light emission is executed in a color corresponding to whether or not it is being operated.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is limited not to perform fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 or fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005. . That is, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty2, the hall manager changes from a state where the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to a state where it is not operated, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. It is possible to change from a state where the magnetic sensor 2470 is turned off to a state where it is turned off, or from a state where it is turned off to a state where it is turned on. It is restricted not to execute fraud monitoring using. As a result, even when the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or adds vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as an illegal act. Can be prevented, and inhibition of regular work can be suppressed.

[13. Behavior of pachinko machine in change permission state and confirmation display state]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state in which the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are performed will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value setting change, and FIGS. 109 and 110 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value confirmation display. In the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different from the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed. It has become a thing. In addition, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of the set value is substantially the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting change of the set value. Since the pressing operation unit is not operated, even after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is different in that various information at the time of turning off the power is held.

  As shown in FIG. 108, when the setting value is changed, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state. In some cases, it is necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). If the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 to open the main body frame 4 (timing t1), and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning it ON by turning 60 degrees (timing t2). Then, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch (timing t3). The value can be changed (change-permitted state). In such a change-permitted state, the set value (set values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting switching button is pressed. After that, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF (timing t4). That is, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is changed. It becomes a state where it is impossible to change the setting (change impossible state). Then, by removing the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player plays the game. It is possible to perform.

  When the setting value is changed, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. The setting change process in step S37 is not finished until it is set (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, This prohibits the interrupt permission setting in step S52 from being performed, and delays the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 compared to the normal power-on. Since the main control timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control in step S114. The process, the normal symbol in step S116 and the normal electric accessory control process, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change-permitted state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005. When a game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the detection signal input is not validated, the special symbol variation display, the normal symbol variation display, the second start port, etc. A special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the grand prize opening door 2413, the sorting operation of the sorting piece 2415, etc. is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 109, when the confirmation display of the currently set value is performed, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If it is in the state, it is necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). If the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 to open the main body frame 4 (timing t1), and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning it ON by turning 60 degrees (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a and turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), it is possible to perform a confirmation display of the set value ( Confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, on the setting display 1310g, the current set value (the set value from the set value 1 to the set value 6 when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) is set. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON (OFF timing). t4) The setting indicator 1310g is switched from the state where the set value is displayed to the state where it is not displayed. That is, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). After timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is displayed. The confirmation display cannot be performed (confirmation impossible state). Then, by removing the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player plays the game. It is possible to perform.

  In the case of performing confirmation display of the currently set value, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, but is set at timing t4. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process), and from timing t3. During the period up to timing t4, it is prohibited so that the subsequent interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Since the main control timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control in step S114. The process, the normal symbol in step S116 and the normal electric accessory control process, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005. When a game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the detection signal input is not validated, the special symbol variation display, the normal symbol variation display, the second start port, etc. A special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the grand prize opening door 2413, the sorting operation of the sorting piece 2415, etc. is not performed.

[13-1. Special symbols, various incoming ball detection, and payout devices]
As shown in FIG. 108, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interruption process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) has not started. State in which it is impossible to display fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of function display unit 1400 It becomes impossible state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Thus, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state (variable state) in which the special symbol can be variably displayed.

  When the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the detection signal is output when the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. While the input is valid, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be displayed in a variable state (variable state B). As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is not possible. In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2002 is not effective. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made effective when the game ball B wins the two starting holes 2004.

  In addition, when the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed at the time of turning off the power at timing t0, or when the special symbol variation display is stored as a hold When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated. Subsequently, in step S38, a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is selected. Since it is cleared except for, information on the change display of the special symbol will be lost. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, although it becomes a variable state, it does not resume the display of the special symbol that has been suspended when the power is turned off. In addition, the special symbol stored as a hold at the time of power-off is not displayed.

  In addition, a fraud related error (for example, a severe error at the time of magnetic detection or vibration detection) has occurred that makes it impossible to play games such as fluctuation display of special symbols in the state where fluctuation is possible In some cases, the peripheral control MPU performs display processing of fraud related error information for notifying a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600) or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of light emitting devices). LED 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.), which performs a light emission process of a fraud related error mode for notifying that effect, or a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) The fraud related error output process for performing the related error sound output process is performed. The change permission state, but is an inability to perform the variable display of the special symbols state (variation disabled state A), it is not carried out the fraud-related error output processing described above. In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and changes the setting value. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of fraud related error output processing intended to suggest to the event, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. In addition, regarding the point of not performing the fraud related error output processing, do not perform all of the fraud related error information display processing, the light emission processing of the fraud related error mode, and the fraud related error sound output processing described above. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify not performing the output process of fraud related error sound that can reduce the work efficiency of the worker at a large volume, but performing other processes as usual.

  Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not been started, so the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. , When a game ball B enters the winning gate 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc., or the gate unit 2003, the detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors are mainly controlled. The MPU does not input, and the detection of the game ball B is handled as invalid. Note that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while a detection signal from the detection sensor is input. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation of special symbols) Display) and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed, so that the game ball B may be moved to the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular operation of changing the setting value. Even if the player enters a ball in 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B is performed. , The high-probability state is not given, so that the game ball B can be used for a certain reason during the regular operation for confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of various winning awards and gate portions (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008, for example, for the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change-permitted state, measurement by the base monitor 1310h described above is performed. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in a change-permitted state and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid a situation in which measurement is performed (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the first start port 2002 is started. When the game ball B enters the gates 2003 and various winning ports such as the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the detection sensors corresponding to each Is detected by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B is validated, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation display). The game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is validated, when the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the game ball B is set to the “valid state” as the state when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

  In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, from the end time of the change permission state, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007. When the game ball B enters the various winning entrances such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective, but at the timing t5, the outer frame 2 On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as effective. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is.

  In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 350. The game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350. In other words, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350 in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. However, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as described above, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning awards and gate portions (gates). Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the grand prize winning port 2005 in the change permission state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

  Note that when the game ball B has entered the various winning openings and the game ball B has been paid out from the payout device 350 at the time point when the power is shut off at the timing t0, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z is input from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating the. Since all the areas are cleared, information regarding the payout of the game ball B is lost. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350, but the game ball B which has not been paid out when the power is cut off can be discharged. It will not resume.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interruption processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is performed as in the change permission state. The special symbol (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed in a variable manner. Is impossible (variable state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Thus, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state (variable state) in which the special symbol can be variably displayed.

  When the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the detection signal is output when the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. While the input is valid, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be displayed in a variable state (variable state B). As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is not possible. In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2002 is not effective. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made effective when the game ball B wins the two starting holes 2004.

  In addition, when the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed at the time of turning off the power at timing t0, or when the special symbol variation display is stored as a hold When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (when the setting value is changed), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. At this time, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and then, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. While the information regarding the display is lost, the timing t is operated without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (when the set value confirmation display is performed), the set value in step S28 of the main control power-on process is set when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4. Although the confirmation display process is ended, the process of step S38 for clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area is not executed as after the setting change process of step S37. Information will be held. For this reason, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, ends, the change display of the special symbol that has been interrupted when the power is turned off is resumed, triggered by the changeable state. In addition, the special symbol stored as a hold when the power is cut off is displayed.

  In addition, as described above, in a variable state, a fraud-related error (for example, a serious error at the time of magnetic detection or vibration detection) that makes it impossible to perform a game such as a special symbol variation display due to some illegal act. When an error occurs, the peripheral control MPU performs a display process of fraud related error information for notifying a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600), or a predetermined light emitting device. (E.g., a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) is subjected to a light emission process of a fraud related error mode to notify that, or a predetermined sound output device (e.g., the lower speaker 153a, etc.) The fraud-related error output process for performing the fraud-related error sound output process for notifying the effect is performed. In the confirmation display state, which is the period until the change permission state, the fraud-related error output process described above is performed although the special symbol variation display is not possible (variable impossibility state A). I do not do it. In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and performs confirmation display of the set value. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of fraud related error output processing intended to suggest to the event, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. In addition, regarding the point of not performing the fraud related error output processing, do not perform all of the fraud related error information display processing, the light emission processing of the fraud related error mode, and the fraud related error sound output processing described above. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify not performing the output process of fraud related error sound that can reduce the work efficiency of the worker at a large volume, but performing other processes as usual. Also, in order not to perform fraud related error output processing, processing that is prohibited according to the difference in events that hinders the work of hall clerk with the control performed in the change permission state described above You may make it differ in the kind, number, etc. of. For example, in the change permission state, if any fraud related error occurs, all fraud related error output processing is not performed, but in the confirmation display state, if any fraud related error occurs, a fraud related error is output. In the change permission state, only a part of the processing is not performed, or when any fraud related error occurs, all fraud related error output processing is not performed, while the confirmation display status Then, it is possible to exemplify not performing a part of the fraud related error output process when some kind of fraud related error occurs.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started as in the change permission state. 2002, the second start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008 and other various winning ports and the detection sensor corresponding to each when the game ball B enters the gate unit 2003 Thus, the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while a detection signal from the detection sensor is input. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation of special symbols) Display) and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed, so that the game ball B may be brought into the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the player enters a ball in 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B is performed. , The high-probability state is not given, so that the game ball B can be used for a certain reason during the regular operation for confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning awards and gate portions (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008, for example, the game monitor B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state, and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid a situation in which measurement is performed (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the first start port 2002 is started. When the game ball B enters the gates 2003 and various winning ports such as the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the detection sensors corresponding to each Is detected by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B is validated, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation display). The game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is validated, when the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the game ball B is set to the “valid state” as the state when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

  In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big prize winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007. When the game ball B enters the various winning entrances such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective, but at the timing t5, the outer frame 2 On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as effective. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is.

  In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 350. The game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350. That is, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350 in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as described above, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gate portions (gates). For example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the big winning port 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

  Note that when the game ball B has entered the various winning openings and the game ball B has been paid out from the payout device 350 at the time point when the power is shut off at the timing t0, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating (when the setting value is changed), the RWM clear button 633z is operated from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at that time. Since a signal (detection signal) is input and the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared, information relating to the payout of the game ball B is lost, whereas the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 (when the set value confirmation display is performed), the payout control built-in RAM Because it does not execute a process of clearing the area, so that the information about the payout of the game ball B is held. For this reason, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is shut off is triggered by the fact that the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350. The payout is resumed.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting indicator 1310g displays the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. In the confirmation display state in which the game ball B which has not been paid out has been paid out at the time when the power supply is cut off as described above, When a payout-related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies a display other than the setting indicator 1310g (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633) to that effect. Performs related error information display processing or is applied to a predetermined light-emitting device (for example, a plurality of LEDs 121a or a plurality of LEDs 213a). Te, and to perform a payout associated error output processing for emission treatment payout related errors manner to notify. As a result, in the confirmation display state, whether or not the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is turned off has been completed, or a payout related error such as a broken ball has occurred and the game ball B has been paid out. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a loss, and it is possible to prevent the player from causing a loss. Since the payout-related error processing is an important event for smoothly playing the game later, payout maintenance is emphasized regardless of the work efficiency of the hall clerk. In other words, the same processing as usual is performed without any restriction.

  As described above, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings at the timing t0 and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 350, the RWM clear button 633z is If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit (when the set value confirmation display is performed), at that time, the game ball that has not been paid out when the power is shut off The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, a special symbol (first special symbol display) on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. , The second special symbol) is in a state in which it is impossible to display the variation (unvariable state A), and the special symbol change in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when the power is shut off at timing t0. When the display is performed, or when the change display of the special symbol is stored as the hold, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z If it is (when the set value confirmation display is performed), at that time, the fluctuation display of the special symbol that was suspended when the power was turned off is restarted, Never or performs variable display of the special symbols are stored as pending at the time of the cut off. In other words, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the change display of the special symbol that has been interrupted when the power is turned off is resumed, or is stored as a hold when the power is turned off. It is a period during which only the game ball B that has not been paid out can be paid out at the time when the power supply is cut off, while the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the progress of the game is prevented. . For example, when the hall is closed, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 350, the power is turned off when the power is turned off. Loss will occur to the player for the game balls B that have not been paid out, but after that, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and put into a confirmation display state to prevent the progress of the game after the power is turned off. However, it is possible to only pay out the game balls B that have not been paid out when the power is turned off, and it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Until the setting key is turned OFF, the special symbol variation display is disabled, the progress of the game after the power is shut off is prevented, and the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is turned off is displayed. While the period during which only payout can be performed is set, the setting value confirmation display may not be performed. In addition, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the hall clerk turns the operation on, the time until the operation is turned off. Only the payout of the game ball B that has not been paid out when the hall clerk turns on the operation while preventing the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns the operation on is made impossible to display the variation of the special symbol. It is good also as a period which can perform. Also in such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, the game clerk B who has not been paid out when the hall clerk turns on the operation while preventing the progress of the game during the period when the hall clerk turns the operation on is paid out. It is possible to prevent the loss of the player.

  As described above, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable symbol state in which the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be displayed is changed. The special symbol stored as the hold is not displayed when the power is turned off. On the other hand, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is finished, the state becomes variable. In response to this, a special symbol stored as a hold is displayed when the power is turned off. More specifically, when a ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the special symbol variation display, a special random number is stored as a hold in the main control built-in RAM. If a special random number is stored as a hold in the main control built-in RAM at the time of shutting off, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control side power-off process. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 and then shifts to the change-permitted state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 and stored in the main control built-in RAM when the change-permitted state ends. Since the game backup information is cleared, the special random number stored as a hold is also lost.

  In the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special random number stored as the hold before the power is turned off is deleted, so that the function display unit 1400 is added to the hold display on the effect display device 1600. The on-hold display in the on-hold number display is hidden. In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random number is stored as a new hold.

  By the way, when the change permission state ends, if the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off is not erased, the following adverse effects occur. In this example, the higher the set value among the set values 1 to 6, the greater the number of jackpot determination values set in the jackpot determination table so that the jackpot probability is higher. When changing the setting value in the permission state, if the setting value is changed from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. Since the special random number increases and the jackpot probability increases, there is a possibility that the special random number that was out of the set value before the power shutoff becomes a big hit in the set value after the change permission state ends. On the other hand, when the setting value is changed in the change permission state, if the setting value is changed from a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) to a low setting value (for example, setting value 1), the result of the big hit determination is Since the special random number that is regarded as a big hit decreases and the probability of a big hit decreases, the special random number that was a big hit in the setting value before power-off may be missed in the setting value after the end of the change permission state . In this regard, in this example, when the change permission state ends, the special random number stored as the hold is deleted, so that the result of the jackpot determination is changed before the power is turned off and after the change permission state ends. It is possible to prevent a situation that lacks fairness from occurring. In particular, when a person who is not a hall manager changes a setting value in a change-permitted state due to fraudulent behavior, the person tries to change the setting value to a higher setting value (for example, setting value 6). For example, even when the setting value is changed to the setting value 6), the result of the jackpot determination is not changed to the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from performing an illegal act. If the hall administrator changes the setting value while the change is permitted, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is turned off will be deleted, so that the player will not be penalized. It is preferable to turn off the power in a state where there is no hold, and then change the setting value in the change permission state.

  In addition, when changing the setting value in the change-permitted state, not only when the setting value is changed from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) before power-off, Even when the set value before power-off is maintained, the special random number stored as the hold is deleted when the change permission state ends. For example, when a person who is not a hall administrator changes a setting value in a change-permitted state due to fraudulent behavior, he / she tries to change the setting value to a higher setting value (for example, setting value 6). There is a possibility that it is not necessary to change the high setting value. Even in such a case, the special random number stored as a hold before the power shutdown is erased at the end of the change permission state, so that the special random number that is likely to be a big hit at a high setting value before the power shutdown Since the opportunity to perform the jackpot determination based on this is lost, it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from performing fraud.

  On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 and then shifts to the confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 and stored in the main control built-in RAM when the confirmation display state ends. Since the game backup information is not cleared, a special random number stored as a hold before power-off is held. In the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random number is stored as a new hold. In such a confirmation display state, only the setting value setting confirmation is performed, and the setting value is not changed unlike the change permission state. In other words, even if a person who is not the hall administrator performs setting confirmation of the set value in the confirmation display state due to fraud, the special random number stored as the hold will be Since the result of the jackpot judgment will not change after the end, and no profit will be gained by fraudulent behavior, the special random number stored as a hold before power off will be retained at the end of the confirmation display state It is said.

  In addition, when a person who is not the hall administrator checks the setting value in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent behavior, he or she accesses the back of the pachinko machine 1 in some way while pretending to be playing normally. If the setting value confirmed illegally is an unfavorable setting content (for example, the setting value 1 having the lowest jackpot probability), an advantageous setting content ( For example, it is conceivable that a pachinko machine 1 having a setting value 6) with the highest probability of jackpot is obtained and immediately left. In this point, in this example, when checking the setting value in the confirmation display state, the hold is held without erasing. It is possible to make it difficult to take an uncomfortable action such as “get away”, and to monitor an action with such an uncomfortable feeling, it is possible to easily catch a person who performs an illegal setting check. As a result, it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from performing unauthorized setting confirmation.

  In addition, in order to further increase the deterrence of fraud, in the confirmation display state, the function display unit is held in addition to the hold display on the effect display device 1600 while holding the special random number stored as the hold before power-off. The hold display on the hold number display 1400 is also temporarily hidden, and is displayed as if the special random number stored as the hold no longer exists as in the change permission state. This makes it possible for the fraudster to misunderstand that the hold has disappeared, and to abandon the continuation of the game after the unauthorized setting confirmation. In order to effectively exhibit such a deterrent effect, not only the confirmation display state but also a predetermined return timing (for example, when the body frame 4 is closed or for a predetermined time) after the confirmation display state ends. The on-hold display may be in a non-display state over a period until the elapse (e.g.).

[13-2. About jackpot games and launchers]
As shown in FIG. 108, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interruption process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) has not started. The grand prize opening door 2413 that can open and close the big prize opening 2005 and the sorting piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 to either the first reception port 2007 or the second reception port 2008 are operated. It becomes impossible. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Then, the grand prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. Thus, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated as the big hit game. The game ball B can be made to enter the grand prize winning port 2005, or the game ball B received by the big prize winning port 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008.

  When the power is cut off at the timing t0 and the big winning door 2424 and the sorting piece 2415 are operating during the big hit game, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Since the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed ( Information regarding the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 is being lost. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it becomes possible to operate the grand prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415, but is interrupted when the power is shut off. The big hit game that has been made is not resumed, and the grand prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are not operated.

  As described above, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, so the first start port 2002, the second When a game ball B enters the winning port such as the start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, or the gate portion 2003, detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, Neither the payout nor the high probability state is given, so that the game ball B can be used for some reason during the regular operation for changing the setting value, for some reason, the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the prize winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the change permission state. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It is good also as a state in which it is possible. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is.

  In the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interruption process (the firing permission signal setting process in step S113) is not started, but the firing by the handle 182 in the change permission state. In consideration of performing an operation check or the like, in that period, the logic of a launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is set. When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B can be launched. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the firing permission signal setting process in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state Even after the end of, the state in which the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated is continued. In this way, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interruption processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is performed as in the change permission state. Since the game has not started, the prize winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the prize winning opening 2005 and the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2005 are distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008. The sorting piece 2415 cannot be operated. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Then, the grand prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. Thus, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated as the big hit game. The game ball B can be made to enter the grand prize winning port 2005, or the game ball B received by the big prize winning port 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008.

  When the power is cut off at the timing t0 and the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operating during the big hit game, the timing is operated while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at t3 (when the setting value is changed), the setting of step S37 in the main control power-on process is performed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. The change process is terminated, and then, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed (the action of the big prize door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415) While the information on the middle) is lost, the pachinko machine 1 does not operate at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. If the power source is turned on (when the setting value confirmation display is performed), the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28 of the main control power-on processing is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4. However, since the process of step S38 for clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area is not executed as after the setting change process of step S37, the big hit game is being executed (the big prize opening door 2413). And information on the operation of the sorting piece 2415). For this reason, as shown in FIG. 110, after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it becomes possible to operate the special prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415. As a trigger, the big hit game that has been interrupted when the power is cut off is resumed, and the grand prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before restarting the big hit game that was interrupted when the power was cut off at the timing t5. Immediately after resuming the game, it is possible to efficiently enter the game ball B into the big winning opening 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  As described above, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, so the first start port 2002, the second When a game ball B enters the winning port such as the start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, or the gate portion 2003, detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, Neither the payout nor the high probability state is given, so that the game ball B can be used for some reason during the regular operation of confirming and displaying the set value for the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the winning key door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It is good also as a state in which it is possible. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is. Further, when the big hit game suspended at the time of turning off the power from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state, before the big hit game is resumed. Although it is difficult to prepare the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182, it is possible to delay the restart of the big hit game that was interrupted when the power was turned off, before restarting the big hit game. It is easy to prepare the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182, and it is possible to efficiently enter the game ball B into the big winning port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 immediately after resuming the big hit game. .

  Further, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change permission state, the main control timer interruption process (the firing permission signal setting process in step S113) has not started, but the confirmation display In consideration of performing the check of the launch operation by the handle 182 in the state, the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted during that period. The logic is set so that the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the firing permission signal setting process in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state Even after the end of, the state in which the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated is continued. In this way, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

[13-3. About production devices and production members]
As shown in FIG. 108, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and a predetermined display is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display an image. And in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the output from the image, lamp and speaker of the effect display device 1600 The setting change notification for notifying that the setting value setting is being changed is executed. As a notification of the setting change, a sound that repeats “setting change”, a message “setting change!”, And lamp emission in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 in the selection operation process are executed. I am going to do that. The notification during setting change is notification (effect) performed only in the change-permitted state, and is executed with priority over the body frame opening notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release notification (such as “open frame” display or voice) is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame release notification is performed. The setting change notification is executed with the highest priority without performing the above. Note that the body frame release notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting change notification has priority over the body frame release notification, and the body frame release notification is performed after the setting change notification ends. A form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the variation of the symbol or the big hit game is caused by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. A game start notification for notifying that the game can be started is executed.

  In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, notification by the function display unit 1400 is also given as the above-described setting change notification. Running. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special indicator In addition to the design indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), A confirmation display indicator that includes one LED for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. In the change permission state, only the LEDs of the display unit during setting change in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display units are turned off. Thereby, in a change permission state, it can grasp | ascertain that a game does not advance by the notification by the function display unit 1400. FIG.

  Further, in the change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, various winnings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the like. When the game ball B enters the mouth or gate part 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning awards and gates are displayed, even though it is not a period in which the game should be performed in the change-permitted state due to the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. The warning effect A for notifying that the game ball B has entered the club is executed. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the main body frame release notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the main body frame opening notification.

  Further, the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not in a state in which the setting key is ON, but such a setting key is in an ON state. In such a case, the warning effects B and C for notifying that the setting key has been turned on illegally by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the state where the setting key is turned ON in a state where the symbol variation is performed at normal time, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state in which the setting key is turned on in a state where the symbol variation is not performed at normal time, the warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. The warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority by stopping the effect being executed regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is being performed. The warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but the effects may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). It is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 in a stepwise manner. That is, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600 can be detected. The amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the screen can be adjusted stepwise. Specifically, an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing a five-stage adjustment status depending on the time of long press) and a light amount are displayed on the effect display device 1600 by long pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). After displaying the gauge image), the volume and amount of light are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2) each time the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed for a short time. ..), And the volume and the amount of light can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during the period in which an effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being performed during symbol variation, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for that effect. Even if the operation is performed, the prohibition period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted is set.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the production member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main body is set in a state where the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be changed (unchangeable state A). An initial operation of a production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 or a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed. Each such production member is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. Such as confirmation, and accurate alignment is performed so that the production member waits at the initial position. And after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the change.

  If the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is displayed. As described above, since the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting, immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which the special symbol variable display on the 1400 special symbol display can be performed. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is possible without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In the initial operation of the effect member, when a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the design variation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the opportunity to operate the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in a change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, a state in which the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be performed (unvariable state A However, since the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed, the initial operation of the effect member is completed when the change permission state is entered after the change permission state ends. The possibility is high. Thereby, after the change permission state is finished, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation, the initial operation of the effect member is not affected. Based on the variation pattern, the production member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position, and information obtained from the production content is not missed.

  However, the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 requires a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to be completed. For this reason, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the rendering member is completed, the initial stage of the rendering member Waiting for the completion of the operation, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. In other words, the timing at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member. In any case, the setting key switch at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned OFF, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and a predetermined display is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display an image. Then, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased and the image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed as in the change permission state. A notification during confirmation display for notifying that the setting value confirmation display is being performed is executed by the output from the lamp and the speaker. As the notification during confirmation display, a sound that repeats “confirmation display”, a message display “confirmation display!”, And lamp emission in a color corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 are executed. I am going to do that. Further, the notification during confirmation display is notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the body frame release notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release notification (such as “frame open” or sound) is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame release notification is performed. The notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing the above. The body frame release notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, and the confirmation display notification is given priority over the body frame release notification, and the body frame release notification is performed after the confirmation display notification is completed. A form can also be illustrated. Then, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 is over, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, depending on the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker, the symbol variation and the big hit game A game start notification for notifying that the game can be started is executed.

  In addition, after the confirmation display state at timing t4 is over, the big hit that is interrupted when the power is turned off, triggered by the fact that the grand prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. It is possible to resume the game and operate the grand prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415. However, as shown in FIG. 110, when such a big hit game is resumed, the images and lamps of the effect display device 1600, The jackpot game restart notification is executed to notify that the jackpot game 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 that are interrupted when the power is cut off is resumed by the output from the speaker and the jackpot door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. Before resuming the big hit game, the output from the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are waiting for execution of the big hit game, which is interrupted when the power is cut off, that is, the big prize opening door 2413 A big hit game standby notification for notifying that the operation of the segment 2415 is waiting may be executed. Thus, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before resuming the big hit game, and the game can be efficiently put into the big prize winning port 2007 and the second entrance 2008 immediately after the big hit game is resumed. Sphere B can be entered.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, in addition to the output from the display of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker as the above-described confirmation display notification as in the change permission state, Notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special indicator In addition to the design indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), A confirmation display indicator that includes one LED for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. In the confirmation display state, only the LEDs of the display during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it can be grasped that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various winnings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the like. When the game ball B enters the mouth or gate part 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning awards and gates are displayed even though it is not a period in which the game is to be played in the confirmation display state by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. The warning effect A for notifying that the game ball B has entered the club is executed. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the notification during confirmation display and the body frame release notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display notification or the main body frame release notification.

  Further, the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not in a state in which the setting key is ON, but such a setting key is in an ON state. In such a case, the warning effects B and C for notifying that the setting key has been turned on illegally by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the state where the setting key is turned ON in a state where the symbol variation is performed at normal time, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state in which the setting key is turned on in a state where the symbol variation is not performed at normal time, the warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. The warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority by stopping the effect being executed regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is being performed. The warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but the effects may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). It is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 in a stepwise manner. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker Further, it is possible to adjust the light amount output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 in a stepwise manner. Specifically, an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing a five-stage adjustment status depending on the time of long press) and a light amount are displayed on the effect display device 1600 by long pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). After displaying the gauge image), the volume and amount of light are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2) each time the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed for a short time. ..), And the volume and the amount of light can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during the period in which an effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being performed during symbol variation, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for that effect. Even if the operation is performed, the prohibition period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted is set.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the production member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change-permitted state, a state in which it is impossible to display the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (unvariable) In the state A), the initial operation of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each such production member is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, each of the production members is sequentially or simultaneously arranged in a predetermined operation pattern. By operating, the confirmation of whether or not the effect member operates normally from the initial position toward the operation position, and accurate alignment so that the effect member waits at the initial position are performed. And after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the change.

  If the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is displayed. As described above, since the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting, immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which the special symbol variable display on the 1400 special symbol display can be performed. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is possible without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In the initial operation of the effect member, when a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the design variation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the opportunity to operate the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be performed (the non-variable state A). However, since the initial operation of the production member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed, the initial operation of the production member is completed when shifting to the variable state after completion of the confirmation display state. The possibility is high. Thereby, even after the end of the confirmation display state, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation, it is not affected by the initial operation of the effect member, Based on the variation pattern, the production member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position, and information obtained from the production content is not missed.

  However, the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 requires a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to be completed. For this reason, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the effect member is completed in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the initial effect member is displayed. Waiting for the completion of the operation, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. In other words, the timing at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member. In any case, the setting key switch at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned OFF, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

  In addition, when each production member is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, at least the initial operation of the production member mounted on the game board 5 is executed in advance and is mounted on the main body frame 4. The initial operation of the effect member that has been performed may be delayed until “after closing the main body frame 4 at timing t5”. This is because the body frame 4 is opened during setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display, and the body frame 4 is closed by the closing operation of the body frame 4 after the setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display ends. An impact is generated in the frame 4. For this reason, during the closing operation of the main body frame 4, there is a possibility that a production member mounted on the main body frame 4 will not operate normally, or a situation such as a displacement of the initial position may occur, The initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 can be dealt with even when such a situation occurs by starting after the main body frame 4 is closed.

  In addition, after each of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is sequentially or simultaneously initialized, the initial operation of each effect member is not normally completed (each effect member The initial detection is performed again when there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time by the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of the current position, or when there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position at the predetermined time. When there is a production member that is not detected at the initial position even at a predetermined time after the operation or retry operation is performed), the production using the production member that has not been completed normally is executed during symbol variation. It is supposed to be restricted so as not to. Here, as described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the pachinko machine Immediately after the machine 1 is turned on, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be displayed in a variable state (variable state), and the initial operation of the effect member is performed. . In this example, if the initial operation of the effect member under such circumstances is not completed normally, the player feels uncomfortable that the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position during the special symbol variation display. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, and the setting value setting is changed and the setting value confirmation display is performed. If there is not, any effect member is detected at the initial position at a predetermined time after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 (time when the initial operation of each effect member is finished and is assumed to be located at the initial position). When it is not, an initial position error notification to the outside is performed by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker.

  On the other hand, when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation during the setting value setting change (change permission state) or the setting value confirmation display (confirmation display state), the normal setting change or confirmation display is performed. In order to avoid the hindrance to the work, even if the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position, the initial position error notification is not performed. Then, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are completed, an initial position error notification to the outside is performed by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from the lamp, and the speaker. The initial position error notification is started after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. However, the initial position error notification is a specification that starts in advance from the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation. May be. In addition, at the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation, notification of a mode that does not hinder normal setting change or confirmation display work among images from the effect display device 1600, lamps, and speakers ( For example, the specification may be executed in advance only for the lamp).

  As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a special It is in a state in which it is not possible to display the symbols in a variable manner, and while preventing the progress of the game, the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are prevented. While the period during which the initial operation is performed may be set, the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display may not be performed. In addition, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the hall clerk turns the operation on, the time until the operation is turned off. , The special movement of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed while preventing the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns the operation ON, while the special symbol variation display is disabled. It may be a period of time. Even in such a case, after the hall clerk turns off the operation, even if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern change, the initial operation of the effect member is affected. Accordingly, the effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern, and information obtained from the effect contents can be prevented from being missed.

  As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the volume output from the speaker, the light amount output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to adjust. More specifically, when the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3. Prior to starting the setting change process in step S37 and the set value confirmation display process in step S28, the wait time waiting process in step S22 is performed. In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs an initialization process for starting (booting) a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. It is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. Thus, at the start of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510. The operation of the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the production display device 1600 can be adjusted. It has become.

  In addition, regarding the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600, the volume before the power is shut off when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Information regarding the amount of light is not retained, and the initial state (for example, a state in which the volume and the amount of light have a median value) is restored. For this reason, the volume and light amount after power-on change to a state different from the volume and light amount adjusted before power-off.

  Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the change permission state and the confirmation display state are terminated, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are terminated, the special symbol display in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is completed. It has shifted to a variable state where it is possible to perform a variable display of symbols. That is, prior to the player being able to start playing in a variable state, the sound is output from a light output member such as a volume output from a speaker, a lamp, or a screen of the effect display device 1600. The amount of light to be adjusted can be adjusted. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect is set during symbol variation is used. In the case of transmission, a sound (game sound) is output from the speaker based on the information set for the effect during the design variation, or light is emitted from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. If such an effect is started before the adjustment of the light quantity and volume, the volume and light quantity are output in the initial state, and the player may feel uncomfortable. In this example, in this example, the player can start the game by adjusting the volume and the amount of light before the player can start the game in the variable state. In the meantime, the volume and light quantity can be changed from the initial state, and after the game is started by the player, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable due to the volume and light quantity in the initial state.

  In this example, an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) (a volume gauge image representing a five-stage adjustment state depending on the time of long press, After displaying the light intensity gauge image), the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 →) each time the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161) is further pressed. 2), and the volume and the amount of light can be determined by not operating the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. In the changeable state, when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and light amount are changed. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to change the volume and the amount of light when the presentation operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated. The change sound is not output. This is because it is assumed that the hole manager is changing the setting value or confirming the setting value in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall manager is emphasized rather than the necessity of outputting a change sound notifying that the volume or the amount of light has been changed, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. In addition, when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, the light amount is changed and light is output from a light emitting member such as a lamp or a screen of the effect display device 1600 with the changed light amount. Since it is not an event that hinders the work of the hall manager, it is not prohibited even in a change permission state or a confirmation display state.

  Further, in this example, in the variable display state, when an operation for changing the volume or the light amount is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), the output is performed at the adjusted volume or light amount at that time. It reflects immediately. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation of changing the volume or the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), but at that time, The output is not reflected so as to be output with the adjusted volume and light quantity, but is reflected so that the output is performed with the adjusted volume and light quantity after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished. In other words, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as will be described in detail later, a warning notification is given to the outside so that a person other than the hall manager does not cheat. Although the output from the effect display device 1600 being executed as such a warning notice, the output from the lamp or speaker is not allowed to be the adjusted volume or light amount, and is set to a fixed volume or light amount. I am doing so. As a result, even in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even when an operation for changing the volume or the light amount is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), it is difficult to notice the warning alert being executed. Can be prevented and the fraud monitoring system can be prevented from weakening.

  As described above, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, warning notifications are executed to the outside so that non-hall managers do not cheat, but the details are changed as described later. Even after completion of the permission state or the confirmation display state, the warning notification can be extended and executed. Then, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended, the volume or the sound volume can be set using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) even during the execution of the extended warning notification. It is possible to perform an operation to change the amount of light, but at that point in time, it is not reflected to output with the adjusted volume and light amount, and after adjustment of the extended warning notification, the adjusted volume and light amount This is reflected in the output. In other words, the warning display is extended and the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 being executed is also set to a fixed volume and light amount, making it impossible to set the adjusted volume and light amount. . Thereby, similarly to the change permission state and the confirmation display state, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the volume or the volume using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is Even if an operation for changing the amount of light is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to notice the warning notice being extended and to prevent the fraud monitoring system from becoming weak.

  Further, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation of changing the volume and the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished. However, some of the multiple lamps are reflected at the adjusted volume and light amount when an operation to change the volume and light amount is performed. You may reflect so that it may output. For example, among the multiple lamps, the lamp used for warning alerts is reflected to output with the adjusted volume and light quantity to maintain the fraud monitoring system when the operation to change the volume and light quantity is performed. In this case, all or a part of the lamps that are not used for warning notification may be reflected so as to be output with the adjusted volume and light amount when an operation for changing the sound volume and light amount is performed.

[13-4. About fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various frauds are monitored in the fraud detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning holes and gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 by bringing the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent acts such as entering the ball, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, and monitors the fraudulent acts by the magnet. The monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU so that the peripheral control MPU performs fraud related error processing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5 to change to the game board 5. The main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor by providing a vibration sensor that detects fraud such as entering various winning holes and gates (gates) provided, A fraudulent act due to vibration is monitored, the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is caused to perform fraud related error processing. Regarding monitoring of these fraudulent activities, the normal state (the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed), the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed, Thus, the monitoring mode is different.

  In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent acts by a magnet, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is a setting change board 1311 or a setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board 5 One magnetic sensor capable of specifying whether the game area 5a is located in front of the game area 5a is provided. In a normal state, the magnetic sensor 2470 generates magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not occur in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It monitors whether it has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), monitors fraudulent acts such as a setting change or confirmation display by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display, and is located in front of the game area 5a. The game board is monitored by monitoring whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated has occurred in the area (whether the magnet has approached), and changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a 5 is monitored for illegal activities such as entering various winning awards and gates (gates). In addition, as an illegal act with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) The magnet and the metal fraud are made through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility or an opening that has destroyed a part of the pachinko machine 1 with a magnet that indirectly manipulates the metal fraudulent instrument. It is conceivable to operate the instrument and illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, it is determined that a fraud using a magnet is being performed. If it is determined that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Is output so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent act is being performed.

  Further, although not shown, the magnetic sensor 2470 of the present example is configured by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and is a first magnetic detection having a directivity that is highly sensitive in the vertical direction with respect to the side surface on one side. Magnetic detection in the region and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection region having a directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to the other side surface, which is the opposite side, can be performed. ing. “High sensitivity in the vertical direction” means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The magnetic sensor 2470 is arranged such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region that are emitted from the side surface of the sensor body are spread in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and one magnetic detection region Includes the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic detection area is a winning port such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, the big winning port 2005, etc. on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and others. It is possible to monitor a plurality of main parts of the spherical flow path, and the other magnetic detection area includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The area provided with can be monitored. With such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided or whether the magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a. .

  Further, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal act due to vibration, vibration capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the sorting piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. A sensor 3004 is provided. In addition, during the big hit game during normal times, the fraudulent act is monitored using the vibration sensor 3005, and other than the big hit game, the fraudulent act is not monitored using the vibration sensor 3005. This is because, in the big hit game, the game balls B that are received in the big prize opening 2005 by the distribution piece 2415 and circulate inside are distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008. When vibration is applied to the sorting piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the special winning opening 2005 and to allow the game ball B to enter the second receiving port 2008. This is to prevent such fraud. In other words, during the big hit game during normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 applies vibration that should not occur (vibration due to unauthorized access) to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005. It monitors whether or not the game ball B has changed the course of the game ball B inside the special winning opening 2005 and causes the game ball B to enter the second receiving port 2008.

  Note that in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the vibration sensor 3005, an improper act due to vibration is performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005. Deciding. And when it is judged that fraudulent acts due to vibration are performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the prize winning opening 2005, it is installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent act is being performed.

  Also, the security signal that is output when it is determined that an illegal act due to vibration is being performed is the same signal as the security signal that is output when it is determined that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed. . However, when a security signal is output because it is determined that a fraudulent act is caused by vibration, and when a security signal is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, The notification mode when external notification is performed in fraud-related error processing controlled by the control MPU is different. That is, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed and a security signal is output, in an aspect corresponding to the fraudulent act due to vibration, from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 When a security signal is output when it is determined that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed while an output is notified, an effect display is performed in a manner corresponding to an illegal act using a magnet. The notification by the image from the apparatus 1600, the output from the lamp, or the speaker is performed, so that it is possible to distinguish which fraud is being performed.

  Next, monitoring of fraudulent behavior during setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. FIG. FIG. 111 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraud during the setting value setting change, and FIG. 112 is a time chart showing the fraud monitoring state during the confirmation display of the setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 111, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the setting value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button. This is because there is no room for an unauthorized person using a magnet except for an authorized worker who changes the setting. In addition, when a setting change is made to a set value, even if a legitimate worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Inhibition of regular setting change work can be suppressed.

  Further, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, in the change-permitted state, an authorized operator who changes the setting value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button, and the setting is performed. This is because there is no room for unauthorized conduct by vibration other than a regular worker who makes changes. In addition, even when a regular operator who changes the setting value makes a vibration when the setting value is changed, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to vibration. Inhibition can be suppressed.

  In this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, and the power switch 630a is operated to operate the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. The state in which the change can be performed (change permission state) is entered, but when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. In addition to this, even when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is terminated, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. On the other hand, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. That is, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. This security signal is detected when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input in a state in which the magnetic sensor 2470 is used to monitor a fraudulent act by a magnet, In the state where the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor a fraudulent act due to vibration, when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input and it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed, It is the same signal as the output signal. However, the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is a state in which monitoring of cheating using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 are not performed. Even if the monitoring of such illegal activities is not performed, the security signal is output to the hall computer to warn the pachinko machine 1 to be monitored through the hall computer. The hall clerk can be informed through the hall computer that the setting has been changed. That is, the hall clerk can monitor, through the hall computer, that the setting value has not been changed by a person who performs fraud through the hall computer. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the main control MPU outputs a second security signal, and the setting change of the setting value is completed by the second security signal. Can be grasped by the hall clerk through the hall computer.

  The security signal only needs to be output to the hall computer for a time that can be recognized by the hall computer, and the time from timing t3 to timing t3 ′ is short (for example, 1 second or less). It may be long time (for example, 10 seconds or more). However, if the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, There is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is not set at the timing t4 when the setting key is turned off, that is, when the change permission state is ended. That is, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 before the timing t3 'at which the first security signal output ends. As described above, when the output of the first security signal is not completed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is finished, the first security signal is not finished. After the output of the signal is completed, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second). That is, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the output of the first security signal is completed. As a result, even if the output of the first security signal is not completed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is finished, the hall computer is not finished. The security signal can be reliably output twice.

  As another example of the case where the predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be performed. That is, when the output of the first security signal is not completed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is terminated, a new security signal is generated from that time. (The timer for counting the signal output time is set again) and the first security signal and the second security signal may be output in a continuous manner. In this case, the security signal is output over a long period exceeding a predetermined maximum output time (the output time of the first security signal), and the set value is the same as when the second security signal is output. It is possible for the hall clerk to know through the output of a security signal over a long period that the setting change has been completed. If it is not necessary for the hall clerk to know through the hall computer that the setting change has been completed using the security signal output mode, depending on the game hall environment, etc., based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch, etc. It may be possible to cancel without outputting the second security signal itself.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed, as in the change permission state. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and an unauthorized act using a magnet is performed by a person other than the regular worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value. This is because there is no room to perform. In addition, when performing a confirmation display of the set value, even if an authorized worker performing the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Inhibition of regular confirmation display work can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed as in the change permission state. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is a room for a person other than the regular worker who performs the confirmation display to perform fraud due to vibration. This is because there is not. In addition, even when a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the set value adds vibration, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act due to vibration, and Inhibition can be suppressed.

  In this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, and the power switch 630a is operated to operate the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. Although the confirmation display can be performed (confirmation display state), the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state is started, the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is connected. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side. On the other hand, at the end of the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the main computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 While the control MPU outputs a security signal, at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the control MPU outputs the security signal to the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU does not output a security signal to the installed hall computer. That is, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer, whereas when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the security signal is set to 1 for the hall computer. Will be output only once. As a result, the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which monitoring of cheating using the magnetic sensor 2470 or monitoring of cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. Yes, even though the monitoring of such fraudulent activity is not being executed, a security signal is output to the hall computer to warn the monitoring of the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer and set it properly The hall clerk can be made aware through the hall computer that the value is being displayed. That is, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer that the setting value confirmation display is not performed by a person who performs an illegal act through the hall computer. Note that when the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF at the timing t4, the main control MPU does not output the second security signal unlike the change permission state. It is possible to distinguish which one of the confirmation display was performed.

  In addition, when a security signal is output to the hall computer because it is determined that an illegal act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, the peripheral control is performed based on the transmission of the monitoring result from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. As an external notification in an error-related process controlled by the MPU, notification is performed by an output from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker, whereas a setting value setting change (change permission state) or a setting value When a security signal is output to the hall computer at the time of setting confirmation (confirmation display state), no information related to the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and errors related to control by the peripheral control MPU As an external notification in the process, all notifications by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, and a speaker are performed. It is as in no. This also prevents the normal setting change and confirmation display work from being hindered.

  As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, Until the key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, it is a period in which the monitoring of the fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, while the setting value setting change and the setting value confirmation display are not performed. You may do it. Further, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the hall clerk turns on the operation of the other operation unit, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are provided. It is good also as a period which does not perform the monitoring of the fraudulent act using. Even in such a case, even when a regular worker who performs the inspection work approaches or vibrates the magnet when performing the inspection work of the pachinko machine 1, it is detected as an illegal act due to the magnet or vibration. Can be prevented and inhibition of regular inspection work can be suppressed. In addition, at least at the start of a period during which fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, a security signal is output to the hall computer, similar to the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Thus, the monitoring to the pachinko machine 1 is warned through the hall computer, and the hall clerk can be informed through the hall computer that the inspection work is being carried out normally.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board) 1 is provided in front of the game area 5a), but a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, for example, on the front side of the game board 5. The magnetic sensors may be able to detect the occurrence of magnetism in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located in front of the game area 5a located and on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, as in the configuration of the single magnetic sensor 2470 described above, in the normal state, monitoring of fraud using a plurality of magnetic sensors is performed, whereas the change permission state and the confirmation display state However, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, some of the magnetic sensors (for example, setting change) may not be executed. It is also possible to perform monitoring of fraud using only the magnetic sensor provided around the substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a.

  Similarly, in this example, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the sorting piece 2415 inside the special prize opening 2005 provided in the game board 5 as the vibration sensor 3005 that detects fraud by vibration. Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors are provided. For example, in addition to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 in the big prize opening 2005, the big prize opening located on the front side of the game board 5 Each vibration sensor may be able to detect the occurrence of vibration also in the vicinity of the entrance other than 2005, or in the vicinity of the setting change board 13111 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, in a normal time, monitoring of fraudulent activity using a plurality of vibration sensors is executed (however, with respect to the vibration sensors provided around the sorting piece 2415 inside the special prize opening 2005, In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it may be possible not to execute the fraud monitoring using a plurality of vibration sensors, but in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, You may make it perform monitoring of fraud using only some vibration sensors (for example, the vibration sensor provided in the periphery of the setting change board | substrate 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a) among several vibration sensors.

  In addition, fraudulent acts due to magnets or vibration may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends (immediately after the start of fraud monitoring). There is concern over the occurrence of a situation in which an important security signal based on the detection of an action cannot be output and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be performed. In other words, the security signal output timing based on the detection of fraud is delayed so that the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state elapses. It can be exemplified that the output timings of security signals based on detection of fraud are not overlapped. Specifically, although monitoring of fraud is immediately started after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal in the confirmation display state If a trigger for detecting a new security signal (detection of fraud) occurs within the output period of, the output of the security signal that was output in advance without discarding the output of the new security signal It is also possible to store and hold the output information of a new security signal until the process is completed, and to output a new security signal with a delay from the original output timing. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraud is not discarded and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. As another example, the start time of fraud monitoring itself may be extended until the second security signal output period in the change-permitted state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state ends. It is good. Even in such an embodiment, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraud is not discarded, and the occurrence of a situation where the fraud monitoring system is weakened can be suppressed.

[14. About command transmission processing]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a predetermined storage area (stores commands in the main control built-in RAM) at various times using information related to control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands. Information in the pachinko machine 1 and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the peripheral control board 1510 side by sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510. I can grasp it. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control built-in RAM is used as various commands for information relating to the control of the game effect and the state of the pachinko machine 1 when performing setting change of the set value and confirmation display of the set value. While the change permission state or confirmation display state is being executed, only some commands are immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 while the remaining commands are in the change permission state or confirmation display state. After completion, the data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  First, command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 (A) is a time chart showing command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is normally turned on (when setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display is not performed). These are the time charts which show the transmission timing of the command in the case of performing the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, at least the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process is started, and the game ball B is placed in various winning openings and the gate unit 2003. It is described that the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each when entering the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Then, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, as described in [Pachinko machine behavior at power-on] described above, the processing of steps S10 to S24 of the main control-side power-on processing is executed. When ty arrives, it is determined which combination is the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (steps S25 to S27). In step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, the process shifts to the setting change process in step S37 to enter the setting permission state. If the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM in step S38. After the initialization, the variable state is made possible. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU permits a preset set value display. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the set value confirmation display process in step S28 to enter the confirmation display state. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 0, the main control built-in RAM in step S38. The variable state is made possible without initializing the. As described above, the variable state is a function display by starting the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. This is a state in which the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the unit 1400 can be performed.

  As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) is activated by a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Since the initialization process for performing (booting) has been completed, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received after the timing ty.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (A), the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at the timing t3, and the setting value setting change and the setting value confirmation display are not performed assuming that the power is normally turned on. In this case, if the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing t3, the main control built-in RAM is initialized from the timing ty to the variable state after the initialization. On the other hand, if the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing t3, the variable control state is made from the timing ty without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information relating to control of game effects and information relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control built-in RAM. As soon as is set, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened at the timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door opening command for specifying that the main body frame 4 is opened in the command buffer, and opens the door. As soon as the hour command is set, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), and in the period until the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed arrives, the effect display device A door opening notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is open is executed by an image from 1600, a lamp, and a speaker. As the notification when the door is opened, a sound that repeats “door is open”, a message “door is open!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. Thus, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the hall manager can immediately know that the main body frame 4 is opened by performing a notification when the door is opened toward the outside. While 4 is open, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring system so that only the hall manager will perform illegal acts.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (B), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing t3 and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed, the RWM is also performed at the timing t3. When the pressing operation unit of the clear button 633z is operated, a change permission state in which the setting value can be changed from the timing ty is set, while the RWM clear button 633z is pressed at the timing t3. If the unit is not operated, a confirmation display state in which the confirmation display of the set value can be performed from the point of time ty. In the change-permitted state, the change-permitted state ends at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and changes from the timing t4 after the initialization of the main control built-in RAM in step S38. Make it possible. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is ended at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is not initialized from the timing t4. Make it possible.

  In the change permission state and the confirmation display state described above, the main control MPU sets information related to control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. The storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set differs depending on the type of the command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, as the storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM, the first storage area (first command buffer) and the second storage area (second command buffer) When a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. On the other hand, when a command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, without being immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At the time t4, the second command buffer is held. Send the command set to the peripheral control board 1510 . That is, at least in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a command that needs to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 is set in the first command buffer, while the change permission state or the like is set in the second command buffer at timing t4. A command that needs to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 after the confirmation display state is finished is set.

  Except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information related to control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer, and stores them in the first command buffer. When a command is set, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the command is set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer, but all commands are changed except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state. A command is set only in the first command buffer so that it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. However, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first command buffer and the second command buffer are not divided, and if a command is set in the undivided command buffer, the command is immediately It may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  First, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, as a command set in the second command buffer, as a command related to fraud monitoring, a command at the time of opening the door for specifying that the main body frame 4 is open, and various winning awards When the game ball B enters the gate unit 2003 (first start port 2002, second start port 2004, grand prize winning port 2005, etc.), the detection itself (abnormal pitch) ) Command for abnormal entry to specify that there was. Specifically, the door opening command is set in the second command buffer when the body frame 4 is open at the timing ty, which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the second command When the door opening command is set in the buffer, the door opening command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at the timing t4. The door opening time command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The abnormal entry command is set in the second command buffer when the game ball B is detected (abnormal entry) in the change permission state or the confirmation display state from the timing ty to the timing t4. When the abnormal entry command is set in the second command buffer, the abnormal entry command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. At the timing t4, the abnormal entry command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the timing t5 that is the timing for closing the main body frame 4 arrives. Performs notification at the time of door opening that notifies that the main body frame 4 is opened by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker. As the notification when the door is opened, a sound that repeats “door is open”, a message “door is open!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that images, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 are displayed over a predetermined period from the timing t4. In response to the output from, a notification at the time of abnormal entry is executed for notifying that there has been an abnormal entry at various winning openings and the gate unit 2003. As this abnormal entry notification, a voice that repeats “abnormal entry”, a message display “abnormal entry is present!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. Thus, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened, and whether or not there are abnormal balls in the various winning entrances and the gate unit 2003, and the change permission state and the confirmation are confirmed. After the display state is finished, notification to the outside when the door is opened or abnormal entry is performed, so that the main body frame 4 is opened, or abnormal entry is made at various winning openings or the gate unit 2003. The hall manager can grasp what happened. In addition, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, it is possible to simultaneously execute a notification at the time of door opening and an abnormal entry at the time of an abnormal entry. Notification) may be executed with priority.

  As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring such as a door opening command and an abnormal winning command are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the set command is immediately stored in the peripheral control board 1510. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF without transmission, and the command set in the second command buffer is The data is transmitted to the control board 1510. As a result, when changing the set value or displaying the confirmation of the set value, it is possible to prevent the notification at the time of opening the door or the notification at the time of abnormal entry due to unauthorized detection unintended by the hall manager. Can be inhibited.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the command set in the first command buffer includes a setting change command for specifying that the change permission state is started or a confirmation display state start as a command related to the setting. Setting confirmation command that identifies the time, setting change completion command that identifies when the change permission state ends, setting value confirmation display completion command that identifies when the confirmation display state ends . Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the setting confirmation command is set at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts. The first command buffer is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at the timing t4 when the change permission state ends, and the set value confirmation display completion command at the timing t4 when the confirmation display state ends. At this point, the command is set in the first command buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set.

  The peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. During the period, warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. . The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command includes a voice that repeats “setting is being changed”, a message “setting is being changed!”, And lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting change. It is said. In addition, the warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command includes the sound “Setting confirmation in progress”, the message “Setting confirmation in progress!”, And the lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting value confirmation (setting value). The light emission mode is different from the lamp light emission with the corresponding color during the setting change. In this way, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the hall manager indicates that it is possible to perform setting change of the set value and confirmation display of the set value by executing a warning notification to the outside. The monitoring system can be immediately grasped, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that only the hall manager can perform an illegal act in the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  As described above, commands related to settings such as the setting change command and the setting confirmation command are set in the first command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start time of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, and the set command is Immediately after transmission to the peripheral control board 1510. In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, even when the main body frame 4 is open or when there is an abnormal ball entry in various winning openings or the gate part 2003, the notification is made when the door is opened until after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. Because it delays the execution of notifications at the time of abnormal entry and abnormal entry, it is not a normal fraud monitoring system. However, setting change commands, setting confirmation commands, etc. precede the commands set in the second command buffer. By sending a command (special command for warning) related to the setting to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system will be strengthened so that no unauthorized person can perform an illegal act even in a change permission state or a confirmation display state. be able to.

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU executes a warning notification corresponding to the type of the command. In the change-permitted state, the setting value can be changed. Compared with the confirmation display state, a monitoring system is in place to prevent unauthorized changes by other than the hall administrator. However, by executing a warning notification corresponding to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately determine whether or not the monitoring system needs to be strengthened.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door opening command or abnormal entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, the peripheral control MPU performs door opening notification or abnormal entry notification. However, in these notifications, not only a predetermined message content is notified by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from the lamp, and a speaker, but also a warning sound such as “BeeBee” is added to the sound from the speaker. Output (“Door is open, BB, Door is open,...”) Is executed with a combination of “message + warning sound”. On the other hand, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, a warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed. In the notification, a predetermined message content is notified by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, and a speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is executed only by voice without outputting a warning sound. ing. As a result, even when a warning effect corresponding to the type of command is executed when setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display is performed, it is directed to the outside as compared to a door opening notification or abnormal entry notification. Appeal can be suppressed, and inhibition of regular work can be suppressed.

[14-1. Game information command transmission timing]
In the above-described embodiment, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the set value confirmation display process of step S28. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are incorporated in the main control. By setting the RAM in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) and sequentially transmitting the set game information commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 also grasps information related to the game before the power is shut off. be able to. Thereby, after the confirmation display state is finished, the peripheral control board 1510 shows the current gaming state, the change display of the special symbol that is interrupted when the power is shut off, the number of holdings stored when the power is shut off, and the like. As the peripheral control MPU recognizes the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU restores the effect produced by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. The display can be resumed, or the display of the stored number of suspensions when the power is turned off can be resumed.

  In this regard, for the game information command, the second command buffer is not at the end of the confirmation display state (at time t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) but at the start of the confirmation display state (at time ty). When the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. The game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at time t4. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when such game backup information is transmitted as a game information command will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 115A is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the pachinko machine 1 is normally turned on (when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated). FIG. 115 (B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the set value confirmation display is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  In this example, the case where the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the game backup information is transmitted as a game information command has been described. When initializing the main control built-in RAM or changing the setting value by operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z when the power is turned on, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is specified. Since it is cleared except for the area, the game backup information is lost, and the game backup information is not transmitted as a game information command.

  As shown in FIG. 114, in the main control power-on process of this example, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set in step S26. When it is determined that the value is not 0, first, the processes of steps S29 to S36 are performed. Among the processes of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. Yes. Then, following the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. If it is determined that there is, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). That is, the processing of step S32 is performed before the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. (Command buffer) is set. In addition, when the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29, or the checksum value (sum value) in step S30. The restart of the game will be delayed by the amount of time to determine whether or not it matches the stored checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off process (power-off). By performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 before performing the set value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time until the game is resumed after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is shortened. Will be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the power is normally turned on, that is, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at the timing t3, the timing ty is changed. From the time point, the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is brought into a variable state without being initialized. At timing ty, which is the start of such a variable state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and immediately after setting the game information command. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU quickly restores the effect (the output from the effect display device 1600, the image from the lamp, and the speaker) at the time of timing ty, which is the start of the variable state. be able to.

  When the peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU has a production member (for example, production operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, from the point of time ty, which is the start of the changeable state, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Has been done. Each such production member is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. Such as confirmation, and accurate alignment is performed so that the production member waits at the initial position. Thereby, even if the production member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty that is the start of the variable state, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the production member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the production member waits at a position shifted from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the production member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. Then, after the initial operation of the effect member is finished, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during the pattern variation is transmitted, a predetermined pattern variation At this timing, the production member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As shown in FIG. 115B, when the setting value confirmation display is performed, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing t3, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If there is not, a confirmation display state in which a confirmation display of the set value can be performed is made from the timing ty. In the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is terminated at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is not initialized from the timing t4. Make it possible. In such a case, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and stores the game information command in the second command buffer. Is set, the game information command set is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, but the game set in the second command buffer until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. The information command is held, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can restore the effect (the output from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker) at the time of timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state. it can.

  As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The game information command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is peripherally controlled at the timing t4. The data is transmitted to the substrate 1510. As a result, when the setting value confirmation display is performed, it is possible to prevent the effect (output from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp and the speaker) from being restored at the time when the power is shut off, and hinder the normal work. Can be suppressed. Since the game backup information has already been set as the game information command in the second command buffer at the timing ty that is the start of the confirmation display state, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 Even if the game backup information is destroyed due to noise, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set setting confirmation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral member (for example, the directing operation) is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. In other words, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Has been done. Each such production member is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. Such as confirmation, and accurate alignment is performed so that the production member waits at the initial position. Thereby, even if the production member is at a position shifted from the initial position at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the production member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the production member waits at a position shifted from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the production member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. And after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during the pattern variation is transmitted, a predetermined pattern variation At this timing, the production member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As described above, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 is completed, the variation pattern command can be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, while the period is from the timing ty to the timing t4. In the confirmation display state, the fluctuation pattern is not transmitted. For this reason, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the effect member does not operate by transmitting the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation, It cannot be determined whether or not the product is not operating due to a failure of the effect member. In this respect, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are initially displayed. By performing the operation, it is possible to notify the outside that “the production member is normal but not accompanied by a game”, and it is possible to determine that the production member is not a failure. In this example, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed, but the operation is performed to notify that the effect member is not a failure. For example, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing ty to timing t4, only the provisional operation of the effect member is performed separately from the initial operation, and after the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends. The initial operation of the effect member may be performed. The temporary operation of the effect member may be an operation different from the initial operation or the same operation as the initial operation.

  When the setting value is changed, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start time of the change permission state, and the set setting change command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Is sending to. When the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 in the same manner as when the setting confirmation command is received. The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) being performed is performed. As described above, also in the change permission state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, as in the confirmation display state, the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of production operation units 160 are mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5). By performing the initial operation of the rotating decoration body 3210), it is possible to notify the outside that “the production member is normal but not accompanied by the game”, and it is not a failure of the production member. Can be determined.

[14-2. About the extension of warning alerts after the end of change permission status and confirmation display status]
In the above-described embodiment, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of the command is output by the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. Although it is executed, the warning notification may be extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. A case where the warning alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a time chart illustrating a case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the details have been described above, but the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the start of the change permission state at timing ty, and the first command is set at the end of the confirmation display state at timing ty. A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. The peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. During the period, warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker.

  At the end of the change permission state at timing t4, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and at the start of the confirmation display state at timing t4, a setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. Any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command and a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, from the timing t4) In the period until the timing t4 ′ after 30 seconds elapses, the warning display that is being executed from the point of time ty is continuously executed by the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. Yes. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of the command is executed. The warning notification is extended and executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) that is a period from t4 to timing t4 ′. The extension of the warning notification ends when a warning notification extension end condition is set and the set extension end condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the warning notification is extended for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer unit, and the timer unit counts the predetermined time. And end when the time expires. As another example, when a predetermined number of voice notifications (for example, a loop of five message voices) is ended as an extension period of the warning notification, the predetermined number of times is set in a specific counting unit and the count is counted. The unit may end when the number of times starts and the number of times expires.

  As described above, when the change permission state and the confirmation display state are executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also the timing t4 ′ at which a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t4. Until this period, the warning alert is extended. For example, when the warning notification is executed only when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, the warning notification is executed in a short time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the timing ty that is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the time for executing the warning notification, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, is shortened. If a confirmation is displayed, the hall manager may not be aware. In particular, when a setting value confirmation display is performed, it is not necessary to change the setting value, so it is possible for a person other than the hall administrator to perform a setting value confirmation display in a short time. May not notice. On the other hand, when the warning notification is extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, a short time (for example, 1) from the timing ty that is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF in (˜2 seconds), a period from the timing t4 to the timing t4 ′ is secured as the time for executing the warning notification. For this reason, even if a person other than the hall administrator makes a setting value change or confirms the setting value illegally in a short period of time, it is easy for the hall administrator to notice, and a person other than the hall administrator must perform an illegal act. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that there is no problem.

  Further, as described above in detail, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from timing ty to timing t4, the warning corresponding to the type of command is output by the image, lamp, and speaker output of the effect display device 1600. Information is being executed. The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command includes a voice that repeats “setting is being changed”, a message “setting is being changed!”, And lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting change. It is said. In addition, the warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command includes the sound “Setting confirmation is in progress”, the message “Setting confirmation is in progress!”, And lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting value setting confirmation. I am going to do that. When the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the message content of the warning notification in the change permission state or the confirmation display state may be maintained. The message content may be different from the status and confirmation display status. For example, in the warning notification after the change permission state or confirmation display state is finished, the message content that is different from the message content in the change permission state or confirmation display state is "Setting change completed" or "Setting confirmation is completed" It may be configured to output a message such as “I did”. As a result, not only the above-mentioned countermeasures against fraud, but also when the change permission state and the confirmation display state are properly terminated, it is possible to make the hall manager easily aware of this. In addition, when maintaining the warning alert message content in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, make sure that the alert notification is not temporarily divided at t4, which is the switching timing of the alert alert extension. Also good. For example, for at least the alert output that is executed in response to the command type in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the sound output from the speaker is continuously output until the sound is completed so that it does not end midway For example, the voice in the warning notification that is controlled to be extended may be executed again from the beginning of the voice after completion of the continuously output warning notification voice.

  As for the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is notified when the door is opened or abnormally entered. The warning sound such as “Bee-Bee” is not output, but is executed only by voice. In addition, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, are in a non-variable state in which it is impossible to display the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. On the other hand, after the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, is in a variable state in which the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be performed. For example, when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various effect sounds are output from the speakers. In this regard, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed, a warning sound is not output from the speaker as a warning notification, so a limited number is provided to output sound. When there is no vacancy (unused channel) in the finitely provided channel when assigning to the finitely provided channel to output various performance sounds Can be avoided as much as possible.

  Further, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the peripheral control MPU performs a door opening command or abnormal entry from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. The time command is received, but the door is opened from the timing t4 ′, which is the end time of the warning notification that has been extended without performing the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification at the timing t4. Time notification and abnormal entry notification are executed. That is, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the extended warning notification is executed in preference to the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification. As a result, even if a person other than the hall administrator performs a setting value change or setting value confirmation display illegally in a short time, the hall administrator can give priority to the extended warning notification so that the hall administrator It is easy to notice and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that no one other than the hall manager can perform fraud. In addition, about the alert | reporting (for example, alerting | reporting at the time of abnormal entry) about the serious injustice, it is not in the time of timing t4 'which is the time of completion | finish of the alert alert performed extended, and the alert alert extended is being performed. However, it may be executed at the timing t4.

  As for the notification when the door is opened or when the abnormal ball is entered, not only the predetermined message content is notified by the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp or the speaker, but also a warning sound such as “Bee-Bee” from the speaker. Is output and executed with a combination of “message + warning sound”. The door opening notification or abnormal entry notification is output continuously during execution of the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification, but is output only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It is good. However, in this example, since the alarm at the time of opening the door and the alarm at the time of abnormal entry are executed from the timing t4 ′, which is the end of the alarm alarm that has been executed in an extended manner, for example, an extended alarm alarm time (timing) When the period from t4 to timing t4 ′) is longer than or equal to the output time (for example, 10 seconds) of the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification, the door opening notification or abnormality The notification when entering the ball will not be output. In view of the problem due to the decrease in the notification frequency, the warning notification extended time (period from timing t4 to timing t4 ′) is longer than or equal to the warning sound output time (for example, 10 seconds). May be configured to output the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification only for the remaining time after the warning notification extension time of the output time of the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification. . Moreover, you may comprise so that the alert | report at the time of a door opening and the alert | report at the time of abnormal entrance may be newly started after the extended time of alert alert | report.

  In addition, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the door opening notification is executed from timing t4 ′ which is the end of the extended warning notification. When the timing t5 at which the main body frame 4 is closed comes before the timing t4 ′, the notification when the door is opened is not executed. That is, when the main body frame 4 is closed during the execution of the extended warning notification, the notification when the door is opened is not executed. However, when the main body frame 4 is closed during the execution of the extended warning notification and the main body frame 4 is opened again before the timing t4 ′, the extended warning notification is terminated and the notification at the time of opening the door is performed. Running. Normally, after the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display, the main body frame 4 is only closed and the main body frame 4 is not opened again. If an incomprehensible situation occurs in which the main body frame 4 is opened again immediately after the setting change or setting value confirmation display is performed, a door opening notification consisting of a combination of “message + warning sound” is used as a warning notification. By giving priority to execution, it is easy for the hall manager to notice that the main frame 4 is open due to an incomprehensible situation that is suspected of fraud, and the main frame 4 is open. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that there is no problem.

  In addition, as described above in detail, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not executed. On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is performed (however, regarding the monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005) , Only during jackpot games). If it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, a fraud notification based on an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker is executed as an external notification. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the unauthorized notification is executed in preference to the extended warning notification. In this way, for fraud reports that are suspected of severe fraud, such as magnets and vibrations, it is easier for hall managers to notice by giving priority over extended warning alerts, and other than hall managers may perform fraudulent acts. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that

  In the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by an output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. For example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display is performed. The image of the device 1600 may not be output. Thus, in the structure which performs warning alerting | reporting using a part of some alerting | reporting members (effect display apparatus 1600, a lamp | ramp, a speaker), alert alerting is extended and performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. In this case, it is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as a warning notice during extension, but when it is determined that an illegal act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is output as a warning notice during extension. The unauthorized notification may be executed only by the image of the non-production display device 1600 (by notification using only the notification member that is not used among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when the warning notification is extended and executed after completion of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to make the hall manager aware of the fraud notification suspected of fraud without stopping the extended warning notification. it can. Similarly, the door opening notification and the abnormal winning notification are also based only on the image of the effect display device 1600 that is not output as a warning notification during extension (only the notification members that are not used among the plurality of notification members). Depending on the notification used, the door opening notification or abnormal winning notification may be executed.

  In this example, the warning notification is extended and executed even after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished. However, the warning notification is extended and executed only after the confirmation display state is finished. It is good also as composition to do. For example, when the setting value is changed, the main control built-in RAM is initialized after the change permission state is completed (in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area). However, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t4. In a period until the timing t4 ′ arrives, a configuration in which a RAM clear notification that notifies that the RAM has been cleared is executed is not an extension of the warning notification by an output from an image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. It is good. Thereby, after the end of the change permission state, the hall manager can grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

[14-3. About the case where the initial operation of the production member is performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished]
In the above-described embodiment, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 or the plurality of production operation units 160) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is displayed. Although the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210) is performed, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. A case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a time chart illustrating a case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends.

  As shown in FIG. 117, when the change permission state ends at timing t4, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the set value confirmation is confirmed in the first command buffer. A display completion command is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 by receiving a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. The initial operation of the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is started. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, without performing the initial operation of the production member, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4 are finished, the production member The initial operation is performed.

  The effect members described above include an effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 as members that can move between the initial position and the operation position. In such an initial operation of the effect member, a return process for performing an accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position and a confirmation of whether the effect member operates normally from the initial position toward the operation position are performed. The confirmation process is executed in order. For example, when the effect member is operating when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the effect member stops at a position deviated from the initial position, and the effect member is initially set even when the power is turned on thereafter. It is in a position shifted from the position. In this regard, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if the effect member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing t4 when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the return process is performed. The production member can be returned to the initial position, and if the production member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for returning the production member to the initial position is repeated several times. The production member can be prevented from waiting at a position deviated from the initial position. Further, in the confirmation process, it is possible to confirm whether or not the effect member operates normally by operating so that the effect member moves from the initial position to the operation position and then returns from the operation position to the initial position again. If the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, or if the effect member does not operate normally at the operation position or the initial position in the confirmation process, the effect member is abnormal. Is informed outside. Then, after the initial operation of the effect member is finished, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during the pattern variation is transmitted, a predetermined pattern variation At this timing, the production member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  In addition, the effect member includes a light guide plate 3110 capable of emitting and decorating the first pattern and the second pattern by light irradiation. In such an initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, a confirmation process for confirming whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light emission is executed. In other words, in the confirmation process, the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to decorate the first pattern and the process of irradiating the light guide panel 3110 with light so as to decorate the second pattern with light are repeated several times. Thus, it can be confirmed whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light emission. Note that the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 are executed in parallel from the time t4 when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. I have to. Then, after the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 is finished, an effect using the light guide plate 3110 can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using the light guide plate 3110 is set during the symbol variation is transmitted, At a predetermined timing, the light guide plate 3110 is light-decorated with the first pattern and the second pattern.

  As described above, in this example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 are set without performing the initial operation of the effect member. Only the setting change of the value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed, and the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4. For example, when the initial operation of the effect member is performed in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, when the confirmation work is performed at the factory, the setting change of the setting value or the setting value At the same time as confirming whether the confirmation display functions normally, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the directing member operates normally by the initial operation of the directing member. . However, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4 are finished, by performing the initial operation of the effect member, the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 are set values. Only the setting change and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4 are finished, only the confirmation of whether the effect member operates normally by the initial operation of the effect member is performed. It is possible to increase the certainty of confirmation because there is no need for confirmation at the factory.

  In the above description, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial operation of the effect member. However, apart from the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command, the initial operation command for performing the initial operation of the effect member is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. At this time, an initial operation of the effect member may be performed. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing t4 when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after the initial operation command is set. And On the other hand, the initial operation command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the set initial operation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the initial operation command set in the second command buffer at the timing t4. May be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In such a case, while the initial operation command is set at the timing ty, which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. The initial operation of the effect member can be delayed, and the initial operation of the effect member can be performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends.

  Further, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also the period until the timing t4 ′ when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the timing t4. When the warning notification is extended and executed, the warning notification extension time is set so that the time becomes longer than the time when the initial operation of the effect member is performed. That is, the initial operation of the effect member performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished before the warning notification that is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished. . As described above, after completion of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the state shifts to a variable state in which the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be performed, and the player plays the game. Although it is possible to perform the warning notification while extending the warning notification, the notification by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 is executed and the external warning is enhanced. It is said. For this reason, the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed is not a period in which the player is hesitant to start the game and the player is about to start the game. In this regard, when the warning notification is extended and executed, the initial operation of the effect member is terminated, so that the warning notification executed by the extension is ended and the player tries to start the game. The initial operation of the production member has already been completed. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the warning notice that is extended after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended. , It is possible to avoid missing information obtained from the production contents. In addition, in order to promote that the player does not start the game during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, the content of the warning notification that is extended and executed is "Please wait a little longer for the game start", etc. It may be executed in such a manner as to include a special message that prompts the game waiting.

  In addition, when performing the initial operation of the production member after the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even if the production member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, If the operation position or the initial position does not operate normally, an abnormality in an accessory due to an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker so as to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the effect member. Information is being executed. At this time, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after completion of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the accessory abnormality notification is executed in preference to the extended warning notification. As described above, the accessory abnormality notification is prioritized over the extended warning notification, so that the hall manager can easily recognize whether or not the effect member operates normally.

  In the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by an output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. For example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display is performed. The image of the device 1600 may not be output. Thus, in the structure which performs warning alerting | reporting using a part of some alerting | reporting members (effect display apparatus 1600, a lamp | ramp, a speaker), alert alerting is extended and performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. In this case, the output of the warning display device 1600 is not output as the warning notification during the extension, but if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the presentation member, the warning is not output as the warning notification during the extension. The accessory abnormality notification may be executed only by the image of the display device 1600 (by notification using only a notification member that is not used among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the hall manager can be made aware of the accessory abnormality notification without stopping the extended warning notification.

  Further, in this example, as the initial operation of the effect member after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed, a return process for performing accurate alignment so that the effect member waits at the initial position, and the effect member operates from the initial position. The confirmation process for confirming whether or not it normally operates toward the position is executed in order, but the return process may be executed in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In other words, from the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing ty, only the return process is executed in the initial operation of the production member, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends, the production member Of these initial operations, the confirmation process may be executed. Here, as for the return process, if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for returning the effect member to the initial position is repeated several times. There is a case. In this regard, even if a long time is required for the return process by executing the return process in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the change It does not affect the time until the confirmation process as the initial operation of the effect member is completed after the permission state or the confirmation display state ends. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member can be completed relatively quickly, and then the effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern can be executed.

  Further, in this example, at the time of timing ty, the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing t4 is ended, regardless of whether the state is shifted to the change permission state or the confirmation display state. However, when shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. That is, when shifting to the change permission state, the initial operation of the effect member is performed after completion of the change permission state and the confirmation display state at timing t4, whereas when shifting to the confirmation display state, The initial operation of the effect member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state at ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, the setting value setting is not changed as in the change permission state, but only the setting value setting confirmation is performed. Therefore, the confirmation display state can be completed in a relatively short time. Is possible. In this regard, when shifting to the confirmation display state, in the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member is performed in advance, and the initial operation of the effect member is completed before the confirmation display state ends. Can be made. For this reason, after the confirmation display state ends, it is possible to perform an effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern, and the initial operation of the effect member is completed while the confirmation display state is completed in a relatively short time. It is possible to prevent a situation where it is difficult for the player to start playing.

[14-4. About a variation of fraud monitoring]
In the above-described embodiment, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent acts caused by magnets, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board) 1 is provided in front of the game area 5a), but a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, and are located on the front side of the game board 5. In the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located in front of the game area 5a or on the rear side of the game board 5, each magnetic sensor may be able to detect the generation of magnetism. In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, an illegal act using only a part of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, a magnetic sensor provided around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a). Monitoring may be executed. A modified example of monitoring of fraud during such setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a time chart illustrating a modified example of the monitoring state of fraud during setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display.

  In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. In a normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in the normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a uses a magnetic field that is not supposed to be generated in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (due to illegal access). (Magnetism) has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), and unauthorized activities such as setting change or confirmation display by anyone other than the person who changes the setting value or confirmation display are monitored. Examples of fraudulent acts on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet include, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument in an island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) A magnet that indirectly manipulates a metal fraudulent instrument is charged, and a magnet and a metal fraudulent instrument are passed through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility, or through an opening that destroys a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to act to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by operating. Note that in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a, the fraudulent act using the magnet for the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is judged that has been done.

  Similarly, at the normal time, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, during normal times, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism caused by unauthorized access) that should not be generated has occurred in the area in front of the game area 5a (whether the magnet has approached). Then, the illegal action such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and entering the various winning holes and gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5 is monitored. Note that, in the cheating detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, it is determined that cheating using a magnet is being performed on the area in front of the game area 5a. doing.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area unit magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet. The sensors 2470a and 2470b may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b are configured by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a directivity that is highly sensitive in the vertical direction with respect to the side surface on one side. It is possible to perform magnetic detection in the magnetic detection region and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection region having a directivity that is highly sensitive in the vertical direction with respect to the opposite side surface that is the opposite side. It has become. “High sensitivity in the vertical direction” means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor 2470b is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area that are emitted from the side surface of the sensor body expand in the left-right direction or the vertical direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1. , A wide range on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of winning ports such as a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, a normal winning port 2003, a big winning port 2005, etc., and other main parts of the ball channel) ) Can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is configured so that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region that are emitted from the side surface of the sensor body are spread in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and One of the magnetic detection areas is arranged so as to include the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

  As shown in FIG. 118, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraud on a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent acts on a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. This is because, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the regular operator who performs the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, there is no room for illegal activities using magnets other than such regular workers, whereas the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is in a position that cannot be seen by regular workers, This is because there is a possibility that a person other than such a regular worker may perform an illegal act using a magnet. In addition, when a regular worker who changes the setting value or confirms and displays the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b may detect the occurrence of magnetism. The setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is more likely to detect the occurrence of magnetism, but the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the occurrence of magnetism as an illegal act using a magnet. It is possible to prevent the change of the normal setting and the obstruction of the confirmation display work.

  In addition, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, in a change permission state or a confirmation display state, when a regular operator who performs setting change of a setting value or confirmation display of a setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is set to a pachinko machine. This is because vibration may be transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 although it is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, even if a regular operator who performs setting change or setting value confirmation display applies vibration, the vibration sensor 3005 is prevented from detecting the occurrence of vibration as a fraudulent act caused by vibration. It is possible to suppress the change of the setting and the obstruction of the confirmation display work. In this example, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is executed only during a big hit game during normal times, but during a big hit game, similar to the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects a fraud with a magnet. Not only in a variable state, but also the fraudulent behavior may be monitored using the vibration sensor 3005. Even in the case of executing the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 during the changeable state or the big hit game, the change permission state or the confirmation display state before the transition to the changeable state is performed. In addition, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the game area unit magnetic sensor 2470b is monitored for illegal acts related to magnetism, whereas the vibration sensor 3005 is used. Monitoring of fraudulent behavior related to vibration using

  In this example, there are two magnetic sensors, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and the game area magnetic sensor 2470b. However, only the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is provided, and the front side of the game board 5 is provided. It may be possible to detect only the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located in the area. In such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the two magnetic sensors described above, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the game area unit magnetic sensor 2470b is used to detect the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Monitors fraud in certain areas. In addition, a plurality of magnetic sensors instead of one magnetic sensor is provided as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, and the entire area in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 is provided by the plurality of magnetic sensors. You may make it monitor. For example, in a plurality of locations on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 such as a first start port 2002, a second start port 2004, a normal winning port 2003, a big winning port 2005, and other main portions of the ball flow path. On the other hand, the occurrence of magnetism can be detected so that each magnetic sensor of the plurality of magnetic sensors corresponds, and illegal activities are monitored. In such a configuration, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the entire area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is used by using all of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b. Monitors fraud. However, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, only a part of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game region magnetic sensor 2470b is used, and an important region (for example, the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, In addition, it is possible to monitor only the illegal acts on the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, the prize winning port 2005, etc.).

  In addition, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. Judging that cheating is taking place. In addition, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is magnetic at that time. When a magnetic generation command that specifies the detection of the occurrence of a magnetic field is set in the second command buffer and the magnetic generation command is set in the second command buffer, the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF has arrived. Until this time, the magnetic generation command set in the second command buffer is held, and at the timing t4, the magnetic generation command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, the peripheral control MPU receives a magnetism generation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the peripheral control MPU can receive images, lamps, and speakers from the effect display device 1600 over a predetermined period from the timing t4. With this output, a notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism for notifying that a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 has detected the occurrence of magnetism is executed. As notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism, sound that repeats “magnetic detection abnormality”, a message display of “magnetic detection abnormality!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the occurrence of magnetism is detected in the predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished. When the hall manager detects that the main body frame 4 is open or the occurrence of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 by performing notification at the time of magnetic detection toward the outside. I can grasp it. It should be noted that after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, it is possible to simultaneously execute the above-mentioned notification when the door is opened or abnormal entry, but the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism. In such a case, it is possible to preferentially execute the notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism because it is suspected of serious fraud.

  As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring such as a command at the time of occurrence of magnetism are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state and the confirmation display state in the same manner as the door opening command and abnormal winning command, and the command The set command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately, but the command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at the timing t4, The command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, even when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the occurrence of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet when changing the setting value or performing a confirmation display of the setting value, notification when the magnetism occurs is executed. This can prevent the inhibition of regular work.

  In the above, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is not executed at that time without performing the notification at the time of the occurrence of magnetism. The notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism is executed after the end, but if it is a notification that does not hinder regular work, it may be executed in advance during the period of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. . For example, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU, etc. ) On the display side, the notification by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker is delayed, while the error is not output from the speaker but only the error display is performed on the 7-segment provided on the payout control board 633. For example, simple notification on the control board 1310 (main control MPU) side can be executed in advance without delay.

  Further, in this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the gaming area unit magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraud for a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, but only in the confirmation display state, The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b may be used to monitor fraud in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform confirmation display of the set value by short-term work, so that the possibility that the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism due to a regular worker is low, While the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to strengthen the monitoring of fraud against a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the change-permitted state, setting values are changed by long-term work. The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is highly likely to detect the occurrence of magnetism due to a regular worker, and the pachinko machine 1 using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is emphasized with emphasis on the workability of the regular worker. It is also possible not to execute monitoring of fraudulent acts on a predetermined area on the front side of the screen.

[15. Suggestion of setting value]
In this embodiment, based on a variation pattern determined using a predetermined variation pattern table, the effect display device 1600 executes a variation effect such as a variation display of decorative symbols. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that can suggest a value. And as for the suggestion effect, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the special symbol change display (decorative display change display) is performed 100 times in subsequent games. It is possible to suggest the current setting value. Specifically, if the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it will be specified every time a special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is performed 100 times in subsequent games. The variation pattern table in which the execution of the suggestive effect is set is determined from the specific variation pattern table. The transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 123. FIG. 119 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the first variation pattern setting process. 120 is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, FIG. 121 is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 122 is a pachinko machine. The variation pattern table C is used when the number of variations of the special symbol after the machine 1 is turned on is 500. FIG. 123 is a specific example of the roulette effect as the suggestion effect A2.

  As shown in FIG. 119, in this example, in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (and the second fluctuation pattern setting process), the processes in steps S2144 and S2145 are different from the first fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. It is Specifically, when selecting the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach detachment) in step S2144, in addition to the current gaming state, a special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. The table corresponding to the number of fluctuations is selected. Similarly, when selecting the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation in step S2145, in addition to the current gaming state, the number of special symbols after the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z is determined. A table is selected. “Powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z” means that the RWM clear button 633z is operated but the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and the main control is performed without changing the setting. When only initialization of the built-in RAM is performed (when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed, the setting value before power-off is maintained), the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are The case where the operation is performed and the setting value is changed is included.

  In addition to the above, when selecting a variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The number of times the special symbol fluctuates after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is 500 times, depending on whether the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting. The variation pattern table selected at a certain time is made different. Further, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depends on whether the setting value is 1 to 6. The variation pattern table selected when is 500 times is different.

  After “turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z”, the fluctuation of the special symbol after the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on using the fluctuation counter stored in the main control built-in RAM. I know the number of times. That is, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z is turned on, every time the special symbol fluctuation display is performed, the fluctuation counter is incremented by 1 (counting up), and the pachinko accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. When the machine 1 is turned on, the fluctuation counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the variation counter is not cleared. In addition, after “turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z”, whether the setting value has been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Information on whether only initialization of the RAM has been performed is also stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 120, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine is used as the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation) and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern table A when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after power-on of the machine 1 is 1 to 99 times, the fluctuation pattern table B when it is 100 times, and the fluctuation pattern table A when it is 101 to 199 times, Fluctuation pattern table B at 200 times, fluctuation pattern table A at 201-299 times, fluctuation pattern table B at 300 times, fluctuation pattern table A at 300-399 times, 400 times Fluctuation pattern table B when, and fluctuation pattern table A when 401 to 499 times 500 times the fluctuation pattern table C in accordance with the set value when it has been decided to select in order. The variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value includes a variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, a variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and a variation pattern when the set value is 3. When the set value is 4, the change pattern table C4 is selected. When the set value is 5, the change pattern table C5 is selected. When the set value is 6, the change pattern table C6 is selected.

  In each of the above-described variation pattern tables, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set. Each variation pattern has a variation time of a special symbol and an effect display device 1600 that is executed within the variation time of the special symbol. Fluctuation effects such as decorative display variation display are set. In such a variation effect, the effect of determining whether or not the lottery result is a hit between the start and stop of the decorative symbol variation display is executed. Further, as the variation pattern table, there are variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (at the time of detachment) and variation pattern tables A to C at the time of detachment, and a variation pattern at the time of reach (at the time of reach detachment). In the tables A to C, a variation pattern for forming reach in the decorative symbol variation display and executing the reach effect is set, whereas in the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of detachment, the variation of the decorative symbol is set. A variation pattern that does not form reach in the display is set. In other words, the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (at the time of reach detachment) are different from the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of detachment whether or not a reach is formed in the variation display of the decorative symbols (reach effect is executed). Different variation patterns are set in terms of whether or not. However, with respect to the fluctuation pattern table C at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation), a fluctuation pattern table C common to the fluctuation pattern table C at the time of loss may be used. As will be described in detail later, when the variation pattern table C is selected, an effect of whether the lottery result will be a win (reach effect, etc.) at any time of reach (did not reach) or not. Since the suggestion effect A2 (roulette effect) is executed based on the change pattern without being executed, the common change pattern table C is determined so as to determine the change pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A2 is set. Can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (A), in the variation pattern table A, variation patterns in which the execution of the suggestive effect is not set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. That is, the variation pattern table A is a “variation pattern table that does not depend on the setting value” that can be used in common for any setting value. In the game period using the variation pattern table A, the suggestion effects A1, A2 is not executed. In addition, the game period using the variation pattern table A is set longer than the game period using the other variation pattern table, thereby limiting the frequent occurrence of the suggestion effects A1, A2, etc. in the game progress process, and the suggestion effect. Increases the rarity of A1 and A2. In addition, the fluctuation pattern table A is provided as a table that can be used in common for any set value, thereby suppressing the compression of the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to the increase of the fluctuation pattern table. it can.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), in the variation pattern table B, variation patterns for which execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Also, in the variation pattern table B, a variation pattern in which a variation time of a special symbol is added for 3 seconds is set as compared with the plurality of types of variation patterns set in the variation pattern table A, and the variation pattern table B is set in the added 3 seconds. The suggestion effect A1 is executed. And in suggestion effect A1, it is made to suggest whether the present setting value is a high setting or a low setting by the light emission frequency (1-3 times) of the light-guide plate 3110. FIG. However, in the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 that is the effect content of the suggestion effect A1 is not set. Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, the light emission number of the light guide plate 3110 is any one of 1 to 3 based on the current set value. However, when the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is determined, the light emission number of the light guide plate 3110 is increased as the current setting value is higher. Note that at the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted as a change pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510, the current setting value is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to grasp which value is the set value 1-6. Thereby, in suggestion effect A1, when there are many light emission times of the light-guide plate 3110, it can anticipate that the present setting value is a high setting.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect of determining whether or not the lottery result is successful is performed. Although the display is temporarily stopped and thereafter the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, the suggestion effect A1 is executed between the temporary stoppage of the decorative symbol variation display and the stoppage. As described above, the suggestion effect A1 is executed after performing the effect of determining whether or not the lottery result is a win, so that the visual recognition of the effect of determining whether or not the lottery result is a hit may be hindered. Absent.

  Note that, as with the variation pattern table A, the variation pattern table B is also a “variation pattern table that does not depend on the setting value” that can be used in common for any setting value. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the compression of the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to an increase in the variation pattern table.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 121C, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns is set in the variation pattern table C. In addition, the variation pattern for which execution of the suggestion effect A2 is set is a variation pattern that is not set in the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern table B, and instead of the effect whether or not the lottery result is a win. The suggestion effect A2 is set to be executed. In the suggestion effect A2, the roulette effect is executed, and the current setting is determined depending on whether the roulette effect is stopped at “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “setting value 6”, or “?”. I try to suggest a value.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the variation pattern table C includes a variation pattern 1 that stops at “even” as a result of the roulette effect, and a variation pattern that stops at “odd” as a plurality of types of variation patterns. 2. Fluctuation pattern 3 that stops at “high setting”, fluctuation pattern 4 that stops at “set value 6”, and fluctuation pattern 5 that stops at “?” Are prepared. Specifically, since the current setting value is 1 in the fluctuation pattern table C1, the fluctuation pattern 2 is set so as to stop at “odd number” as a result of the roulette effect. In addition, since the current setting value is 2 in the variation pattern table C2, the variation pattern 1 is set so as to stop at “even” as a result of the roulette effect. In the variation pattern table C3, since the current set value is 3, the variation pattern 2 is set to stop at “odd number” as a result of the roulette effect. In the variation pattern table C4, since the current set value is 4, the variation pattern 1 is set to stop at “even” as a result of the roulette effect, and the variation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3 is set. In the fluctuation pattern table C5, since the current set value is 5, the fluctuation pattern 2 is set to stop at “odd number” as a result of the roulette effect, and the fluctuation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3 is set. In the fluctuation pattern table C6, since the current set value is 6, the fluctuation pattern 1 is set to stop at “even” as a result of the roulette effect, and the fluctuation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3. A variation pattern 4 is set so as to stop at “set value 6”. As described above, the suggestion effect A2 includes a mode that specifically indicates a set value such as “high setting” or “setting value 6” than the suggestion effect A1, so that attention should be paid to the result of the roulette effect. Thus, in the suggestion effect A2, when the roulette effect is stopped at “high setting” or “setting value 6”, the lottery result has a high probability of winning, so that the game can be performed with expectation.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, the decorative symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbol variation display is performed. However, during the period from the start of the decorative display of the decorative symbol until the temporary stop, the decorative display of the decorative symbol is displayed without performing an effect as to whether or not the lottery result is a win. The roulette effect is executed as the suggestion effect A2 in a state where the display device 1600 is displayed in a small corner. Thus, since the suggestion effect A2 is executed in a situation where the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol variation display or the lottery result is a win is determined. The visual effect on the suggestion effect A2 is not hindered by the effect, and the degree of attention to the suggestion effect A2 can be increased.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 123, in the roulette effect, a roulette display divided into five of “even number”, “odd number”, “high setting”, “setting value 6”, and “?” Appears on the effect display device 1600. With the signal “Start roulette production!”, The lighting location moves clockwise. Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the movement of the lighted portion of the roulette display slowly decelerates, and the results of the roulette effect (“even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “set value 6”, The lighting part stops at any of “?”. At this time, when stopping at “even” as a result of the roulette effect based on the fluctuation pattern, it is recognized that the current setting value is 2, 4, or 6 and stopped at “odd” Allows the user to recognize that the current setting value is 1, 3, or 5, and when it stops at “high setting”, it recognizes that the current setting value is any of 4 to 5. If it stops at “set value 6”, it recognizes that the current set value is 6, and if it stops at “?”, Which of the current set values is 1 to 6? Can be recognized. In addition, about the fluctuation patterns 1-5, the fluctuation time of a special symbol is varied, and in the roulette effect executed within the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the time until the result stops is different.

  Unlike the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table B, the variation pattern table C differs depending on the set value, and is a “variation pattern table depending on the set value”. Thereby, the execution time of suggestion effect A2 (roulette effect) can be varied according to the set value, and the degree of freedom of effect design that suggests the set value can be increased.

  As described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table B is selected every time the special symbol variation display in the subsequent game is performed 100 times. The suggestion effect A1 is executed based on the change pattern, and when the special symbol change display is performed 500 times, the suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the change pattern selected from the change pattern tables C1 to C6. . Further, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the setting value are used when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 500 times. The suggestive effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 according to the set value. As described above, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are displayed at the current time each time the special symbol change display in the game is performed 100 times. Since the set value is suggested, the game can be performed with expectation until the suggested effect A1 and the suggested effect A2 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 120, when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is out of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach off) As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table A when the number of variations of the special symbol after the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is 1 to 99 times, the variation pattern table B when the number of variations is 100 times, and 101 to 199 times. Fluctuation pattern table A when 200 times, Fluctuation pattern table B when 200 times, Fluctuation pattern table A when 201-299 times, Fluctuation pattern table B when 300 times, 301-399 times Fluctuation pattern table A, sometimes 400 times Fluctuation pattern table B, 401-499 times It is set to be selected in the order of the variation pattern table C0, when a change pattern table A, 500 times in a certain time.

  As described above, in the variation pattern table B, variation patterns in which the execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. After the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times, the light from the LED 3121 is first applied to the light guide plate 3110. In contrast to the fact that the design emits light, only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The second pattern is caused to emit light once by the light to the light guide plate 3110. For this reason, when the suggestion effect A1 is executed, has the setting value been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depending on whether the first design or the second design emits light on the light guide plate 3110? It is possible to grasp whether only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting. That is, in the suggestion effect A1, when the second pattern emits light on the light guide plate 3110, information on the current set value cannot be grasped like the number of times the first pattern emits light (1 to 3 times). It can be ascertained that the set value has not been changed since the power was shut off and the previous set value is maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the variation pattern table C, variation patterns in which the execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Among these, when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table C0 is selected. Regardless of whether the current setting value is 1 to 6, the variation pattern 5 is set so as to stop at “?” As a result of the roulette effect. In this regard, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A2 does not stop with “?” As a result of the roulette effect. By stopping at “?”, It is possible to recognize that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. That is, in the suggestion effect A2, when the roulette effect stops as “?”, Information on the current setting value such as “even number”, “odd number”, “high setting”, “setting value 6” is displayed. Although it cannot be grasped, it can be grasped that the setting value has not been changed from before the power-off and the previous setting value is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 120, when the set value confirmation display is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is turned on normally (power is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a). Shows the variation pattern table according to the number of variations of the special symbol since the last time the pachinko machine 1 was turned on with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. You are going to choose. That is, when the power is shut off, the fluctuation counter stored in the main control built-in RAM is held (backed up), and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. Is continuously used without being cleared, and each time a special symbol variation display is performed, 1 is added (counted up) to the variation counter. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the fluctuation number counter is not cleared, so the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is When it is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are not necessarily executed. For this reason, whether the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed in addition to the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times I can draw attention with expectations.

  In addition, the variation counter is incremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is performed, but when the number of variations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on becomes 500 times, The fluctuation counter is cleared, and then 1 is added (counted up) every time the special symbol fluctuation display is performed again. That is, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table A (1st to 99th) → B (100th) → A (101 to 199th) → B (200 To repeat A) → A (201-299th) → B (300th) → A (301-399th) → B (400th) → A (401-499th) → C1-C6 (500th) On the other hand, when the main control RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table A (1st to 99th time) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th time) → B ( 200th) → A (201-299th) → B (300th) → A (301-399th) → B (400th) → A (401-499th) → C0 (500th) Yes.

  In addition, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is before 500, if the lottery result is a win, the variation number counter is cleared and then the special symbol is again displayed. Each time the change display is performed, 1 is added (counted up). In other words, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed when the lottery results are continuously 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. As a result, even if the lottery result is not successful over 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 or It can be expected to perform the suggestion effect A2.

  Further, as described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, the current number of times of light emission (1 to 3 times) of the first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 is set. In the case where only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the light guide plate 3110 is informed in the suggestion effect A1. Information on the current set value of the light emitting second pattern is not notified. When the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the result of the roulette effect is “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “setting value 6” in the suggestion effect A2. In the case where only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 In the suggestion effect A2, the result of the roulette effect is stopped at any of “?”, So that information on the current set value is not notified. For this reason, if the hole manager thinks that he / she does not want to notify the player of information on the current set value when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine is again set. By turning on the power after the power of the machine 1 is turned off and only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, information on the current set value is given to the player. To avoid notification.

  Further, in the normal state (non-time-short state), the variation pattern tables A to C are used in the above-described order every time the special symbol variation display is performed. In this case, the variation pattern table at the time-short state is used as a table different from the variation pattern tables A to C. In this variation pattern table in the short state, variation patterns in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. And even if it becomes a short time state after the lottery result is won, by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern table when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the start of the short time state becomes a predetermined number of times, From the specific variation pattern table, the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect is set is determined, and the suggestion effect is executed based on the variation pattern. At this time, for example, in the short-time state, by performing the suggestion effect more frequently than in the normal state, not only whether or not the lottery result is a win but also whether or not the suggestion effect is executed is expected to pay attention. be able to. It should be noted that at the end of the time-saving state, the variation counter is cleared, and thereafter, every time a special symbol variation display is performed, 1 is added (counted up).

  In addition, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The variation pattern table B and the variation pattern table C are used when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. In this case, a specific variation pattern table may be used. For example, a specific variation pattern table may be used when the variation display of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is the first time. As described above, when the variation display of the special symbol after the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is the first time, by selecting the specific variation pattern table, execution of the suggestion effect is set from the specific variation pattern table. The variation pattern is determined, and the suggestion effect can be executed based on the variation pattern. In this respect, most of the setting value setting change and initialization of the main control built-in RAM without setting change are performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the hall is opened. By performing the suggestion effect at the first time of the special symbol variation display after the machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to generate a willingness to actively start the game immediately after opening the hall.

  In addition, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the main control RAM is initialized without changing the setting, the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on When the number of changes is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggested effect A1 and the suggested effect A2 are executed using the change pattern table B and the change pattern table C. For example, using the effect display device 1600, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is added based on the fluctuation number counter (1 fluctuation → 2 fluctuations → 3 fluctuations →... The number of times of remaining display of the special symbol until the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed is displayed as a change counter. Based on the subtraction may be or notification in the form of going to (and will reduce the fluctuation count display by the remaining 500 change → 499 change → 497 change → ··· and "-1"). In addition, in such notification, the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol is 10 times until the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 approaches, for example, until the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed. You may make it perform from the step which carried out. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is approaching, and information about the current set value is obtained until the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed. As expected, the game can be continued with expectations.

  In addition, at the stage where the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 approaches, the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is approaching as an effect different from the notification of the number of changes in the special symbol. A special precursor effect that informs the person may be executed. For example, at the stage where the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol until the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed is 10 times, using the effect display device 1600, “setting suggestion in 10 more times!” By displaying the display and prompting the player to continue the game, the game can be continued with the expectation that information on the current set value can be obtained. In addition, the notification of the number of changes in the special symbol is performed only when the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or only when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value setting. In this case, the notification content may be reset to the initial state along with the initialization of the variation counter. As a result, there is no deviation between the number of times of change notified to the player and the time when the suggested effect A1 or the suggested effect A2 is executed using the change pattern table B or the change pattern table C, and the suggested effect A1 or suggestion The reliability with respect to execution of production A2 can be improved.

[15-1. About a variation of the change of the fluctuation pattern table when the main control RAM is initialized]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation) As each of the variation pattern tables, the variation pattern table selected from the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern table C0 is selected in the order of the variation pattern table different from the case where the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 when selecting is selected, information regarding the current set value is not notified. As another embodiment, when the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine is based on the set value that has already been set. The suggested effect A1 when the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 so as to be selected in the same order as the variation pattern table when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on. In the suggestion effect A2, information on the current set value may be notified. Hereinafter, transition of a special variation pattern table when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a table showing a modified example of the transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 124, when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value that has already been set is referred to. Based on the values, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation) and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation are set. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 is used as the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of detachment) and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of detachment, as in the case where the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after power-on is 1 to 99, the fluctuation pattern table A is 100 times, the fluctuation pattern table B is 100 times, and the fluctuation pattern table A is 200 times when 101 to 199 times. Fluctuation pattern table B when it is 201, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 201-299 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 300 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 301-399 times, 400 times Fluctuation pattern table B, sometimes 401-499 times, variation pattern table A, 50 Is set to be selected in the variation pattern table C, the order of corresponding to the set value when a round. The variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value includes a variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, a variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and a variation pattern when the set value is 3. When the set value is 4, the change pattern table C4 is selected. When the set value is 5, the change pattern table C5 is selected. When the set value is 6, the change pattern table C6 is selected.

  In addition, after the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Similarly, in the suggestion effect A1 when the variation pattern table B is selected, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times, the light from the LED 3121 causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit light. That is, in the suggestion effect A1, whether the current set value is a high setting or a low setting is suggested by the number of times of light emission (1 to 3 times) of the light guide plate 3110. In addition, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, it is determined whether the light emission number of the light guide plate 3110 is 1 to 3 based on the current set value. However, when the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is determined, the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is increased as the current setting value is higher. Thereby, even after the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The information regarding the current setting value can be grasped in the same manner as after the setting value has been changed. When the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is large, it can be expected that the current setting value is a high setting. .

  In addition, after the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Similarly, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is 500, the fluctuation pattern table C corresponding to the set value is selected. That is, as the variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value, the variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and the variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 3. When the set value is 4, the change pattern table C4 is selected. When the set value is 5, the change pattern table C5 is selected. When the set value is 6, the change pattern table C6 is selected. In the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, the roulette effect is executed as the suggestion effect A2, and the roulette effect is stopped at any of “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, and “setting value 6” as a result. The suggested variation patterns 1 to 4 are set, and in the suggestion effect A2, the current set value is suggested based on the result of the roulette effect based on the change pattern. Thus, even after the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, even when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the suggestion effect A 2. The information regarding the current set value can be grasped in the same way as after the setting value has been changed. When the roulette effect is stopped at “high setting” or “setting value 6”, the lottery result is a win. Since the probability is high, the game can be performed with expectation.

  As described above, when only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. As in the case where the special symbol in the subsequent game is displayed 100 times, the suggestion effect A1 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, and the variation of the special symbol is performed. When the display is performed 500 times, since the suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, there is no effect difference between the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. For this reason, depending on the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, whether the setting value setting was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, or only initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value setting. I can't figure out if I did.

  In the present modification, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, notification of the completion of setting is executed by an output from the effect display device 1600, an image from the lamp, and the speaker, and the setting value is set. Notify that changes have been made. Similarly, when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial display is based on the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. When the initialization is completed, a notification is executed to notify that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized. As a result, whether the setting value setting was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was turned on by executing the setting completion notification or the initialization completion notification, or the initial setting of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value setting. It is possible to grasp whether or not only In addition, as notification when the setting is completed or notification when the initialization is completed, for example, the initial display mode of the decorative symbols (such as the initial symbol combination before the start of the first variation) on the effect display device 1600 is changed. For example, the display mode may be different from the case where only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed. These notifications are made when a special symbol change display is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off again and turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z). Is turned on), and when the notification is finished, the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the main control built-in RAM is not changed without changing the setting value setting. It becomes impossible to know whether only initialization has been performed. As a result, the player is notified whether the set value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or only the main control built-in RAM has been initialized without changing the set value. If you do not want to do so, for example, the hall manager again shuts down the pachinko machine 1 and turns on the power (turns on the pachinko machine 1 without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z). In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily create a state in which notification is not executed when initialization is completed.

  Moreover, in this modification, when the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value before the power is shut off is maintained. Since the value before the power interruption is reset for the variation counter, when the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation counter is selected thereafter, the variation counter starts from the beginning (variation pattern table corresponding to the first variation). It will be. In other words, when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the hall administrator maintains the same setting value as before the power cut-off. Thus, only the variation counter can be reset, and when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times since the power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the suggestion effect A1 Information about the current set value can be notified by the suggestion effect A2. On the other hand, in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value. While the value is maintained, the fluctuation counter is reset, but when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times since the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on Information regarding the current set value is not notified by the effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2. For this reason, it is suggested that the number of changes in the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times since the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining the same set value as before the power is turned off. In order to notify the information about the current set value by the effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, the hall manager operates to change the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is necessary to reset the set value. In this regard, in this modification, it is not necessary to change the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value setting. , It is possible to save the trouble of “resetting the same set value as before power-off”.

  Also in this modified example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is approaching, the suggestion effect A1 or You may make it perform the special precursor effect which notifies a player that execution of suggestion effect A2 is approaching immediately. For example, at the stage where the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol until the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed is 10 times, using the effect display device 1600, “setting suggestion in 10 more times!” By displaying the display and prompting the player to continue the game, the game can be continued with the expectation that information on the current set value can be obtained. In addition, the notification of the number of changes in the special symbol is performed only when the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or only when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value setting. In this case, the notification content may be reset to the initial state. As a result, there is no deviation between the number of times of change notified to the player and the time when the suggested effect A1 or the suggested effect A2 is executed using the change pattern table B or the change pattern table C, and the suggested effect A1 or suggestion The reliability with respect to execution of production A2 can be improved.

[15-2. Suggestion effect B executed at a different timing from the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2]
In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed in accordance with the passage of the variation time of the decoration symbol within the variation effect such as the decorative symbol variation display in the effect display device 1600. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect B that can suggest the current set value at a different timing from the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, regardless of the passage of the variation time of the decorative symbol. Execution of such suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, regarding the suggestion effect B, when the handle 111 that is not operated is operated in a situation where there is no operation instruction of the handle 111, a lottery for determining whether or not the suggestion effect B is executed is performed with a predetermined probability. ing. Specifically, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, the fact that the detection signal is input is transmitted via the main control board 1310. It is inputted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 performs lottery as to whether or not the suggestion effect B is executed with a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, lottery winning at 1/50). This lottery is set to win at a higher probability than at least the big win lottery, and by making it appear frequently, it is easier for a plurality of players to experience the suggestion effect B, or it is suggested to one player. The experience B is experienced a plurality of times to improve the game continuation motivation. And in the lottery of whether to perform the suggestion effect B, when the execution of the suggestion effect B is determined (when winning), one of the plurality of types of suggestion patterns is selected according to the current set value. The suggestion pattern is determined, and the suggestion effect B is executed based on the determined suggestion pattern. Further, in the suggestion effect B, the current set value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 regardless of any suggestion pattern. It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (when the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value is completed), the current setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, information on the current setting value is held, and it is possible to grasp which of the setting values 1 to 6 is the current setting value. However, as described above in detail, the current set value is also transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command. It is possible to grasp which of the set values 1 to 6 is the current set value also by the command. Thereby, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, when execution of the suggestion effect B is determined (when winning), one of the plurality of types of suggestion patterns is determined according to the current set value. be able to.

  More specifically, in the suggestion effect B, the voice from the speaker may be “setting value 1”, “setting value 2”, “setting value 3”, “setting value 4”, “setting value 5”, The current set value is suggested depending on whether “set value 6 may be output”. Further, when outputting “set value 1 may” as the sound from the speaker, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 is made to emit light once, and when outputting “set value 2 may”, it is provided on the main body frame 4. When the lamp is caused to emit light twice at a predetermined interval and “set value 3 may” is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is emitted three times at a predetermined interval and when “set value 4 may be” is output. When the lamp provided in the frame 4 emits light four times at a predetermined interval and “set value 5 may” is output, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 emits light five times at a predetermined interval. Is output, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 is caused to emit light the number of times according to the suggestion of the set value so that the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 emits light six times at predetermined intervals. Further, for example, “setting value 6 may be” can be output when the current setting value is not 6, that is, any of 1 to 5; ”Is output, there is a case where the current setting value is a value other than 6. In addition, in the suggestion effect B, other than these, it is suggested that the current setting value is “even” of 2, 4, 6, or “odd” of 1, 3, 5 Or, it may be suggested that the “high setting” is 4 to 6.

  Further, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B regardless of whether or not it is within a fluctuating effect such as a decorative display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. I have to. As shown in FIG. 121 (A), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A is executed, the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is not set. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect B within the variation time of the special symbol based (the variation time of the decorative symbol). However, in the present embodiment, if the suggestion effect B for which the execution condition has been satisfied is still being executed, the execution condition for the new suggestion effect B is not satisfied, and the duplicate execution of the suggestion effect B is prohibited ( Limit). Specifically, during execution of the suggestion effect B, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, and the main control board indicates that the detection signal is input. Even if it is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the suggestion effect B is being executed and does not perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect B. Is prohibited (restricted).

In addition, the suggestion effect B of the present embodiment is executed by combining the sound from the speaker and the light emission of the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 as described above, and after the sound from the speaker is finished. In the case where the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 continues to emit light at a predetermined interval (for example, even when the sound of “setting value 6 may be output” has been output, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 is caused to emit light at a predetermined interval. When the process remains, or when the sound from the speaker continues even after the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 has ended (for example, the sound of “may be set value 1” has not been output yet) (When the process of causing the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 to emit light has been completed). For this reason, as the period for which it is determined that the suggestive effect B is being executed, the sound output period from the speaker is associated with the long period of the light emission period of the lamp provided in the main body frame 4. . As a result, the lottery prohibition period during the suggestion effect B is surely prohibited (restricted) from overlapping execution of the suggestion effect B.

Moreover, even if it is under the above-mentioned prohibition, if the execution interval between the suggestion effect B executed first and the suggestion effect B executed later is short, the front and rear suggestion effects B will be continuous. There is a concern that the player may misrecognize the suggested content due to the mixed emission of the lamps provided in No. 4. In this embodiment, in consideration of such points, a predetermined limit extension period (for example, 5 seconds) is generated after execution of the suggestion effect B, regardless of which execution pattern the suggestion effect B is executed, It is prohibited (restricted) not to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect B over a period obtained by adding a limit extension period to the execution period of the suggestion effect B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the suggested content by executing the suggestion effect B executed first and the suggestion effect B executed later.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (B), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B is executed, the suggestion is made in 3 seconds added to the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A. Since the execution of the effect A1 is set, the suggestion effect B is executed in the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 within the variation time of the special symbol (decoration time of the decorative symbol) based on such a variation pattern. On the other hand, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B except for the execution period of the suggestion effect A1.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (C), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C is executed, substantially all of the variation time of the special symbol (decoration time of the decorative symbol) is used as the suggestion effect A2. Since the execution of the roulette effect is set, it is prohibited to execute the suggestion effect B within the special symbol variation time (decorative symbol variation time) based on such a variation pattern.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), when the special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) based on the variation pattern is not performed, the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B in a period in which such special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is not performed.

  As described above, regarding the suggestion effect B, unlike the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, since the current set value is suddenly suggested when the handle 111 is operated, the player is surprised. Can do. Further, during the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, the execution of the suggestion effect B is prohibited, and the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is prioritized over the suggestion effect B. It is possible to prevent visual recognition of the suggestion effect A2 from being disturbed, and to actively focus on the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. In this regard, for the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, it is preferable to make the suggestion reliability higher than that of the suggestion effect B, such as by eliminating the illusion like the suggestion effect B.

  Also, as described above, the suggestion effect B is executed even within a variation effect such as a variation display of decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. It is possible. In this regard, regarding the suggestion effect B, the current setting value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4, so that it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the variation effect from being hindered. it can. In addition, outside the changing effects such as the changing display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600, the special symbol changing display (the decorative symbol changing display) is not performed and the time is tedious. Since there is a possibility that the suggestion effect B is suddenly executed when the button is operated and the current set value is suggested, it is possible to generate a willingness to start the game by operating the handle 111.

  In this example, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the handle 111 is operated after a predetermined condition such as closing the main body frame 4 is satisfied. , Suggesting effect B can be executed. However, if the operation of the handle 111 is continued from after the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect B can be executed even after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the operation of the handle 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is satisfied and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, in order to execute the suggestion effect B, the handle 111 is temporarily set after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is necessary to release the hand and operate the handle 111 again. It should be noted that not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but also when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, when the main control RAM is initialized, the normal power-on (RWM) The same applies to the case of turning on the power without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, in this example, although the suggestion effect B can be executed when the handle 111 is operated, the suggestion of the current set value is notified when the suggestion effect B is executed by arbitrary selection of the player. It is possible not to. That is, when the player selects not to notify the suggestion of the current set value, the current output is output from the lamp or speaker provided in the main body frame 4 at the timing of performing the suggestion effect B thereafter. The setting value is not suggested. This allows players who do not need suggestions about the current set value to choose not to notify the suggestion, so that they will not be confused by the suggestion about the current set value, You can concentrate on the production of whether or not. In addition, it may be configured not to notify only a part of the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 in the suggestion effect B by the player's arbitrary selection, for example, provided in the main body frame 4 The notification may be made depending on the output from the lamp, but the notification may not be made depending on the output from the speaker. In addition, regarding the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 that are executed in the change effect such as the decorative display change display in the effect display device 1600, when the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed, the suggestion of the current set value is suggested. So that the player cannot make any selections.

  Further, as described above in detail, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, the warning notification can be extended and executed by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. In the period of executing such warning alert, when the suggestion effect B is executed by operating the handle 111, the lamp and speaker provided in the main body frame 4 You may comprise so that it may differ from other periods (after completion | finish of the extended warning alert | report). For example, it may be configured not to notify only a part of the output from the lamp and speaker provided in the main body frame 4 in the suggestion effect B. For example, depending on the output from the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 Notification may be made but notification may not be made depending on output from the speaker. In this way, during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, priority is given to the warning notification over the suggestion effect B, thereby preventing the recognition of the warning notification from being hindered, and other than the hall administrator It is possible to maintain a situation where the monitoring system has been strengthened so that it will not be done.

  Further, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B when the handle 111 is operated. However, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the handle 111 is first moved. The suggestion effect B that is executed when the operation is performed is configured such that the effect is different from the suggestion effect B that is executed when the handle 111 is operated for the second time or later. For example, the suggestion effect B that is executed when the handle 111 is first operated after changing the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is less suggested than the second and subsequent times. It is configured to increase the reliability of the. Further, although the suggestion effect B can be executed with a predetermined probability when the handle 111 is operated, it may be as the time elapses (as the number of special symbol fluctuations increases). The probability of executing the suggestion effect B is lowered, and it is difficult to execute the suggestion effect B even if the handle 111 is operated. In this regard, the setting change of the set value is often performed by the hall manager when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on before opening the hall. Therefore, immediately after opening the hall, the handle 111 is operated to start the game. Can be motivated. It should be noted that not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but also when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, when the main control RAM is initialized, the normal power-on (RWM) The same applies to the case of turning on the power without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

  In this example, the suggestion effect B can be executed when the handle 111 is operated. However, the suggestion effect B is executed when the effect operation unit 160 is operated instead of the operation of the handle 111. It may be configured to be possible. In addition, when the effect operation unit 160 is used as an opportunity to execute the suggestion effect B, for example, the effect operation unit 160 is used as an opportunity to execute the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2, and the effect operation unit 160 is operated. Sometimes, the suggestion effect B may be executed while the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are started. Further, as an opportunity to execute the suggestion effect B, instead of operating the handle 111, after changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after confirming the setting value and displaying the main control) After initialization of the RAM, it may be after normal power-on.) First, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 (the entrances involved in the lottery for winning or not) It is configured such as when entering a game, entering a game entrance that does not participate in the lottery of whether or not it is a general winning entrance 2001, when a specific date and time is reached using a real-time clock IC, etc. May be. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to generate a willingness to obtain information related to the setting value by the suggestion effect B at the timing when the suggestion effect B may be executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 64 as the game control central processing unit capable of controlling the progress of the game is shown in FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k of FIG. 68 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as wiring for taking out an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test apparatus for testing the pachinko machine 1. It can be prepared.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by the test apparatus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x which is the front side of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y which is the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

  As described above, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test engine, and when the pachinko machine 1 is a game hall Even in the case of being produced as a mass-produced machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the surface side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 ′ of FIG. 66A as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. . These plural electronic components are a lead-type electronic component, a ZIP-type main control MPU (described as a part number “MIC1” in the drawing) included in the lead type of FIG. 66A, and a surface-mount type electronic component. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 66 (a) as electronic components is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′.

  The main control board 1310 'includes a parts list area 1310xb' shown in FIG. 66A as an information area. This component list area 1310xb 'can describe information corresponding to an identifier of a surface mount type electronic component. Examples of information described in the component list area 1310xb 'include the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the surface mount type electronic component, and the product number of the surface mount type electronic component.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the parts list area 1310xb ′ has a parts list of electronic parts configured in a form in which part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned. Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part arrangement region 1310xa ′. As white (or black). A separator “:” is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number listed in the catalog).

  Thus, even when the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310 ′ is difficult to see, information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) Is displayed in the component list area 1310xb ′ included in the main control board 1310 ′. Therefore, the identifier of the surface mount type electronic component can be reliably recognized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 64 as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. The control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 68 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. 68 as holes having a smaller shape than the surface mounting type electronic component among the plurality of electronic components. It has been.

  As described above, since the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having a shape smaller than the shape of the surface mount type electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component is obtained by some unauthorized means. Even if an attempt is made to peel off the main control board 1310 and replace it with an unauthorized electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the vent hole 1301z which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the winning control circuit includes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 as the setting device. ing. The main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, Big hit symbol determination table that defines the percentage of decision value for decision, small hit judgment table that defines the proportion of small hit judgment value that indicates winning for small hit, and the percentage of decision value for decision of small hit symbol A small hitting symbol determination table, a normal transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from the probability change to the normal time is specified), and used at various distribution rates associated with set values Select various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid) . The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting the setting key, and can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. At a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port 1311ab formed in 1311ab (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port 1311aba having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction), the setting key switch 1311a is set as an initial position. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and is turned on for the first time by turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON. It can be done.

  The main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are mounted on different boards and are electrically connected.

  As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are mounted on different boards, the force accompanying the external operation to the setting key switch 1311a is set by the setting key switch. Since the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted can be made difficult to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted, the main control MPU 1310a is mounted by the force accompanying the external operation to the setting key switch 1311a. This can contribute to preventing the main control board 1310 from being bent. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the deflection of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 on which the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 22 is mounted as the winning probability control circuit is a surface mount component that is an SMD type electronic component. The setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 on which the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 is mounted as a setting device is a lead-type electronic component. This is an insertion mounting component mounting board on which only the insertion mounting component can be mounted. In this way, the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted is a surface mountable component mountable board on which a surface mount component (SMD type) can be mounted, and the setting change on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted The substrate 1311 can be an insertion mounting component mounting substrate on which only insertion mounting components (SMD type) can be mounted. As a result, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the solder portion where the insertion mounting component (lead type) is soldered to the solder surface of the substrate can be reduced as compared with the surface mounting component (SMD type). For this reason, it is possible to strengthen the peeling of the solder part.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 in FIG. 22 as the surface mountable component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 in FIG. Each case is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 in FIG. The transparent main control board box 1320 is sealed by a caulking portion 1303 in FIG. 68 with its exterior as a sealing device. The main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as a surface mountable component mountable board, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. In addition, a connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a in FIG. 22 as a setting device on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. . Connector MSCN of main control board 1310 and connector SMCN of setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. In this way, the main control board 1310 which is a surface mountable component mounting board and the setting change board 1311 which is an insertion mounted parts mounting board can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the crimping portion 1303. Therefore, the deterrence against fraud on the main control board 1310, which is a surface mountable component mountable board, and the setting change board 1311, which is an insertion mounted parts mounting board, can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 as the connector provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 as a connector provided on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 as a mounting board is electrically connected by a connector connection having a floating mechanism capable of absorbing a fitting axis shift. Has been. Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected by a special connector having a floating mechanism. A special connector equipped with this floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug. When the socket is inserted into the plug and pushed in, the socket and the plug are fitted together. By moving a predetermined distance range in the vertical direction (for example, up and down direction) with respect to the inserting and pushing direction, it is possible to absorb an error (fitting axis shift) that occurs when pushing.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game control board includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 as the setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and can change a set value in which a probability that is advantageous to the player is set. The setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 22 is provided as a lead-type electronic component.

  The lead type setting key switch 1311a is used to insert / remove a setting key capable of changing a setting value. As the setting key is inserted into and removed from the lead type setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 may bend while the main control board 1310 is not bent.

  Thus, since the lead type setting key switch 1311a is provided on the setting change board 1311 which is separate from the main control board 1310, an operation of inserting / removing a setting key capable of changing the setting value ( Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent along with the operation, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, from the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 that are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 of FIG. 2 so that the game board 5 of FIG. A front frame is provided. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 21 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting the setting key, and is capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Set as the initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port 1311ab formed in the setting key cylinder 1311ab of 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port extends in the vertical direction) The key switch 1311a is in the OFF state, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. And can be.

  The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivotal support side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 includes a body frame upper hinge member 510 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 constituting the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Are rotatably supported on the same axis so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side of the front view. The left side of the main body frame 4 in which the hinge assembly 52 is arranged is the front side left side in the vertical direction of the main body frame 4 is the shaft support side (closed side), and the right side of the main body frame 4 is the opposite side. It becomes the open side of the main body frame 4. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivotal support side of the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 on the rear surface of the game board 5. If any unauthorized alteration is made to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened, and the illegal act is caused in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Become a prominent presence. Therefore, it can contribute to prevention of fraud.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 is a cover body that is pivotably supported on the open side opposite to the pivot side of the front frame as shown in FIG. The setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is covered with the back cover 640, and is disposed on the shaft support side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 so as to be covered with the back cover 640. If the back cover 640 is not opened after opening, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated. In this way, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered with the back cover 640 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable on the open side opposite to the pivotal support side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the shaft support side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered with the back cover 640. After the front frame is opened, the back cover 640 is removed. Unless it is opened, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 includes a body frame upper hinge member 510 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 constituting the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Are rotatably supported on the same axis so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side of the front view. The left side of the main body frame 4 in which the hinge assembly 52 is arranged is the front side left side in the vertical direction of the main body frame 4 is the shaft support side (closed side), and the right side of the main body frame 4 is the opposite side. It becomes the open side of the main body frame 4. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. A back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. Is. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. In addition, the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and the left side is a payout Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side when viewed from the front is the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side of the front view on the opposite side is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. Thus, the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the back cover open side. The setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting a metal setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. Therefore, in order to access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the main body frame 4 larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately 90 degrees).

  Accordingly, the back cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated, and the front cover can be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The frame must be opened. For this reason, if any unauthorized modification is made to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The illegal act can be made conspicuous in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 65 (a) is provided as a game control board for controlling the progress of the game. On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 of FIG. 65A as an insertion mounting component (lead type electronic component) and the surface mounting component (surface mounting type electronic component) shown in FIG. The Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 of a) can be mounted, and the SMD type electronic component (surface mount) shown in FIG. Each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and through-holes are not arranged at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the electronic component of the type).

  As described above, the capacitor (MC30) as the insertion mounting component and the Schmitt trigger inverter (MIC30) as the surface mounting component can be mixedly mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The region where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a component, is mounted can be configured as a circuit non-formation region where a circuit such as a wiring pattern or a through hole is not formed. As a result, even if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, excludes the circuit non-formation region. Therefore, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 which is a surface mount component can be visually observed. Therefore, fraudulent acts on the surface mount component can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 is used as a first operation unit that can accept a predetermined operation. Further, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are operated as the second operation unit, and then the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as setting change means capable of changing a set value for setting a probability that is advantageous for the player. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. This pachinko machine 1 is further provided with notation or the like serving as location information that can inform the location of the RWM clear button 633z as guidance means for guiding information related to the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633.

  In this way, information related to the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 is guided, so the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused by the operation procedure. By providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 separately, crime prevention can be improved. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a setting control unit related to preparation settings for starting a game, As a game control means having a progress control unit related to the progress control, a main control board 1310 in FIG. 22, a setting change board 1311 and a payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 are provided. The setting control unit includes a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 22, a setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22, an RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 in FIG. It consists of the determination in step S14 in the input process, the process in step S16A, and the like. The progress control unit includes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 22, the main control side main process in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 72, the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. . Main control board 1310, setting change board 1311 and payout control board 633 as game control means are main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310 in FIG. 22, Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, capacitor MC30 in FIGS. 22 consists of a plurality of electronic components such as the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. Electronic components related to setting control such as the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are divided into a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 and the payout control board 633 in FIG.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic components related to setting control, are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633, respectively. Can be increased. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed using a game ball as a game medium, and is illustrated as a game control unit that performs game preparation control and game control. 22 main control boards 1310 are provided. The game control includes a main control side main process in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 72, a main control side timer interruption process of FIG. The game preparation control includes step S14 in the setting change process in FIG. 75 as second game preparation control, such as the determination in step S14 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. 72 as the first game preparation control and the process in step S16A. And the process of step S218. In the first game preparation control, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 (after the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure) as the first operation unit is performed. At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. As a “predetermined set value change permission condition” in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, When the condition is that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, In addition, a setting change state that can change a setting value that sets a probability that is advantageous to the player based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 can be changed. It is. The second game preparation control is switched to any one of a plurality of set values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 as the second operation unit following the first game preparation control. It is something that can be done. The RWM clear button 633z is arranged on the payout control board 633 which is another board different from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged.

  As described above, the security function can be improved by arranging the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 on different boards. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged are illustrated as separate board cases. 68, the main control board box 1320 in which the setting key switch 1311a is placed, and the RWM clear. The security can be further improved by separating the payout control board box 632 in which the payout control board 633 in which the button 633z is disposed is housed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 68 and the payout control board box 632 in FIG. 3 are respectively caulking cases as separate board cases. In order to modify the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 accommodated in the board box 1320, and the payout control board 633 accommodated in the payout control board box 632, this caulking portion must be destroyed, and the trace of the modification Can leave.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game arranged on the back side of the game board 5 of FIG. 21, and the setting key switch 1311a is The setting change board 1311 to be arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z in FIG. 4 controls the payout placed on the main body frame 4 in FIG. 4 and is housed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case. Therefore, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is placed is provided. Arranged on the back side of the game board 5 while being accommodated in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310 Since the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is placed can be placed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case in the main body frame 4 as the frame side, the setting key switch 1311a Is separately arranged on the main body frame 4 side with the game board 5 side and the RWM clear button 633z as the frame side, the crime prevention property of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 of FIG. 4 is provided on the front side as a door that can be opened and closed, and is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 as a board on which electronic components are mounted. The main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by operating the main control board 1310 and the first key (regular metal key possessed by an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall). As a first device that can perform the operation of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 of FIG. 1 and the locking unit 360 of the main body frame 4 of FIG. And a second key (setting key) different from the first key can be used to perform a second operation (when changing a setting value, when checking a set current setting value). The signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic component And a, a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 which is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310 in FIG. 21 as a second device to be continued. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities (when setting values are changed), and is capable of confirming a set current setting value (can be set). (When checking the current setting value). The cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3, and the casing of the cylinder lock 127 is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the door frame 3, and the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side.

  Specifically, a metal columnar cylinder body that is a housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to a frame ground on the door frame side or a ground side that is N (neutral) of AC 24V. Has been. Further, the metal frame of the setting key switch 1311a is formed by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed in the plate 1311ad can be inserted are the setting change boards. It is possible to be electrically insulated from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of 1311. For this reason, as a casing of the setting key switch 1311a, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, a metal frame plate 1311ad is formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. In addition to being electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground), the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal frame plate 1311ad, a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab. Are electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311.

  Thus, since the metal columnar cylinder body that is the casing of the cylinder lock 127 provided on the front side of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to the ground side, the metal columnar cylinder body temporarily Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invades, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, is not affected by escaping the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) to the ground side, and As the casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side with the metal frame plate 1311ad. In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame Since 1311ad is not electrically connected to the ground side but is insulated, even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the intruding noise (Electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from changing, and the metal type In the setting key switch 1311a, even when noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is made of metal. Outer cylinder 1311aa, metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and metal Can be an electronic component by attenuating at the frame plate 1311ad itself to avoid giving the variation of the ground line in the main control board 1310 is a board mounted. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Further, a metal cylindrical cylinder body which is a housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is a frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or an AC 24V N (neutral) supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While electrically connected to the ground side, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the metal frame plate 1311ad is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the AC 24V N ( In addition, the metal-type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side, which is neutral), and the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad. Is the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the AC 24V N (newt) supplied to the pachinko machine 1 A le) is not grounded side and electrically connected and insulated. As a result, a metal columnar cylinder main body that is a housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is supplied with a frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While it can be electrically connected to a certain grounding side, a metal frame plate 1311ad is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The AC 24V N (neutral) grounded side is not electrically connected and insulated, and the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the metal frame plate 1311ad are connected to a frame ground and a pad on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1. So that the state is insulated not electrically connected to the ground side is the N AC 24V supplied to Nko machine 1 (neutral).

  Further, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 360 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame constituted by the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is used as the outer frame 2). After the release, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310 can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities. (When the set value is changed), and the current set value that has been set can be checked (when the set current set value is checked). Thus, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 360 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame constituted by the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is removed from the outer frame). Otherwise, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the setting value can be set (when the setting value is changed) or the setting value can be checked (set). In the case of confirming the current setting value), security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed, and the door frame 3 in FIG. 1 is used as a static elimination unit capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge. The main control board 1320 in FIG. 21 is a main control board box 1320 as a setting device capable of setting a plurality of types of winning parts that can be set in a state in which a decorative plating is applied to the entire front and back surfaces of the various decorative parts and electrostatic removal pads. A setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 accommodated together with 1310. At least the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 among the decorative plating, the electrostatic removal pad, and the setting key switch 1311a. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba provided in the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the constant key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value, so only a limited number of people including the game hall manager are allowed to possess it. And is limited to 2-3 people.

  In this way, a person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only a limited number of persons including the store manager of the game hall are allowed to carry and is limited to two to three persons) touches the static eliminator. Since the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge due to charging of the person himself / herself is removed by the static eliminator, the setting key that allows the person to set a plurality of types of winning probabilities Even if the switch 1311a is operated, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering through the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented. In addition, since at least the setting key switch 1311a of the static eliminator and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and spaced apart from each other, the influence of noise removed by the static eliminator is set. It does not reach the switch 1311a. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Moreover, the front frame comprised from the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 of FIG. 4 is provided as a front frame pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 of FIG. 4 as a frame body, and the door frame 3 is provided as a charge eliminating portion. Of the various decorative portions, the front and back surfaces are all provided with decorative plating, and the electrostatic removal pad is provided on the front frame. As a result, a person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only a limited number of persons including the store manager of the game hall are allowed to carry and is limited to two to three persons) is charged by himself and discharged electrostatically. The noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by the above can be removed by touching the static eliminator provided on the front frame.

  Further, among the various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3 as the static eliminating part, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the AC 24V N supplied to the pachinko machine 1. It is electrically connected to the ground side which is (neutral). As a result, among the various decorative parts provided in the door frame 3, the one on which the decorative plating is applied to the entire front and back surfaces is the frame ground of the pachinko machine 1 or the AC 24V N (neutral) supplied to the pachinko machine 1 The person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only a limited number of persons including the store manager of the game hall are allowed to have a limited number of persons. The noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge due to charging of itself to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ground side which is N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1 It can be removed by escaping.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. 4 is provided while being installed in the island facility of the game hall. On the rear side of the game board 5, a setting key mounted on a setting change board 1311 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 together with the main control board 1310 as a setting device capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities. The switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a ′ (hereinafter, simply referred to as “setting key switches 1311a, 1311a ′”) of FIGS. 71A and 71B, and the unconnected wiring from the island equipment of the game hall are set. As a protective member that can prevent contact with the key switches 1311a and 1311a ′, it is pivotally supported by the cover body of the drive board box 1730 in FIG. 70 and the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 71 (a). Protective cover 1304 provided openably and closably, and a cover body of drive board box 1730 in FIG. "Cover of the drive substrate box 1730, the protective cover 1304" to. A) described that is provided.

  Inside the island facility of the game hall, a plurality of types of wirings for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, and according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 Thus, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall.

  Thus, on the rear side of the game board 5, the cover body of the drive board box 1730 can be prevented so that unconnected wiring from the island equipment of the game hall can be prevented from contacting the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a ′. Since the protective cover 1304 is provided, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble due to contact due to unconnected wiring. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Further, as a first protective member covering the back of the game board 5, a back cover 640 of FIG. 70, a back cover 640 of FIGS. 71A and 71B (hereinafter simply referred to as “back cover 640”), A cover body of the drive board box 1730 of FIG. 70 as a second protective member protruding rearward with respect to the rear surfaces of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a ′ (the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a ′), FIG. a) a protective cover 1304 that is pivotally supported by the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 'in FIG. 71B, and a cover body of the driving board box 1730 in FIG. 71B (hereinafter simply referred to as “the driving board box 1730. Cover body, protective cover 1304 "), and unconnected wiring from the island equipment of the game hall is connected to the first protective member and the second protective member. Set by member key switch 1311a, and is able to prevent contact to 1311a '. As a result, the rear stage of the game board 5 is protected by the back cover 640 that is the first protection member, and the rear surface of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a ′ (the setting key cylinders of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a ′). Is protected by a cover body and a protective cover 1304 of a drive board box 1730 which is a second protective member protruding rearward with respect to this rear surface (front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a ′). By the protection in the second stage and the protection in a total of two stages, it is possible to prevent the unconnected wiring from the island facility of the game hall from contacting the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a ′.

  Also, on the rear side of the game board 5, there is provided a mounting base on which the setting key switch 1311a ′ of FIG. 71 (b) can be mounted on the rear surface, and the mounting base is based on the length of the setting key switch 1311a ′ in the front-rear direction. The position of the rear surface is set. Thus, based on the length of the setting key switch 1311a ′ in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction (ie, depth direction) when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), unconnected wiring from the island facility of the game hall is set to the setting key switch 1311a ′. The position of the rear surface of the mounting base to which the setting key switch 1311a ′ can be attached can be set so as to prevent contact. As this mounting base, the length of the board holder 1200 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 is shorter than the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5. The board holder 1200 'may be a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200' so that the front portions of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a 'do not contact the floor of the game hall. In addition to the length in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction), a recess is formed in the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 to which the board holder 1200 ′ is attached, and the depth of the recess (the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1 ( In other words, it may be adjusted according to the length in the depth direction), or it may be patched by the recess and the substrate holder 1200 ′. Front view the front-rear direction of the mobile terminal 1 (i.e. the depth direction) may be adjusted the length of the.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 is provided as a board on which electronic components are mounted, and the key is operated by operating the setting key. A resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 as a key switch whose signal line is electrically connected to the electronic component, The main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 is provided as a case body that can accommodate the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The resin type setting key switch 1311a is an insertion port formed on the front surface of the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a of FIG. 25 as an insertion port into which the setting key is inserted. The non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab shown in FIG. 25 as the non-conductive member on which 1311ab is formed and the resin type setting shown in FIG. 25 as the conductive member for fixing the resin type setting key switch 1311a. And a metal frame plate 1311ad in the key switch 1311a. The main control board box 1320 in FIG. 21 has an opening in the portion corresponding to the insertion port 1311aba formed in the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. A through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the control board box 1320 is formed, and the insertion port 1311aba is exposed through the through hole 1301z in a state where the resin type setting key switch 1311a is accommodated. On the other hand, the metal frame plate 1311ad is not exposed through the through hole 1301z.

  In this way, in the state where the resin type setting key switch 1311a is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is formed on the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab. Whereas the insertion port 1311aba is exposed through a through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is the main control. Since it is not exposed through the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the board box 1320, a person who is charged with static electricity enters the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Even if you bring your finger close, Is prevented from entering the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a. As a result, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from changing. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Further, the main control board box 1320 has a rib part 1301za in FIG. 26 protruding rearward from the back surface of the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a protruding part along the inner periphery of the through hole 1301z. In this case, the strength around the through hole 1301z can be increased by the rib portion 1301za, so that the periphery of the through hole 1301z is bent by a human force to bend the periphery of the through hole 1301z and the resin type The setting key switch 1311a of the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab is enlarged, or the periphery of the through hole 1301z is damaged to enlarge the through hole 1301z and the through hole 1301z is made of a resin type. It is possible to prevent the gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab from being increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, and a predetermined key (setting key) Resin-type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 as a key device in which the signal line by operation is electrically connected to the electronic component. And. As the cylinder member in which the cylinder of the key device is formed, the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a of FIG. 25 is used as the casing of the key device of the resin type of FIG. The setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad. Further, the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side.

  Specifically, since the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is non-conductive, it is electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. Insulated state is not connected. Further, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is formed. A pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed in the metal frame plate 1311ad can be inserted. The setting change substrate 1311 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y.

  In this manner, the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated from the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a without being electrically connected. Since the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side, noise resistance (electromagnetic wave resistance) of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated. By strengthening, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from changing. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Further, since the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is a conductive metal member, it is assumed that noise is added to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. Even if (electromagnetic wave noise) invades, the main part is a board on which electronic components are mounted by attenuating the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The ground line of the control board 1310 can be prevented from changing.

  In addition, since the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is a non-conductive member, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated via the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab. Can be prevented from entering.

  The present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums ( The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a rotating drum or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the rotation center, the front door (front frame) 6002 is inserted into the main body by inserting a key into the key hole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise. The portion (box) 6004 can be opened.

  The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and in cooperation with the locking unit (not shown) It is used for opening and closing locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body, a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, a metal key hole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body. A rotation transmission member (not shown) that rotates together with a normal metal key that is inserted into the key hole 6005 and rotates. The cylinder body of the metal locking device has a rear end attached to the front piece portion through the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and from the rear end toward the front side at a position facing the central axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. The pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder are inserted into the pair of cutouts, whereby the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the key hole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcement unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to give rigidity, and the main body portion (not shown) via the door frame metal ground wire ( (Box) 6004 is electrically connected to a grounding board provided in the interior. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side. This earth substrate (not shown) is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the game hall, and via the island equipment ground wire (not shown) It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An opening switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 is disposed on the main body portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. Yes. This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by an opening / closing operation by a metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not arranged in the vicinity of the metal locking device and is positioned below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An opening switch is arranged on the part (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. As described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decoration portions. Some of these various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all, and some are subjected to decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so that electromagnetic noise may enter. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via a wiring (not shown). (There are some decorative parts that are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through a wiring (not shown), and the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Some are electrically connected). Thereby, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground. In addition, electromagnetic noise that has entered the decorative parts of the various decorative parts that are decorated with plating on both the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via a wiring (not shown). Then, it is transmitted to the ground substrate provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, and is transmitted from the ground substrate to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as a frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

  In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004, You may provide an electrostatic removal pad as a static elimination part in the part which becomes an open side on the opposite side to the side (closed side) where a hinge is arrange | positioned. The electrostatic removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of the various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all. Some of the decorative parts are decorated with plating on the entire front and back, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is electrically connected to the metal door frame via a wiring (not shown). The ground substrate provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. A metal door frame reinforcement unit, a power supply board, and a power supply board terminal of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. It may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and current flows and the excessive voltage disappears. In addition, it has a performance to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, electromagnetic wave noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the slot machine 6000. .

  The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004.

  In the main control board box 1320, the setting change board on which the setting key switch 1311a (resin type or metal type) that can change the set value is mounted together with the main control board 1310. 1311 is also accommodated. That is, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided in the main body portion (box body) 6004. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a described above, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) A setting indicator 1310g configured as a single unit, the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above, and the like may be mounted.

  The setting key switch 1311a (resin type or metal type) has substantially the same configuration as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above.

  The configuration of the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board box 1320, etc. (including other configurations (modifications)) is substantially the same as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. However, the description thereof will be omitted. However, for example, an electromagnetic wave caused by electrostatic discharge by charging a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a will be described. As the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 for noise, the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a metal frame plate 1311ad, the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer tube 1311aa, and a metal setting. From key cylinder 1311ab and metal frame plate 1311ad Even if it is inserted, as described above, the setting key switch is formed by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposed long through-holes SLH1, having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed in the metal frame plate 1311ad of 1311a can be inserted. Since the SLH 2 is electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, the setting key switch 1311 a is accessed. Electromagnetic waves generated by electrostatic discharge by electrification The resin type setting key switch 1311a has a metal frame plate 1311ad, and the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer tube 1311aa, a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311ad. It can be attenuated by. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from being charged and electrostatically discharged from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, has no influence on the board ground, and the ground line for transmitting the board ground (ground) does not change. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  In addition, in the metal type setting key switch 1311a, the space between the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab is filled with a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) to make a metal setting key cylinder. Adopting a configuration in which 1311ab can be rotated with respect to a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, and a configuration in which the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab are not electrically connected but insulated. Also good. Even in this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the metal frame plate 1311ad and the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface of the setting change substrate 1311. (Solder surface) It penetrates into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 via the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed on the 1311y. Is blocked by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. That is, electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa can be prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. Thus, invasion of electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa can be prevented on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise is important for controlling the progress of the game via the setting change board 1311. Proceeding to the substrate ground of the main control board 1310 which is the control board can be reliably stopped, and no fluctuation is given to the ground line which transmits the board ground (ground). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window are provided. You can see through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the rendering device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the display window described above. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Peripheral control unit 1500 is based on various commands from main control board 1310, such as operation control of a plurality of movable effects, drawing control of effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  The main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of medals as game media into the medal slot 6008, and starts to display symbol information variation based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right Based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the change display of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  According to this slot machine 6000, a front door 6002 is provided on the front side as an openable / closable door, and a main control board 1310 accommodated in a main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, and a first key (game hall) The first operation (when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004) can be performed by the operation of a regular metal key possessed by a staff member such as a store clerk. As a first device, a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a second operation (setting value) by operating a second key (setting key) different from the first key. When changing, the main control board box can be used as a second device in which the signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic component. 13 0 and a, a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 to be housed together with the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities (when setting values are changed), and is capable of confirming a set current setting value (can be set). (When checking the current setting value). The metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. ing. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the front door (front frame) 6002, and the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side.

  Specifically, the metal cylindrical cylinder body which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side of the frame ground on the door frame side or N (neutral) of AC 24V. Connected to. Further, the metal frame of the setting key switch 1311a is formed by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed in the plate 1311ad can be inserted are the setting change boards. It is possible to be electrically insulated from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of 1311. For this reason, as a casing of the setting key switch 1311a, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, a metal frame plate 1311ad is formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. In addition to being electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground), the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal frame plate 1311ad, a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab. Are electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311.

  As described above, since the housing of the metal locking device provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, the metal locking device is temporarily subjected to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Even if it intrudes, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is released to the ground side, so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed, and the front door (front frame) As a case of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of 6002, the resin-type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being connected to the ground side of the metal frame plate 1311ad. The setting key switch 1311a includes a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311. Since d is not electrically connected to the ground side but is insulated, even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, this intruding noise (Electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from changing, and the metal type In the setting key switch 1311a, even when noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is made of metal. Outer cylinder 1311aa, metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and metal frame It is possible to prevent giving the variation of the ground line in the main control board 1310 is a substrate on which electronic parts are mounted by attenuating a plate 1311ad itself. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  Also, a metal columnar cylinder body which is a housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the slot machine 6000 with an AC voltage of 24V. While being electrically connected to the ground side which is N (neutral), the resin type setting key switch 1311a supplies the metal frame plate 1311ad to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the slot machine 6000. The AC 24V N (neutral) ground side is not electrically connected and insulated, and the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and The metal frame plate 1311ad is located on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000. Ground is N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the frame ground and the slot machine 6000 and not electrically connected are insulated. As a result, the metal cylindrical cylinder main body, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is supplied with the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the AC 24V N (neutral) supplied to the slot machine 6000. On the other hand, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the metal frame plate 1311ad is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the slot machine 6000. The AC 24V N (neutral) grounded side is not electrically connected and insulated, and the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the metal frame plate 1311ad So that the state is insulated not grounded side and electrically connected an N AC 24V supplied to the frame ground and the slot machine 6000 of the door frame side (neutral) of Tomashin 6000.

  Further, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by a metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is changed to a main body portion (box) 6004. After the release, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310 can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities. (When the set value is changed), and the current set value that has been set can be checked (when the set current set value is checked). Thus, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and the locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is the main body (box). Otherwise, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the setting value can be set (when the setting value is changed) or the setting value can be checked (set). In the case of confirming the current setting value), security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

  In addition, the slot machine 6000 includes the main control board 1310 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, and a signal line generated by the operation of the setting key as a key is electrically connected to the electronic parts. As a key switch to be connected, a resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this resin type setting key switch 1311a can be accommodated. A main control board box 1320 is provided as a simple case body. The resin type setting key switch 1311a is formed with an insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a as an insertion port into which the setting key is inserted. Non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab as a non-conductive member and a metal frame plate in resin-type setting key switch 1311a as a conductive member for fixing a resin type setting key switch 1311a 1311ad. The main control board box 1320 is a case of the main control board box 1320 as an opening at a portion corresponding to the insertion port 1311aba formed in the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The through hole 1301z formed in the body 1301 is formed, and in the state where the resin type setting key switch 1311a is accommodated, the insertion port 1311aba is exposed through the through hole 1301z. The frame plate 1311ad is not exposed through the through hole 1301z.

  In this way, in the state where the resin type setting key switch 1311a is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is formed on the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab. Whereas the insertion port 1311aba is exposed through a through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is the main control. Since it is not exposed through the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the board box 1320, a person who is charged with static electricity enters the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Even if you bring your finger close, Is prevented from entering the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a. As a result, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from changing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  Also, the main control board box 1320 has a rib part 1301za protruding from the back surface of the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 toward the rear as a protruding part along the inner periphery of the through hole 1301z. In this case, the strength around the through hole 1301z can be increased by the rib portion 1301za, so that the periphery of the through hole 1301z is bent by a human force to bend the periphery of the through hole 1301z and the resin type The setting key switch 1311a of the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab is enlarged, or the periphery of the through hole 1301z is damaged to enlarge the through hole 1301z and the through hole 1301z is made of a resin type. It is possible to prevent the gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab from being increased.

  Further, according to the slot machine 6000, the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted and the signal line by the operation of a predetermined key (setting key) are electrically electronic. A resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310 is provided as a key device connected to the component. The non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a as the cylinder member in which the cylinder of the key device is formed is a metal in the resin type setting key switch 1311a as the casing of the key device. It is insulated without being electrically connected to the manufactured frame plate 1311ad. Further, the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side.

  Specifically, since the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is non-conductive, it is electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. Insulated state is not connected. Further, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is formed. A pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape along the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed in the metal frame plate 1311ad can be inserted. The setting change substrate 1311 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y.

  In this manner, the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated from the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a without being electrically connected. Since the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side, noise resistance (electromagnetic wave resistance) of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated. By strengthening, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from changing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  Further, since the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is a conductive metal member, it is assumed that noise is added to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. Even if (electromagnetic wave noise) invades, the main part is a board on which electronic components are mounted by attenuating the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The ground line of the control board 1310 can be prevented from changing.

  In addition, since the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is a non-conductive member, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated via the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab. Can be prevented from entering.

  In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as gaming media to the tray 6026.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame lower unit 120 The bulging part 123 The apparatus arrangement | positioning part 130 Top plate (storage plate)
131 Storage area 131a Front area 131b Side area 132 Bottom wall 133 Rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front peripheral wall 135 Supply port 136 Delivery port 137 Alignment part 138 Storage light emission decoration part (light emission decoration part)
138a LED
150 Door frame effect device (effect device)
1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (production control means)
1512 Production display control unit (production control means)
1600 effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3200 Back second production unit (front decoration)
3210 Rotating decorative body (front decorative body)
3228 Back second outer decorative body (front decorative body)
3229 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3230 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3300 Back third stage production unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring ornament (movable ornament)
3312 First decorative body 3313 Second decorative body 3320 Back third upper drive motor (drive motor)
3330 Lower unit 3331 Lower vertical ring decorative body (movable decorative body)
3332 First decorative body 3333 Second decorative body 3340 Back third lower drive motor (drive motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left side ring decorative body (movable decorative body)
3352 First decorative body 3353 Second decorative body 3360 Back third left drive motor (drive motor)
3370 Right unit 3371 Right side ring decorative body (movable decorative body)
3372 First decorative body 3373 Second decorative body 3380 Back third right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and a design is based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that executes a predetermined hit game when a win result is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol,
A setting information changing means capable of setting the setting information related to the probability that the winning result is derived to any one of a plurality when the operation mode at the time of powering on the gaming machine is a specific operation mode;
Variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern related to the variation display of the symbol from a predetermined variation pattern table based on the result of the lottery,
When determining the variation pattern by the variation pattern determining means, a variation pattern table corresponding to the operation mode at the time of power-on is used at a specific time after the power-on of the gaming machine. To play.